Fluidsim5 Enus v1

FluidSIM® 5
User’s Guide
11/13
FluidSIM is a teaching tool for simulating pneumatics, hydraulics,
electrics/electronics and digital technique. It can be used in combi-
nation with the Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG training hardware,
but also independently. FluidSIM was developed as a joint venture
between the University of Paderborn, Festo Didactic GmbH & Co.
KG, Denkendorf, and Art Systems Software GmbH, Paderborn.
Contents
1. Welcome! 13
2. Installation 15
2.1 Technical Requirements 15

2.2 Installation and Online Activation 15
2.2.1 Import Online Activation Notes 16
2.3 Installation with license connector 16
2.4 FluidSIM Full Version: Installation from DVD 17
3. First steps 18
3.1 Create a new circuit diagram 18

3.2 Organize symbols, libraries and circuit diagrams 21
3.3 Insert symbol from menu 22
3.4 Symbol libraries 24
3.4.1 Create user library 25
3.5 Circuit files 26
4. Library and project window 27
4.1 Change window position 27

4.2 Automatic show and hide 27
5. Edit circuit 29
5.1 Insert and arrange symbols 29

5.2 Using the Festo product catalogue with FluidSIM 29
5.3 Connect connectors / ports 33
5.4 Automatically connect connectors 35
5.5 Insert T distributor 36
5.6 Move lines 39
5.7 Define the characteristics of lines 42
5.8 Delete line 44
© Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 3

5.9 Set the properties of the connectors 44
5.10 Define component connector / set T distributor 46
5.11 Delete component connector 47
5.12 Configure a way valve 47
5.13 Configure cylinder 49
5.14 Group symbols 51
5.15 Create macro objects 51
5.16 Delete symbol groups and macro objects 52
5.17 Align symbols 52
5.18 Mirror symbols 52
5.19 Rotate symbols 53
5.20 Scale symbols 54
6. Drawing frame 56
6.1 Editable labels 56

6.2 Use a drawing frame 57
6.3 Page dividers 61
7. Additional tools for creating drawings 64
7.1 Drawing tools 64

7.1.1 Grid 64
7.1.2 Alignment lines 64
7.1.3 Object snap 65
7.1.4 Rulers 66
7.2 Drawing levels 66
7.3 Cross-references 68
7.3.1 Create cross-references from symbols 70
7.3.2 Cross-reference representation 70
7.3.3 Manage cross-references 71
7.4 Drawing functions and graphical elements 72
7.4.1 Interruption/Potential 74
7.4.2 Conduction line 76
7.4.3 Line 78
7.4.4 Polyline (set of connected lines) 80
7.4.5 Rectangle 81
4 © Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

7.4.6 Circle 83
7.4.7 Ellipse 84
7.4.8 Text 86
7.4.9 Image 86
7.5 Check drawing 88
8. GRAFCET 89
8.1 Steps 89
8.2 Actions 90
8.3 Transitions 92
8.4 Stored effective actions (allocations) 94
8.5 Linking GRAFCET variables with the electrical part of
FluidSIM 95
8.6 Quick reference for the FluidSIM-relevant GRAFCET concepts
98
8.6.1 Initialization 98
8.6.2 Sequence rules 99
8.6.3 Sequence selection 99
8.6.4 Synchronization 99
8.6.5 Transient sequence / unstable step / virtual triggering 100
8.6.6 Determining the values of GRAFCET variables 100
8.6.7 Checking the entries 100
8.6.8 Admissible characters for steps and variables 101
8.6.9 Variable names 101
8.6.10 Access to labels of fluidic and electrical components 102
8.6.11 Functions and formula entry 103
8.6.12 Delays / time limits 104
8.6.13 Boolean value of an assertion 104
8.6.14 Target information 104
8.6.15 Partial GRAFCETs 105
8.6.16 Macro-steps 105
8.6.17 Compulsory commands 105
8.6.18 Enclosing step 106

9. Dimension 107
9.1 Draw dimension 107

9.2 Settings for the dimension 108
10. Equipment identifications and designation conventions 110
10.1 Renumber Designations 112
11. Component attributes 117
11.1 Component attributes in the Properties dialog window 118

11.2 Identification 120
11.3 Catalog Properties 123
11.4 User Defined Properties 123
11.5 Drawing Properties 125
11.6 Main and secondary components 126
11.7 Linking main and secondary components 126
11.8 Link solenoid valves and solenoid coils 128
11.9 Attributes of the text components 132
11.10 Link text components with attributes 135
11.11 Text components with specified links 137
11.12 Change the properties of multiple objects simultaneously
138
11.12.1 Drawing Properties 138
11.12.2 Main Component 140
12. Parts list management and analyses 142
12.1 Display parts list 143

12.2 Find components from the parts on the circuit diagram 143
12.3 Set parts list properties 145
12.4 Export parts list 147
13. Manage projects 149
13.1 Create new project 149

13.2 Project nodes 150

13.2.1 Project archiving 150
13.3 Circuit and parts list nodes 151
13.4 Unplaced objects 152
14. Circuit and project properties 155
14.1 Attributes 156

14.1.1 Predefined placeholders 158
14.2 Page Dividers 159
14.3 Basic Unit Length 159
14.4 Language 160
14.5 Encryption 161
14.6 Designation Conventions 163
14.7 Cross Reference Representation 164
15. Special functions for electric circuits 165
15.1 Potentials and conduction lines 165

15.2 Cables and wiring 167
15.2.1 Manage cables 173
15.2.2 Insert cable map 174
15.2.3 Insert cable list 176
15.3 Terminals and terminal strips 179
15.3.1 Set terminals 179
15.3.2 Set multiple terminals 181
15.3.3 Create terminal strips 183
15.3.4 Manage terminal strips 184
15.4 Terminal diagram 186
15.4.1 Set links 188
15.5 Contact images 192
16. Circuit input and output 195
16.1 Print circuit diagram and parts list 195

16.2 Import DXF file 197
16.3 Export circuit 197

17. Options 199
17.1 General 199

17.2 Save 200
17.3 Folder Locations 201
17.4 Language 202
17.5 Dimension 203
17.6 Designation Conventions 204
17.7 Cross Reference Representation 205
17.8 Connector Links 206
17.9 Warnings 207
17.10 Automatic Updates 208
17.11 Text Sizes 209
18. Menu overview 210
18.1 File 210

18.2 Edit 213
18.3 Insert 216
18.4 Draw 218
18.5 Page 219
18.6 Project 220
18.7 View 221
18.8 Library 224
18.9 Tools 225
18.10 Window 226
18.11 Help 227
19. Functional diagram 228
19.1 Edit Mode 229

19.1.1 Set diagram properties 229
19.1.2 Table textboxes 230
19.1.3 Adjust the presentation of the diagrams 233
19.2 Draw diagram curve 234
19.3 Insert signal elements 235
19.4 Insert text boxes 236

19.5 Draw signal lines and insert signal connections 238
19.5.1 Free-draw signal lines 238
19.5.2 Drawing signal lines from signals 240
19.5.3 Draw signal lines from diagram support points 240
19.6 Insert additional signal lines 241
19.7 Insert row 241
19.8 Delete row 241
19.9 Additional editing functions 242
19.9.1 Zoom 242
19.9.2 Undo editing steps 242
20. The Component Library 243
20.1 Hydraulic Components 243

20.1.1 Service Components 243
20.1.2 Configurable Way Valves 250
20.1.3 Mechanically Actuated Directional Valves 255
20.1.4 Solenoid-actuated Directional Valves 262
20.1.5 Shutoff Valves 268
20.1.6 Pressure Control Valves 272
20.1.7 Pressure Switches 283
20.1.8 Flow Control Valves 284
20.1.9 Continuous valves 288
20.1.10 Actuators 293
20.1.11 Measuring Devices 298
20.2 Pneumatic Components 301
20.2.1 Supply Elements 301
20.2.2 Configurable Way Valves 307
20.2.3 Mechanically Operated Directional Valves 312
20.2.4 Solenoid Operated Directional Valves 319
20.2.5 Pneumatically Operated Directional Valves 323
20.2.6 Shutoff Valves and Flow Control Valves 328
20.2.7 Pressure Operated Switches 334
20.2.8 Pressure Operated Switches 337
20.2.9 Vacuum Technique 338
20.2.10 Valve Groups 341
20.2.11 Continuous valves 343

20.2.12 Actuators 344
20.2.13 Measuring Instruments 353
20.3 Electrical Components 355
20.3.1 Power Supply 355
20.3.2 Actuators / Signal Devices 359
20.3.3 Measuring Instruments / Sensors 360
20.3.4 General Switches 362
20.3.5 Delay Switches 363
20.3.6 Limit Switches 364
20.3.7 Manually Operated Switches 367
20.3.9 Proximity Switches 369
20.3.10 Relay 370
20.3.11 Controller 372
20.3.12 EasyPort/OPC/DDE Components 374
20.4 Electrical Components (American Standard) 376
20.4.1 Power Supply 376
20.4.2 General Switches 376
20.4.3 Delay Switches 377
20.4.4 Limit Switches 378
20.4.5 Manually Operated Switches 379
20.4.7 Relays 381
20.5 Electronic components 382
20.5.1 Power supply 382
20.5.2 Passive components 383
20.5.3 Semiconductor 387
20.5.4 Measuring instruments / Sensors 394
20.6 Digital Components 395
20.6.1 Constants and Terminals 395
20.6.2 Basic Functions 397
20.6.3 Special Functions 399
20.7 GRAFCET Elements 405
20.7.1 GRAFCET 405
20.8 Miscellaneous 408
20.8.1 Miscellaneous 408

21. Learning, Teaching, and Visualizing Technologies 413
21.1 Information about Single Components 413

21.1.1 Component Descriptions 413
21.1.2 Component Illustrations 416
21.2 Selecting Didactics Material from a List 422
21.2.1 Tutorial 422
21.2.2 Component Library 424
21.2.3 Didactics Material 427
21.3 Presentations: Combining Instructional Material 429
21.4 Extended Presentations in the Microsoft PowerPoint Format
435
22. Didactics Material Survey (Pneumatics) 438
22.1 Basics 438

22.2 Supply elements 440
22.3 Actuators 445
22.4 Directional control valves 450
22.5 Shutoff valves 461
22.6 Flow control valves 468
22.7 Pressure control valves 470
22.8 Time delay valve 472
22.9 Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit 475
22.10 Educational Films 477
22.10.1 Educational Films 477
22.11 Standard Presentations 478
22.11.1 Presentations 478
23. Didactics Material Survey (Hydraulics) 480
23.1 Applications 480

23.2 Components of a Hydraulic Plant 481
23.3 Symbols 483
23.4 Some Physical Fundamentals 487
23.5 Components of a Power Unit 490
23.6 Fundamentals of Valves 494
23.7 Pressure Valves 496

23.8 Way Valves 503
23.9 Shutoff Valves 512
23.10 Flow Valves 516
23.11 Hydraulic Cylinders and Motors 519
23.12 Gauges 522
23.13 Exercises 523
23.14 Educational Films 533
23.14.1 Educational Films 533
23.15 Standard Presentations 533
23.15.1 Presentations 534
Index 535

Welcome!
Chapter 1
1. Welcome!
Welcome to FluidSIM! Thank you for purchasing the FluidSIM

training software. This handbook functions both as an introduction
to FluidSIM and as a reference manual outlining the possibilities,
concepts, and operation of the software package. This handbook,
however, is not intended to help in defining special aspects of
hydraulics or pneumatics. Concerns of this nature can be found in
the Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG textbook series.
A major feature of FluidSIM is its close connection with CAD func-

tionality and simulation. FluidSIM allows DIN-compliant drawing of
electro-fluidic circuit diagrams and can perform realistic simula-
tions of the drawing based on physical models of the components.
Simply stated, this eliminates the gap between the drawing of a
circuit diagram and the simulation of the related technical system.
The CAD functionality of FluidSIM has been specially tailored for
fluidics. For example, while drawing, the program will check wheth-
er or not certain connections between components are permissible.
Another feature of FluidSIM results from its well thought-out di-
dactic concept: FluidSIM supports learning, educating, and visualiz-
ing hydraulic, pneumatic and electronic knowledge. All components
are explained with textual descriptions, figures, and animations
that illustrate underlying working principles; exercises and educa-
tional films mediate knowledge about both important circuits and
the usage of components. The development of FluidSIM included
special emphasis on both an intuitive and easy-to-learn user inter-
face. The user will quickly learn to draw and simulate electro-
hydraulic and electro-pneumatic circuit diagrams.
Users of this software are encouraged to contribute tips, criticism,

and suggestions for improvement of the program via email at
info@fluidsim.com
did@de.festo.com
Moreover, the newest updates can be found at our Internet site at
www.fluidsim.com
www.festo-didactic.com

Installation
Chapter 2
2. Installation
2.1 Technical Requirements
You need a computer with that runs using Windows XP (SP3),

Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 8.
If you intend to simulate complex circuit diagrams, a dual-core CPU

is recommended.
Having purchased the full version of FluidSIM , you received two

DVD-ROMs and possibly a license connector. The installation pro-
cedure is described in the following sections. The full version of
FluidSIM is available in two versions: A version that supports the
automatic online activation and the license connector version.
2.2 Installation and Online Activation
For the online activation you will need a computer with internet
access. During the installation you will be prompted to activate
FluidSIM . There are three ways of doing so:
— Automatic Online Activation This variant requires Internet

access from the computer where FluidSIM is to be activated
and realizes a completely automated procedure.
— Indirect Activation In this variant an activation dialog box is

opened that shows an Internet address (url) and your individu-
al license ID. With this information you can generate your indi-
vidual activation key at an arbitrary computer with Internet ac-
cess. Then, the activation key has to be entered in the activa-
tion dialog box of the installation PC.
— Call Festo to receive your individual activation key If you don’t

have Internet access or if the Internet activation fails, you can

call a service employee at weekday office hours who will pro-
vide you with your activation code. Please note: The displayed
phone number in Germany is available at European office times
only. Depending on the geographical position of your site, you
will find different telephone numbers for the software activa-
tion on the shipping box.
2.2.1 Import Online Activation Notes
During the activation of FluidSIM several features of your PC and

the product ID are used to generate an individual activation key.
This string is valid for your PC only. I.e., if your PC is substantially
modified or if you want to use another PC, your FluidSIM license
has to be transferred to the new hardware. Such a transfer requires
the deactivation of the license of the original PC, which is accom-
plished by uninstalling FluidSIM. The respective uninstallation
program can be found in the menu Start under “Deinstallation” or
in the control panel under “Software”. If a deactivation of FluidSIM
is not possible because of technical problems, as an exception your
license can be transferred without deactivation.
Note that a license transfer without a preceding deactivation is

possible only a few times. Also note that if your license has been
transferred to another PC, it cannot be re-activated for the initial PC
without deactivating it before.
2.3 Installation with license connector
Depending on the license model (single-position systems or net-

work), the license connector is needed only during the Installation
of FluidSIM or must be attached to the so-called license server .
The network license connector defines how many instances of
FluidSIM can be running at the same time in the network. If you
attempt to start more instances than the allowed number, an error
message is displayed. If the license server is down or if the license
connector has been removed from the system, all circuits that are

already open and modified can be saved before FluidSIM termi-
nates. If the license server is up again FluidSIM starts as usual.
Details for a network installation of FluidSIM is given in an adden-

dum of the FluidSIM package and can also be found as pdf-file
“net_inst.pdf” in the “Doc”-Folder of the installation DVD.
2.4 FluidSIM Full Version: Installation from DVD
If your software needs a license connector, connect the key not

until you are requested by the installation program.
→ Switch on your PC and login with administrator permissions.
→ Insert the DVD.
Usually the installation program starts automatically. Please run it

manually if it doesn’t.
After a few seconds the startup screen of the installation program

appears. Here you can choose whether to install the student ver-
sion or the full version of FluidSIM. When installing the full version,
please select the appropriate license connector (single-position
systems or network). If you got a FluidSIM version for online activa-
tion no license connector is necessary but only your individual
product ID is required, which is printed on the back of the DVD
cover. Note that the student version does neither require a license
connector nor a product ID.
→ Follow the directions as they appear on the screen. If you are

unsure how to answer or are unsure of a question, simply click
“Next >>”.

First steps
Chapter 3
3. First steps
3.1 Create a new circuit diagram
→ Select the New / File... menu item from the File menu.
An empty circuit diagram window opens in which you can insert

symbols and connect them with lines. You should set the diagram
size in advance.
→ Select the Paper Size... menu item from the Page menu.

Figure 3/1: Page dialog window, Drawing Size tab: setting the
drawing size
If you use a drawing frame then FluidSIM can automatically adjust

the paper size. If you wish to manually define the drawing size then
deactivate the “Adopt from drawing frame” option and select the
drawing’s desired dimensions and orientation. If the drawing’s
dimensions are larger than your printer’s printing area then you can
distribute your drawing across several pages (tiles).
To retain a better overview you can create attributes for every

circuit drawing.

→ Click the “Attributes” tab.
Figure 3/2: Page dialog window, Attributes tab: creating attrib-

utes
The attribute table allows you to save any desired data in the form
of attribute value pairs. The associated placeholders (attributes
with the same name) in the drawing frame are replaced by the
values entered.

You can also access this dialog window directly by using the Page
menu and the Properties... menu item.
3.2 Organize symbols, libraries and circuit diagrams
In order to support the organization of the different document

types in FluidSIM all of the circuit files are assigned to one of three
groups.
Symbols Symbols are formal, abstract models providing a graphical repre-

sentation of the function of a component or component group. This
can consist of simple circuit symbols or entire circuits. Symbols can
be inserted into their own circuits and linked between the connect-
ing points. The insert can be performed either via the Insert menu
or via drag and drop from a library window. Symbols can be com-
piled into library files with the lib file suffix.
Libraries Libraries are hierarchically organized collections of symbols. In

addition to the standard library, which users cannot modify, users
can compile any desired number of their own libraries. You can find
functions for organizing the libraries on the Library menu as well
as on the context menu of the currently active library. To switch
libraries use the tab in the upper margin of the library window.
Library files have the lib file suffix.
Circuits The default location for circuits is in the FluidDraw folder con-
tained in the My Documents folder defined by the operating sys-
tem. These have the circ file suffix.
Note: It is worthwhile to create a new sub-folder in the FluidDraw

directory for every customer or every project.

3.3 Insert symbol from menu
To find a specific symbol you can either enter characteristic key

words in the Find Symbol dialog windows or navigate through the
hierarchical structure.
→ Where necessary open a new window and select the Find

Symbol Description... entry on the Insert menu.
The Find Symbol dialog window then opens. You can enter your
search terms in the “Search” input line. Separate the individual
search terms using commas or spaces. Neither the order of the
search terms nor upper or lower case letters have any influence on
the search results.

Figure 3/3: Find Symbol dialog window
You can see the symbols found in the two results lists. The library
hierarchy is displayed on the left-hand side although only those
branches appear which contain matching symbols. An alphabetical
list of the search hits is displayed on the right-hand side. The sym-
bol of the highlighted entry is shown in the preview. Once you have
found the symbol that you were looking for, you can select it using
the OK button or by double-clicking on the appropriate row in the
results list. The symbol then “hangs” on the mouse pointer and is
placed by left-clicking on the drawing area.

With the Fuzzy Search option you can activate a tolerance in order
to achieve results despite minor typing errors or spelling variants.
In addition to the option of inserting a specific symbol using the

Find Symbol dialog window you can also insert a real component
along with its part number and technical details from the Festo
product catalogue. You can find details of how to use the Festo
product catalogue with FluidSIM under Using the Festo product
catalogue with FluidSIM.
3.4 Symbol libraries
FluidSIM is capable of managing multiple libraries, each of which is

displayed in a tab in the library window. Libraries which cannot be
modified in FluidSIM are labeled with a lock symbol in the tab.
This applies to standard library as well as to symbol folders which
FluidSIM does not manage itself or for which the registered user
does on possess write authorization.
Every library is displayed hierarchically. Every hierarchy level can by

shown or hidden by clicking on the group name. Right-clicking in a
library opens a context menu offering the following menu items for
editing the library:
View Defines the size of the symbols displayed. Small , Normal and
Large are available.
Expand All Opens all of the hierarchy levels.
Collapse All Closes all of the hierarchy levels.
There are three types of library:
The standard library This library is delivered with FluidSIM and cannot be modified.
Symbol folders Circuit and symbol files saved on the disk can be used as libraries
in FluidSIM. The files from the selected folder are added as a library
via the Library menu and the Add Existing Symbol Folder...

menu item. The library hierarchy corresponds exactly to the folder
hierarchy. These libraries cannot be modified in FluidSIM. The files
must be modified directly.
User libraries You can create and subsequently edit new libraries via the Library
menu and the Add New Library... menu item (see section Create
user library). Using drag and drop you can move the symbols and
groups within the library as desired.
3.4.1 Create user library
In order to be able to access frequently used symbols (or circuits)

more quickly multiple symbols can be compiled into libraries.
Libraries are saved as files with the lib file suffix. You can create
new libraries using the Library and the Add New Library... menu
item. Right-clicking in the new library opens a context menu with
which you can modify the library.
The following options are available:
Copy Copies the selected symbols to the clipboard
Paste Inserts the symbols into the library from the clipboard. These
symbols can also be partial circuits.
Delete Removes the selected symbols from the library.
Rename... Edits the text which libraries display below the symbol.
Add Existing Symbols... Opens a dialog window for selecting symbol files to be copied into
the library as new symbols.
Copy to Other Library Copies the selected symbols into another library. The available
libraries are listed in a submenu. Only the currently open libraries
are displayed here (appearing as tabs in the library window) which
are not write-protects (recognizable as no lock symbol is dis-
played).

New Sub-Folder... Creates a new hierarchy level below the active group. The active
group is the one belonging to the area below the mouse point and
can be recognized by the dark blue coloring.
Remove Sub-Folder Removes the hierarchy level which the mouse pointer is located in.
Rename Sub-Folder... Enables you to rename the hierarchy level which the mouse pointer
is located in.
3.5 Circuit files
FluidSIM circuit files have the circ file suffix and are saved as
compressed XML files. An option in the Save tab under the Op-
tions... menu item from the Tools menu allows you to deactivate
this compression so that the circuit files can be viewed as plain
text. This can be useful for version management software, for
example.
However, please note that editing a circ file outside FluidSIM can
cause the file to become unreadable or corrupted upon re-import.

Library and project window
Chapter 4
4. Library and project window
4.1 Change window position
The library window is anchored on the left-hand side by default and

the project window (when a project is open) is on the right-hand
side.
To separate the window from the anchor move the mouse pointer
to the upper margin. Click and hold the left mouse button. Move
the window a small distance towards the center of the screen. Now
release the left mouse button. Now you need to move the library
window to the lower right and the project window to the lower left.
Once a window has been separated from the anchor it can be
moved freely.
To re-anchor the window move the mouse pointer to the upper

margin. Click and hold the left mouse button. Move the window as
far as possible to the right or the left. Now release the left mouse
button. This window snaps into place. This enables you to anchor
the library window to the right and the project window to the left,
for example. You can also anchor both windows on the same side.
In this case you can move the desired window into the foreground
by clicking the associated tab.
4.2 Automatic show and hide
The tabs offer an additional, practical function: Automatically

showing and hiding the library or project window. Click the associ-
ated vertical tab “Library” or “Project” at the edge of the window.
This causes the window to be hidden providing a larger area for the
drawing. In order to make the window visible again move the
mouse pointer over the tab; the window opens once again. As soon
as you have performed your operations in this window and move
the mouse pointer to a circuit window the library window and / or

the project window are automatically hidden. To deactivate the
function click the associated tab again (this then appears de-
pressed).

Edit circuit
Chapter 5
5. Edit circuit
5.1 Insert and arrange symbols
You can insert symbols into the symbol window being edited using
the dialog window Find Symbol and by means of the libraries. You
can also transfer objects from every other window by selecting
them and dragging them to the desired window. Alternatively you
can also utilize the clipboard by selecting the items, choosing the
Copy menu item on the Edit menu, bringing the target window
into the foreground and selecting the Paste menu item on the
Edit menu. Using the mouse pointer to drag objects from one
window to another copies them. Dragging the objects from one
position to another within a window moves them. In order to copy
within a window you need to hold down the Shift key while
moving the mouse pointer. You can recognize operation by the
shape of the mouse pointer. During a move-operation a cross with
arrows appears, when copying a plus symbol also appears in
the lower right-hand corner of the cross.
5.2 Using the Festo product catalogue with FluidSIM
The standard FluidSIM installation already contains all of the prod-

ucts from Festo. That is why an extract from the Festo product
catalogue is installed in multiple languages.
Note: In order to remain up to date, we recommend always in-

stalling the latest product catalogue. FluidSIM recognizes more
current versions of the catalogue and uses these for the product
search.
There are two basic options for inserting symbols with part num-
bers and technical details in the circuit.

Via symbol search ( Insert If you wish to insert a symbol from the FluidSIM symbol library,
menu and Find Symbol simply select a graphical image which represents the function of a
component or component group. For the majority of the symbols
Description... menu entry) there is a large number of different products with different part
or from the FluidSIM library numbers and technical details (attributes and parameters). To
window select a product open the Properties dialog window by right-
clicking the symbol and click the Find... button.
About the Festo product The product catalogue represents a complete database of the
catalogue available Festo products. If you wish to insert the associated sym-
bols with part numbers and technical details for certain products
then select the From Festo Catalog... menu item from the Insert
menu. The Insert from catalog dialog window appears. Enter your
key words in the “Search” input line. The upper table contains the
search result. Highlighting a row there displays the associated
symbol in the preview. Select a product by double-clicking a table
row or using the Add to Selection button. Selected products are
collected in the lower table. When leaving the dialog window the
symbols of the selected products are inserted into the circuit win-
dow. The symbols contain the part numbers and technical details of
the previously selected products in the form of attribute value
pairs.
If you use a custom product database you can select it in the Prod-
uct Database list box. You can use the selected database in the
same way as the Festo product catalogue..

Figure 5/1: Insert from catalog dialog window
If you wish to insert one or more symbols from an existing shopping

cart select the From Festo Shopping Basket... menu item from the
Insert menu.

Figure 5/2: Insert Shopping Basket dialog window
If you have selected a product which does not possess a graphical

illustration then a text appears in the circuit diagram which takes
on the component attributes instead of the symbol. Both this text
and the identifiers for the symbols appear in the parts list.
You can make the settings that influence the generation of the
symbol designations and accessories using the General tab under
the Options... menu item from the Tools menu. If desired
FluidSIM can automatically generate text elements acquired from
the type attribute of the associated symbol.

5.3 Connect connectors / ports
In order to connect two component connectors with a line move the

mouse pointer to the component connector. You can recognize a
connector by the small circle at the end of a symbol’s connection
line. As soon as you have touched the line the mouse pointer trans-
forms into a crosshair .
Figure 5/3: Mouse pointer as a crosshair over a component con-

nector.
→ Now press the left mouse button and move the mouse pointer
to the connector which you wish to connect with the first.
You can recognize when you are over the connector by the shape of
the mouse pointer . If the mouse pointer is over a connector

which is already connected to a line then the prohibited sign
appears and no line can be connected.
→ Release the mouse button once you have touched the second
connector.
FluidSIM automatically lays a line between the two connectors.
Figure 5/4: Line between two connectors
Support points can be set when dragging lines. To do so simply

release the mouse button while dragging the line and click the
desired points. The line is completed as soon as you click a second
connector or the same point twice. You can cancel the action by
pressing the Esc key or the right mouse button.

5.4 Automatically connect connectors
FluidSIM supports two methods of automatically connecting con-

nectors. The first is to drop a symbol on an existing line. To be able
to use this method, the symbol must have at least two connectors
that precisely fit onto one or more existing lines and the lines that
will be produced must not cross the symbol. The following two
illustrations show this function.
Figure 5/5: Circuit before the connectors are automatically con-

nected
Figure 5/6: Circuit after the connectors are automatically connected
Another method of automatically connecting connectors is to

position symbols so that their connectors can be horizontally or
vertically connected with free connectors from other symbols. After

the symbol has been dropped the corresponding lines are automat-
ically drawn if they do not cross any symbols. The free connectors
can also be T distributors.
You can define how different objects' connectors are automatically

connected in the Connector Links tab under the Options... menu
item from the Tools menu. The following two illustrations show
this function.
Figure 5/7: Circuit before the connectors are automatically con-

nected
Figure 5/8: Circuit after the connectors are automatically connected
5.5 Insert T distributor
You do not need to utilize a special symbol in order to insert a T

distributor. FluidSIM automatically inserts a T distributor when you
lay a component connection on a line or lay a line segment to a
connection. If you wish to connect two lines then you can also draw

one line segment to another; FluidSIM then inserts two T distribu-
tors and connects these with a new line.
→ Move the mouse points to a connector and press the left

mouse button.
As soon as you touch the line the mouse pointer transforms into a
crosshair .
→ Release the mouse button once you have touched the desired
point on the line.
FluidSIM inserts a T distributor and automatically lays a line.
Figure 5/9: Line connection with inserted T distributor
Every T distributor can connect up to 4 lines with each other.

The default representation for the T distributor can be selected via
the corresponding drop-down list on the toolbar.
You can customize the representation of the T distributor by dou-

ble-clicking the T distributor or highlighting the T distributor and
selecting the Properties... menu item from the Edit menu. The
“Properties” dialog window opens. Select the “Representation”
tab.
Figure 5/10: T distributor dialog window. Tab: Representation
T distributor

Defines the representation of the basic T distributor. Here you can
select whether the distributor should be represented as a filled
circle or a simple intersection.
Cross-Link Defines that the T distributor should be represented as an electric

link. This representation has a knock-on effect on the connected
lines, which are automatically marked as links.
Junction Defines that the T distributor should be represented as an electric

junction. This representation has a knock-on effect on the termi-
nals' target search. With a junction, the target in the direction of a
straight line or right angle is found first and then the target via an
angled branch.
5.6 Move lines
Once you have joined two connectors you can then adjust the
length of the lines. You can move the line segments in parallel by
moving the respective line segment. You can see when you have
touched the line on the basis of the line-selection shape of the
mouse pointer.
→ Press the left mouse button and move the line segment or-
thogonally to the desired position.

Figure 5/11: Moving a line segment
→ Release the left mouse button; FluidSIM adjusts the adjoining

line segments in such a way that they remain connected.
If you move a line segment with is directly connected to a compo-

nent connector then FluidSIM may insert additional line segments
in order to prevent gaps.
If you move a line segment that is horizontally or vertically con-

nected with other line segments via T distributors then these line
segments are moved together with the T distributors.

Figure 5/12: Moving multiple line segments
Figure 5/13: Moving multiple line segments
If you only want to move the individual line segment in the case
described above then release the mouse button after you highlight
the line segment. Click the segment again and move it while keep-
ing the mouse button pressed.

Figure 5/14: Moving an individual line segment
5.7 Define the characteristics of lines
Lines, like other symbols, can be assigned an identification, cata-

logue properties and user-defined properties. You can find further
information on this under Component attributes in the Properties
dialog window.
You can also define the style, color and drawing layer of the lines by
double-clicking a line segment or highlighting the line segment and
selecting the Properties... menu item from the Edit menu. The
Line Properties dialog window opens. Select the Drawing Properties
tab in this window. The settings are applied to the entire line sec-
tion as far as the next connector or T distributor.

Figure 5/15: Line Properties dialog window: defining the properties
of a pneumatic or electric line
Layer Sets the drawing layer of the line.
Color Sets the color of the line.
Line Style Sets the line style of the line.
Line Width Sets the line thickness of the line.
Note: Working lines are typically displayed as solid lines, pilot lines
as dashed lines.

5.8 Delete line
To delete a line you can either highlight an associated line segment

and press the Del key or select the Delete menu item from the
Edit menu or highlight a component connector and press the
Del key. In these cases it is the line rather than the connector
itself that is deleted.
If you delete a T distributor which three or four lines are attached to

then all of the lines are deleted. If, on the other hand, only two lines
are connected then only the T distributor is deleted and the two
lines combined into one.
5.9 Set the properties of the connectors
You can assign a component connector an identification and a

blanking plug or silencer by double-clicking on the connector or by
selecting the connector and choosing the Properties... menu item
on the Edit menu. The Connector dialog window then opens.

Figure 5/16: Connector dialog window: Set the properties of a
connector
Identification You can enter a text identifying this connector into the input line. If
the Display option is activated then the identification is displayed
in the circuit diagram.
Whether or not the identification is actually displayed depends on

the option selected under Show Connector Descriptions .
Terminator Open the symbol list containing connector terminators by clicking

the button using the arrow. Select a suitable silencer or a blanking
plug.
Note: Please note that this symbol list is only available if a line is
not connected to the connector in question. If you wish to connect a
line to a sealed connector you first have to remove the blanking
plug or silencer. To do this select the empty field in the symbol list
with the connector terminators. The alignment of the connector
terminator can be set via the radio buttons.

5.10 Define component connector / set T distributor
You can set T distributors on existing lines or define a new compo-

nent connector by selecting the Define Connector... menu item
from the Insert menu. FluidSIM then switches to a special mode
in which the next mouse click sets a T distributor or defines the new
connector. You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc key or
the right mouse button.
Connectors in symbols can be set at any desired position.
Note: To set the connector precisely at the desired position we

recommend zooming the display window in closely to the relevant
symbol As soon as the mouse pointer is over a symbol the mouse
pointer converts into a cross-hair . Left-clicking sets the new
connector.
Figure 5/17: Define Connector... dialog window
Type of connector Selects the connector type. The following are available: “ Pneumat-
ic”, “Electric” and “Electric (Label)”.
Define multiple connectors Multiple connectors can be set one after the other if this option is
active. You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc key.

5.11 Delete component connector
To delete a component connector select this and choose the

Delete Connector menu entry on the Edit menu.
Note: Please note that the Delete menu entry or the Del do not
delete the connector but rather only one possibly connected line.
5.12 Configure a way valve
If you require a certain valve which you cannot find in the standard
FluidSIM library you can create your own valve symbol with the
help of the valve editor.
→ Insert a 5/n-way valve into a circuit window from the “Standard

Symbols / Pneumatic Symbols / Valves / Configurable Way
Valves” library.
To set the valve body and the actuation types of the way valves
double-click the valve. The dialog window Properties then opens.
Click the “Configure Valve” tab to access the valve editor.

Figure 5/18: Properties dialog window: Configure Valve tab
Left Actuation – Right Actua- You can select the actuation types of the valve from the “Manual-
tion ly”, “Mechanically” and “Pneumatically/Electrically” categories for
both sides of the valve. Click the button with the mouse pointer and
select a symbol element. A valve can have multiple actuation types
at the same time. If you do not want an actuation type from a
category then select the empty field in the list. You can also define
whether each side should have a spring return, pilot control, pneu-
matic spring or external supply.
Valve Body A configurable valve can possess a maximum of four switching

positions. One valve body can be selected for each switching posi-
tion. Click the associate button with the mouse points to open the

symbol elements list. Select a symbol element for each switching
position.. If you want to use less than four switching positions then
select the empty field on the list for the positions not required.
Initial Position Here you set which switching position the valve should use in the
normal position. Note: When determining this setting ensure that it
does not conflict with a possible spring return.
Dominant Signal This provides a graphical identification of whether the right or left
signal should dominate in the event of equally strong signals.
External Supply This creates an additional connector for connecting the external
supply for the controller.
5.13 Configure cylinder
If you require a certain cylinder which you cannot find in the stand-
ard FluidSIM library you can create your own cylinder symbol with
the help of the cylinder editor.
→ Insert a double-acting cylinder into a circuit window from the

“Standard Symbols / Pneumatic Symbols / Pneumatic Drives /
Configurable Cylinders” library.
To configure the cylinder double-clock on the cylinder. The dialog

window Properties then opens. Click the “Configure Cylinder” tab.
This brings you to the cylinder editor.

Figure 5/19: Properties dialog window: Configure Cylinder tab
Cylinder Type Click the button with the mouse pointer to open the symbol ele-
ments list. Select a cylinder type. Set whether the cylinder should
be single-acting or double-acting.
Return Spring Specifies whether a spring for the return should be inserted into the
right or left cylinder chamber.
Piston Click the button with the mouse pointer and select a symbol ele-
ment for the piston. Set whether the cylinder should possess end
position cushioning and whether this should be adjustable.

Piston Rod Click the button with the mouse pointer and select a symbol ele-
ment for the piston rod.
Piston Position Using the slider you can specify the relative piston position in 25 %
steps. 0 % stands for the completely retracted and 100 % extended
piston.
5.14 Group symbols
If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a group select these

and choose the Group menu item on the Edit menu. Groups can
also be nested, i.e. already grouped objects can be grouped again.
A group primarily serves as a drawing aid and does not represent

any new components. Every element in a group is included in a
parts list in exactly the same way as without being grouped. Dou-
ble-clicking on a group element opens the dialog window Proper-
ties of group element clicked.
If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a new component with

its own attributes create a macro object.
5.15 Create macro objects
If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a new component with

its own attributes then highlight these and select the Create Mac-
ro Object menu item from the Edit menu. This creates a new
macro object. Macro objects are included in the parts lists as inde-
pendent components. The original symbols are removed from the
parts lists. It is no longer possible to edit their component attrib-
utes.

5.16 Delete symbol groups and macro objects
To delete a group or a macro object select the group or the macro

object and select the Ungroup/Break Off menu item from the
Edit menu. This always deletes the outermost group. In order to
delete nested groups you must repeat the operation.
5.17 Align symbols
To align objects with each other, select these and choose the de-
sired orientation from the Align menu item on the Edit menu or
click the appropriate button on the toolbar.
5.18 Mirror symbols
The symbols can be both horizontally and vertically mirrored. Select

the desired mirror axis from the Mirror menu item on the Edit
menu or click the appropriate button on the toolbar. If you
select multiple objects at the same time then every object will be
mirrored separately. If you wish the operation to use a common
mirror axis then group the objects before the operation.
The geometrical properties can be entered directly via the “Drawing

Properties” tab. Enter a minus sign in front of the corresponding
scaling factor in order to mirror the symbol.

5.19 Rotate symbols
The symbols can be rotated in 90 degree steps or with the help of

the mouse pointer. To rotate objects in 90 degree steps, select the
desired angle from the Rotate menu item on the Edit menu or
click the appropriate button on the toolbar. If you select multiple
objects at the same time then every object will be rotated separate-
ly. If you wish the operation to use a common axis of rotation then
group the objects before the operation.
You can also rotate symbols with the help of the mouse pointer by
clicking and dragging the edge of the symbol. In order to do this
FluidSIM must be in Enable Rotate mode. This mode can be
activated or deactivated using the Enable Rotate menu item from
the Edit menu or by clicking the corresponding button on the
toolbar.
Note: Activating the Enable Scale mode deactivates the Enable

Rotate mode and vice versa.
→ In Enable Rotate mode click the edge of the symbol and hold
down the mouse button.
Figure 5/20: Rotate symbol
The current angle of rotation and guides are displayed.
→ Hold down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer until
the desired angle of rotation is achieved. The angle changes in
15 degree steps.
Note: If you also press the Shift key then you can rotate the
symbol steplessly.

Figure 5/21: Rotate symbol
The angle of rotation can also be entered directly in the properties

dialog window in the Drawing Properties tab.
5.20 Scale symbols
The component symbols can be scaled with the help of the mouse
pointer. In order to do this FluidSIM must be in Enable Scale
mode. This mode can be activated or deactivated using the Enable
Scale menu item from the Edit menu or by clicking the corre-
sponding button on the toolbar.
Note: Activating the Enable Scale mode deactivates the Enable

Rotate mode and vice versa.
→ In Enable Scale mode click the edge or corner of the symbol

and hold down the mouse button.
Figure 5/22: Scale symbol
The current scaling relationship to the current original size is dis-

played.
→ Hold down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer until
the desired size is reached. The scaling relationship is changed

in 0.25 steps. Note: If you also press the Shift key then you
can scale the symbol steplessly.
Figure 5/23: Scale symbol
You can simultaneously mirror the symbol by moving the mouse

pointer over the middle of the symbol to the opposite side.
Figure 5/24: Mirror symbol
The scaling factor can also be entered directly in the Properties

dialog window in the Drawing Properties tab.

Drawing frame
Chapter 6
6. Drawing fra me
In FluidSIM drawing frames are “circuit diagrams” which consists of

a title block and the frame with the field divisions. They can also be
displayed in other circuit diagrams. Existing CAD drawing frames
can be imported using the DXF import menu item on the File
menu. No order to make a drawing frame usable in different pro-
jects and circuit diagrams a number of texts in the title block must
be editable. These texts are Author, Creation date, Project name,
Page name and Page number, for example. In FluidSIM these are
text components with Attribute Link.
6.1 Editable labels
Texts in the title block of a drawing frame are text components. You
can use the imported texts or insert new text components at the
desired positions. Editable texts are text components with Attribute
Link. These texts are replaced by the corresponding attribute val-
ues of the project and the circuit.
→ Double-click a text component to open the Properties dialog

window.
→ Enter the name of the attribute to be linked, e.g. “creator”, in

the text field and activate the “Attribute Link” option.
Note: You can also use an imported text as an attribute name.
The attribute name is utilized as a placeholder. These attributes are

displayed in angle brackets in the “circuit diagram” with the draw-
ing frame. These attributes are replaced by the corresponding
attribute values when using the drawing frame in a project or circuit
diagrams. Edit the attribute values in the Properties dialog window
of the project or the circuit diagram. Clicking on a text component
of the drawing frame opens the Properties dialog window of the
project or the circuit which contains the attribute which the text
component refers to.

6.2 Use a drawing frame
Drawing frames can be copied into a project and/or a circuit dia-

gram. Insert the drawing frame via the Properties dialog window of
a project or a circuit.
All of the objects belonging to a drawing frame are inserted into the
circuit diagram as a copy. Changing the file with the drawing frame
at a later date does not have any effect on the circuit diagram which
the drawing frame was inserted into.
When copying the objects belonging to the drawing frame all of the
attributes are generated with the drawing frame’s text components
refer to and which do not exist in the project or circuit.

Figure 6/1: Page dialog window: inserting a drawing frame
Inherit From Project If this option is activated then the drawing frame specified in the
project is copied into the circuit. The path and the file used are
displayed in the “Frame File” line.
Pick... This button opens a dialog window in which an included frame can
be selected. These frame files are located in the frm directory and
are compiled in the project file frames.prj.

Edit Opens the frame file for editing.
Remove Local Frame Removes the drawing frame from the circuit. The drawing frame’s
attributes remain attributes of the project or circuit.
Reload Frame Attributes When inserting a drawing frame the attributes of the text compo-
nents of the drawing frame are listed. These attributes are saved
with the project or the circuit drawing and can be edited and delet-
ed. The Reload Frame Attributes button reloads all of the attrib-
utes from the drawing frame, thus updating the attribute list of the
project or the circuit drawing.

Figure 6/2: Select Drawing Frame dialog window
All of the available frame files are displayed as a tree on the right-
hand side. The desired drawing frame can be selected in this tree.
The drawing frame is then displayed in the preview. In addition the
“Attributes” list displays all of the attributes of the texts from the
drawing frame which were defined as links.

Browse... Opens a dialog window to select a circuit file to be used as a frame.
6.3 Page dividers
A circuit diagram or page can be logically divided into rows and

columns, which can be labeled with numbers or letters. These page
dividers are usually shown in the drawing frame and serve as a
means of orientation within the page. Above all they allow the
current paths (columns) of contacts to be specified in the contact
images.
The graphical representation of the page dividers matches the

logical page dividers in the drawing frames provided. The logical
page dividers can be shown and hidden via the Show Page Divid-
ers menu item from the View menu or via the button. They
are displayed at the left-hand as well as the upper edge of the
circuit window.
If the page dividers are visible you can customise them using the
mouse so that they match the graphical representation of the
drawing frame, for example. This customization can be done in
different ways:
→ Click and hold the mouse buttons in a column or row to move

the entire column or row.
Figure 6/3:
→ Click and hold the mouse buttons at the outer margin of a

column or row to move the margin of the column or row.

Figure 6/4:
The opposite margin is not moved and the columns or rows are
resized proportionally.
→ Click and hold the mouse buttons at the margin of an inner

division in a column or row to move the margin of the column
or row.
Figure 6/5:
In this case only the adjacent columns or rows are resized.
Columns and rows can be inserted and removed using the and
buttons.
The label type and the number of rows and columns can be defined
using the button. The settings are saved as page properties. The
following dialog window is opened:

Figure 6/6: Page dialog window, Page Dividers tab
Adopt from drawing frame Selecting this option only makes senses for pages that do not
represent drawing frames. This option must be deactivated if the
current page represents a drawing frame that is to be inserted into
other pages later.
If this option is activated then all settings that have been defined in
the drawing frame will be adopted.
Rows Defines the settings for the horizontal rows.
Columns Defines the settings for the vertical columns.
Number Defines the number of page dividers.
Numbering Numbers, lowercase letters or uppercase letters can be used for

numbering.
First Item Defines the first numbering item. The numbering will be continued
on analogously from this item.
Descending Order Changes the numbering order.
Reset Resets the page dividers to default values.

Additional tools for creating drawings
Chapter 7
7. Additional tools for creating dr awings
7.1 Drawing tools
7.1.1 Grid
For arranging the symbols and laying the lines it is often practical to
show a point or line grid. You can activate or deactivate the display
of the grid using the Show Grid menu item from the View menu.
You can also define further grid settings in the General tab under
the Options... menu item from the Tools menu.
In order to simplify handling the connectors snap into place when

they are close to a grid line. This makes it easier to find the precise
position when moving the connectors.
Note: The grid snap function may not be desired as it prevents free
positioning. In this case you can hold down the Ctrl key during
the moving operation; this temporarily deactivates the grid snap
function.
7.1.2 Alignment lines
Connectors between symbols should be exactly horizontal or verti-

cal wherever possible. Then they can be connected with a straight
line.
FluidSIM supports the exact positions firstly via the grid snap and
secondly via automatically displaying red alignment lines while
moving the selected objects.

→ Open a circuit file which contains multiple objects. Select one
of these and slowly move it back and forth above and next to
other objects.
Observe the dashed red lines which appear when two or more
connectors lie above each other.
Figure 7/1: Automatically display the alignment lines
In order to simplify handling the connectors snap into place when

they are close to an alignment line. This makes it easier to find the
precise position when moving the connectors.
Note: The grid snap function may not be desired as it prevents free
positioning. In this case you can hold down the Ctrl key during
the moving operation; this temporarily deactivates the alignment
lines and the grid snap function.
7.1.3 Object snap
Various snap points can be activated for precise drawing. During a

drawing operation the mouse pointer snaps into place as soon as it
is close to a snap point. The following snap functions are available:
Snap to Grid
Snap to Connector

Snap to End Point
Snap to Mid Point
Snap to Centre
Snap to Intersection
Press and hold the Ctrl key during a drawing operation to tempo-
rarily deactivate the object snap function.
7.1.4 Rulers
The rulers can be shown and hidden via View Show Rulers .
They are displayed at the left-hand as well as the upper edge of the
circuit window.
7.2 Drawing levels
FluidSIM supports 256 drawing levels which can be shown / hidden

and locked / unlocked individually. In addition you can also define
the color and line thickness for every drawing level. Using the
Drawing Layers... menu item on the View menu you can set the
properties of the individual layers and also insert a description.
Note: The drawing frame is located on layer “0” by default.

Figure 7/2: Drawing Layers dialog window
The drawing layer settings can be copied over as default settings

from the current circuit using the Inherit From Page button.
You can select the drawing layer where newly inserted objects
should be placed under “Default Layer” . If you do not want the
symbol layer to be changed when objects are inserted then select
the “Preserve Object Layer” option.
Objects located on a drawing layer for which the “Edit” option is

deactivated are visible but cannot be highlighted and therefore
neither moved nor deleted. This enables you to lock a drawing
frame, for example, if it was inserted manually and not via the
Properties dialog window for the circuit or project. In order to still
be able to edit objects on layers of this type you must activate the
“Edit” option for the corresponding layer.

Drawing layers for which the “Display” option is deactivated are
neither visible nor can they be edited.
7.3 Cross-references
Cross-references serve to link connected parts of a circuit drawing

when the entire drawing is spread across multiple pages. This
allows lines to be interrupted, for example, and continued on an-
other page.
FluidSIM offers two types of cross-references. Paired cross-

references consist of two cross-reference symbols that reference
each other. The two cross-reference symbols are linked via a
unique label that is entered for both symbols.
The option also exists to reference any object within a project from
a cross-reference symbol. The cross-reference is uni-directional in
this case: from the cross-reference to the target object. This allows
several cross-references to reference the same object.
Both types enable you to jump directly from a cross-reference to

the associated target. With the paired cross-reference the target is
the corresponding cross-reference, otherwise an object.
You jump to the corresponding target either using the Jump to

Target button in the properties dialog window for the cross-
reference symbol or by highlighting the cross-reference and select-
ing the Jump to Target menu item from the context menu.
The circuit drawings involved must belong to the same project.
Open the Cross-reference dialog window from the Edit menu and
the Properties... menu item. Alternatively you can open this
dialog window by double-clicking the cross-reference symbol or
using the Properties... context menu.

Figure 7/3: Cross-reference dialog window
Text This text is displayed in the cross-reference
Label Defines the labels via which the linked cross-references are identi-
fied.
Link If this option is activated then the label entered constitutes a link to
a target object. The cross-reference only works in the direction of
the target object in this case. This option can be combined with the
Show Location option to show the location of the target object.
Target Text If the Show Location option is activated then the location of the
target object will be displayed here. The representation of the
location is defined in the Cross Reference Representation tab in the
properties dialog window for the page or project.

If Show Description is activated then the text of the corresponding
cross-reference is displayed for paired cross-references, otherwise
the description of the target object is displayed.
Display Target Text If this option is activated then the above-mentioned text from the
Target Text field is displayed below the text for this cross-reference.
Jump to Target Activating this button opens the circuit window containing the
corresponding cross-reference. The associated symbol is indicated
by an animation.
The font type, text color and alignment of the texts to be displayed
can also be customized.
7.3.1 Create cross-references from symbols
You can generate a cross-reference from one or more symbols. To

do so highlight the corresponding symbols and select the Edit
Create Cross-reference menu item or the Create Cross-reference
menu item from the context menu. The highlighted symbols are
combined into a group that constitutes a cross-reference with two
additional texts. One of these texts shows the label used and the
other the target text for the cross-reference.
7.3.2 Cross-reference representation
The location of the target object can be shown in cross-references.

How it is represented can be specified in the Cross Reference
Representation tab in the properties dialog window for the circuit
or project. The location can be composed from the “ Page number”,
“Page”, “Page Column”, “Page Row” and “Object Identification”
components. These reference the target object. Separators can be
placed before and after each component. The default representa-
tion is:

/ Page number. Page Column The description for the page and the
page number are specified in the Properties dialog window for the
circuit.
The page number is a predefined placeholder that can be used in

text components and drawing frames among other things.
Figure 7/4: Cross Reference Representation tab
Inherit From Parent Node Defines whether the representation rules for the parent node
should be applied.
Example A sample location that conforms to the specified rules is displayed

here.
Reset Resets the cross-reference representation to the default setting.
7.3.3 Manage cross-references
All paired cross-references in a project are listed in a dialog window

that is opened using the Project Manage Cross References...
menu item. Using this dialog you can jump to all paired cross-
references in the project.

Figure 7/5: Manage Cross References... tab
Label Contains the label for the corresponding cross-reference.
Containing Page A page containing the cross-reference in question can be selected

in the drop-down list.
Jump to Target Using this button you can jump to the corresponding cross-
reference.
7.4 Drawing functions and graphical elements
Graphical elements can be inserted into a circuit using the Draw

menu or by activating the drawing function on the toolbar. In order
to prevent you from unintentionally moving other symbols when
drawing you enter a special mode for the drawing function in which
you can only perform the selected drawing functions. After every
drawing operation FluidSIM returns to the normal editing mode. To
insert another drawing element you must select the associated

menu item or the corresponding drawing function on the toolbar
again.
Note: If you wish to draw several elements in a row without leaving

the special drawing mode then you can select the menu item or the
corresponding drawing function on the toolbar while holding down
the Shift key. The drawing mode then remains active until the
menu item or the drawing function is deactivated by selecting it
again or another drawing function is selected without the Shift
key being pressed.
The drawing functions toolbar contains the following buttons:
Switches to the normal editing mode.
Switches to the mode for drawing a line.
Switches to the mode for drawing a polyline.
Switches to the mode for drawing a rectangle.
Switches to the mode for drawing a circle.
Switches to the mode for drawing a ellipse.
Switches to the mode for drawing a text.
Switches to the mode for drawing an image.
Switches to the mode for drawing a conduction line. You can start
by choosing whether you would like to draw a pneumatic or electric
conduction line.
The graphical elements are drawn in the color shown.
The graphical elements are drawn in the line style shown.
The graphical elements are drawn in the line thickness shown.
The line beginnings are drawn with the symbol shown.
The line ends are drawn with the symbol shown.

7.4.1 Interruption/Potential
If conduction lines extend over several pages then the line ends can
be assigned interruptions. Interruptions can be used to define that
a conduction line is only interrupted in the drawing and is contin-
ued somewhere else. An interruption can be assigned an identifica-
tion and linked with another interruption. The location of the linked
interruption can be displayed at the source interruption.
If an electric interruption is used with an electric line then this

interruption is a potential. The use of electric potentials is de-
scribed under Potentials and conduction lines.
You can insert an interruption into an existing line or position it

freely in a circuit.
→ Select the Interruption/Potential... menu item from the

Insert menu.
A dialog window opens where you can make various settings for
the interruption to be inserted.
Figure 7/6: Interruption/Potential... dialog window
Type of connector Defines whether a pneumatic or electric interruption (potential) is

to be inserted.

Define multiple connectors Multiple interruptions can be set one after the other if this option is
active. You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc key.
You can edit the properties for an interruption by double-clicking it.

The following dialog window opens.
Figure 7/7: Interruption/Potential dialog window
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the interruption.
Identification Defines the identification for the interruption. The identification will
be displayed in the circuit if the Display option is active.
Target Interruptions can reference each other in pairs. The counterpart

interruption can be selected from a list or entered directly in the list
box. Browse... opens a dialog window where all interruptions are
displayed in a tree and can be selected. Only interruptions that are
not linked will be shown in the list if the Only Free Interrup-
tions/Potentials option is active.
Jump to Target If the interruption is linked with another interruption then this
button can be used to jump to the counterpart interruption.

Show Location If this option is activated and the interruption is linked with another
interruption then the location of the counterpart interruption will be
displayed as a page coordinate (e.g. page number/column).
Representation A symbol that defines the representation of the interruption can be

selected from a list. To illustrate the representation the relevant
symbol always additionally shows the intersection of two lines.
7.4.2 Conduction line
A conduction line is drawn by defining two end points. A pneumatic

or electric line of this type consists of two connectors with a line
between them. Both connectors can be used as the starting point
for further connections. The conduction lines can only be drawn
horizontally or vertically.
You open a dialog window where you can make various settings for
the line to be dragged using the Insert Conduction Line... menu
item or the button on the toolbar.

Figure 7/8: Conduction Line... dialog window
Type of connection line Selects the conduction line type. The following are available:
“Pneumatic” and “Electric”.
Define multiple lines Multiple conduction lines can be set one after the other if this
option is active. You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc
key.
If multiple conduction lines with the same distance between them

are to be drawn horizontally or vertically then change the number in
the “Number of lines” field. You specify the distance to be main-
tained between the lines using “Distance”.
Under “Start Point Appearance” and “End Point Appearance” you

can define the representation of the respective end point. If the
“Display Identification” option is selected then the identification for
the start point is displayed. In order to guarantee that the same
identification is displayed for the start point and the end point, a
text reference for the start point is displayed for the end point

instead of its identification.Interruptions are used as end points for
conduction lines.
After confirming the dialog window you switch to a special mode

where you define the end points of the line with two consecutive
mouse clicks. Alternatively you can also draw a line by clicking and
dragging.
An electric conduction line can constitute a potential line. This is

described under Potentials and conduction lines.
7.4.3 Line
A line is drawn by defining two points. In contrast to a conduction

line this line is purely a drawing element. As such it can be drawn
with any desired angle but does not allow connections with pneu-
matic or electric connectors.
The line-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Proper-

ties tab of the Properties dialog window for the line:

Figure 7/9: Properties dialog window for a line: Drawing Properties
tab
Start Point Defines the x/y coordinate of the start point.
End Point Defines the x/y coordinate of the end point.
Scale Defines the scaling in the x or y direction.
Rotation Defines the angle of rotation in degrees.
Override Color Defines the color of the drawing element.
Line Style Defines the line style.
Line Width Defines the line thickness.
Start Cap Defines how the beginning of the line is displayed.
End Cap Defines how the end of the line is displayed.
Background Sets the location of the drawing element to the background. This
means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this. For example
symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements.

Foreground Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground. This
means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this. For ex-
ample symbols are covered by filled drawing elements.
Reset Reset the settings to the default values.
7.4.4 Polyline (set of connected lines)
A polyline (also called a set of connected lines or polygonal chain)

is drawn by defining two or more points. Each mouse click sets a
further vertex. The polyline is ended by clicking the same point
twice.
The properties of the polyline can be defined in the Drawing Proper-

ties tab in the Properties dialog window:
Figure 7/10: Properties dialog window for a polyline: Drawing

Properties tab
Scale Defines the scaling in x or y direction.

Line Width Defines the line width.
means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this. In particular
it means that symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements,
for example.
means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this. In particu-
lar it means that symbols are covered by filled drawing elements,
for example.
To change the vertices of a polyline or to set new vertices switch to

the “polyline editing mode” by selecting the Edit Edit Poly Line
menu item or activating the button on the toolbar.
You can move the existing vertices by clicking and dragging. The
mouse pointer changes to when you mouse over an existing
vertex. If the mouse pointer is over a line without a vertex is
displayed and a new vertex is inserted as soon as you click.
7.4.5 Rectangle
A rectangle is drawn by defining two diagonally opposite corner

points.
The rectangle-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing

Properties tab of the Properties dialog window for the rectangle:

Figure 7/11: Properties dialog window for a rectangle: Drawing
Properties tab
Fill Area Fills the rectangle with the color listed.

7.4.6 Circle
A circle is drawn by defining a middle point and a radius. You can

draw a circular arc by subsequently entering the beginning and
final angles into the Drawing Properties tab in the Properties dialog
window of the circle.
The circle-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Proper-

ties tab of the Properties dialog window for the circle:
Figure 7/12: Properties dialog window for a circle: Drawing Proper-

ties tab
Arc Defines the starting and final angles of a circular arc.
Fill Area Fills the circle with the color listed.

7.4.7 Ellipse
An ellipse is drawn by defining a middle point and two radii with

parallel axes. You can draw an ellipse by subsequently entering the
beginning and final angles into the Drawing Properties tab in the
Properties dialog window of the ellipse.
The ellipse-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Prop-

erties tab of the Properties dialog window for the ellipse:

Figure 7/13: Properties dialog window for an ellipse: Drawing
Properties tab
Arc Defines the starting and final angles of an ellipse.
Fill Area Fills the circle with the color listed.

7.4.8 Text
A text is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer by clicking.

The dialog window Properties for entering the text and setting the
attributes then opens.
7.4.9 Image
An image is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer by click-

ing. The dialog window for selecting an existing image file then
opens.
Large background images can massively decrease the processing

speed as the screen has to be re-drawn whenever symbols are
moved or edited.
The image-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Prop-

erties and Picture tabs of the Properties dialog window for the
image:

Figure 7/14: Properties dialog window for an image: Drawing
Properties tab
File Defines the image file for the image.
External Link When this option is active FluidSIM only saves a link to the image
file. However if this option is deactivated then the image is embed-
ded in the circuit diagram. This is the preferable variant if you wish
to pass on or archive the circuit diagram.

7.5 Check drawing
Using the Check Drawing menu item from the Page menu you
can have FluidSIM check your drawing for possible drawing errors.
FluidSIM displays the following messages where necessary:
— Duplicated identification labels
— Unresolved link targets
— Superimposed objects
— Lines through connectors
— Open connectors
If messages are displayed then the corresponding objects are

selected after confirmation in the dialog window.

GRAFCET
Chapter 8
8. GRAFCET
This chapter provides an introduction to creating and simulating

GRAFCET plans with FluidSIM. See norm DIN EN 60848 for the
complete specification of the GRAFCET description language. Festo
Didactic provides a range of training documentation for more
detailed introductions to GRAFCET. Unlike an SPS programming
language, such as Sequential Function Chart (SFC), GRAFCET is a
graphic description language that describes the logical behaviour
and operation of a control system or a process - regardless of the
technical software and hardware implementation. FluidSIM can be
used to both create and simulate GRAFCET plans. The term
GRAFCET is also used as a synonym for a GRAFCET plan. It should
be obvious from the context whether the word GRAFCET refers to
the plan or the language. A GRAFCET essentially describes two
aspects of a control system, according to specified rules: the ac-
tions (commands) to be carried out and the sequence of execution.
The elementary components of a GRAFCET are steps, actions and
transitions and can be used in the same way as pneumatic or elec-
trical components. To achieve a uniform operating concept, the
GRAFCET elements feature connections that can be used to link
them to each other (as with all other FluidSIM components).
8.1 Steps
Steps are either active or inactive and can be linked by actions. The
actions of active steps are executed. The sequence of a GRAFCET is
described by the transitions from a previous to a subsequent step.
Steps and transitions have to alternate in the plan. The creation
and simulation of GRAFCETs in FluidSIM is illustrated in the follow-
ing using simple examples.
→ Drag a step into a newly created circuit diagram.

Figure 8/1: Simple step
Each step has to be assigned a name. If a step is to be active at the

start of the sequence control, it is marked as the initial step.
→ Open the step’s dialogue box by double-clicking on it or via the

menu ( Edit Properties... ), enter “1” as the name and select
the type “initial step”.
Figure 8/2: Initial step
→ Start simulation with or via the menu ( Execute Start ).
Figure 8/3: Active step
Active steps are marked with a point. Additionally, active steps are
framed in green.
8.2 Actions
To execute commands, you can link any number of actions to a

step. Actions do not have to be directly linked to a step; you can
also link them to each other. To make it easier to create the draw-
ing, it is enough to place actions next to each other, without having
to draw connecting lines. If the connections for the elements over-
lap each other, they are automatically connected.

Figure 8/4: Actions
Actions can be defined by a textual description or by setting (or

changing) variable values. If you want to simulate a GRAFCET with
FluidSIM, the variable values are taken into account in the simula-
tion. When displaying a GRAFCET graphically, you can decide
whether the variable name or the descriptive text is shown in an
action. If you want to display the description, you can set the
checkmark next to “ Display description instead of formula” in the
action’s properties dialogue (see example:
Grafcet/Grafcet18.ct). At View GRAFCET... , you can
specify whether the descriptions are displayed instead of the for-
mulae for all GRAFCET components. There are two types of action:
continuously effective and stored effective actions. For a continu-
ously effective action, its associated variable is set to the Boolean
value (logical value) “TRUE” (1), provided that the step connected
to the action is active. If the step is inactive, the value is set to
“FALSE” (0). This way of setting a variable is referred to as “assig-
nation” in the GRAFCET specifications. For a stored effective action,
the set value of the variable remains unchanged until it is changed
by another action. This way of setting a variable is referred to as
“allocation” in the GRAFCET specifications. At the start of a se-
quence, all the variable values are initialised with “0”.
→ Create the following GRAFCET. Select the action “Simple ac-

tion” in the properties dialogue and enter “A ” under “ Varia-
ble/output”. Then start the simulation.
Figure 8/5: Executed action
Step “1” is active and the action connected to the step is executed.
Variable “A” is set to “1”. The value of an action variable is shown
during simulation in brackets after the variable’s name.

8.3 Transitions
Transitions are used to describe the sequence of a control system.

To do this, add the following information to GRAFCET:
Figure 8/6: GRAFCET
→ Select “2” as the name of the second (simple) step. The transi-
tion conditions that specify when the system moves from one
step to the next are still missing. A transition is considered re-
leased once all the immediately preceding steps are active. A
transition is triggered once it has been released and its condi-
tion has the value “1”. A transition with the value “1” is dis-
played in green in FluidSIM. You can show a descriptive text in-
stead of the formula, as with the actions.
A Boolean value is automatically generated for each step. The

name begins with an “X”, followed by the name of the step. In the
example here, the variables “X1” and “X2” are generated. The
value of a step variable is “1” if the step is active; otherwise it is
“0”. Transition conditions can be time-dependent. These have the
following form: t1 s / “term” / t2 s Where t1 and t2 have to be
replaced by numbers and “term” by a Boolean term. The transition
condition becomes true (“1”) t1 seconds after “term” has changed
its value from “0” to “1”. This is called a “rising edge”. The transi-
tion condition becomes false again (“0”) t2 seconds after “term”
has changed its value from “1” to “0”. This is called a “falling
edge”. The short form t1 s / “term” is also allowed. The system
then assumes that t2 is 0 seconds.

→ Enter the transition conditions into the transitions' properties
dialogue as shown and then start the simulation.
Figure 8/7: GRAFCET
The following cycle runs through:

Figure 8/8: GRAFCET cycle
8.4 Stored effective actions (allocations)
In the next example, a counter is to be implemented. This works

using a stored effective action (allocation) and an action on an
event. To do this, add the following information to GRAFCET:
→ Select “Action on activation” for the action of the second step,

“C” as the variable and “C + 1” as the allocation. “C” will work
as a counter. For the second action of the first step, select “Ac-
tion on event”, “B” as the variable with the allocation. “1” and
“[ C>2]” as the condition/event. Then start the simulation.

Figure 8/9: GRAFCET
Each time step “2” is activated, “C” is raised by one. As soon as “C”
has the value “3” and step “1” is activated, “B” receives value “1”.
Figure 8/10: GRAFCET simulation
8.5 Linking GRAFCET variables with the electrical part of

FluidSIM
The GRAFCET I/O component is used to link the GRAFCET variables

with the electrical part of FluidSIM.
The access to labels associated with FluidSIM components is ex-

plained in section Access to labels of fluidic and electrical compo-
nents.

Figure 8/11: GRAFCET I/O component
In the GRAFCET I/O component, you can specify GRAFCET variables

to be used as inputs or outputs. The actions' variables serve as
outputs. The inputs can be the conditions of actions and transi-
tions. If a potential is created as the input of the GRAFCET I/O
component, the corresponding variable is set to “1”. If an output
variable has a value other than “0”, an electric potential (24V) is
present at the corresponding output of the GRAFCET I/O compo-
nent. The following simple example illustrates the use of the
GRAFCET I/O component.
Figure 8/12: Linking GRAFCET / electrical part
In the GRAFCET I/O component’s properties dialogue, “E1” is

specified as the input and “A1” as the output. As soon as the elec-
trical switch is closed, there is a potential at the input of “E1”; this
potential causes the GRAFCET variable “E1” to change its value
from “0” to “1”. As a consequence of this, the condition in the
action becomes true (“1”) and the value of variable “A1” is set to
“1”. This in turn leads to a potential being created at the output of
“A1” and the indicator light lights up.

As soon as the switch is opened again, the following situation

arises:

8.6 Quick reference for the FluidSIM-relevant GRAFCET

concepts
The next sections introduce all GRAFCET concepts that are related
to FluidSIM.
8.6.1 Initialization
All the variables in a GRAFCET are preset with the value “0” at the
start of the simulation.

8.6.2 Sequence rules
— A transition is considered released once all the immediately

preceding steps are active. A transition is triggered once it has
been released and its condition has the value “1”. A transition
with the value “1” is shown in green in FluidSIM, regardless of
whether the step linked to it is active or inactive.
— The relevant transition is triggered at the same time and does

not take any time.
— Since triggering a transition does not take any time, a step can
be activated and deactivated at the same time (even across
various intermediate steps). An active step remains active in
this situation. A loop of steps is only run through once at one
point in time (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet06.ct).
8.6.3 Sequence selection
A step can branch off into various partial sequences. In the

GRAFCET specifications, these partial sequences have to be exclu-
sive. Since this can generally only be checked during the sequence,
this exclusivity is not required in FluidSIM (see example:
Grafcet/Grafcet07.ct).
8.6.4 Synchronization
The GRAFCET synchronization component can be used to imple-

ment synchronizations (see example:

8.6.5 Transient sequence / unstable step / virtual triggering
As described inSequence rules, triggering a transition does not take

any time. As a consequence of this, multiple consecutive steps can
be activated at the same point in time one after the other. This
sequence is called transient (continuous). The intermediate steps
in the sequence chain are referred to as unstable. The continuously
effective actions connected to them are not displayed in the simula-
tion. The allocations in the stored effective actions are carried out.
Triggering the intermediate steps and their associated transitions is
called virtual triggering (see example:
8.6.6 Determining the values of GRAFCET variables
Variables of continuously effective actions (allocations) receive the

value “1” if the corresponding action is linked to an active step and
any action condition present has the value “1”. Variables of stored
effective actions (assignation) are changed if the corresponding
action is linked to an active step and the relevant action event
occurs (e.g. action on event or on activation). FluidSIM does not
check whether the two types of variable identification contradict
each other for a variable. If this case occurs, the variable value is
determined by an internal calculation, which the user cannot pre-
dict (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet09.ct).
8.6.7 Checking the entries
FluidSIM checks the validity of entries for conditions and assigna-

tions. If this kind of term does not match the specifications, the
term in question is displayed in red. The simulation is only released
once all the terms are valid.
8.6.8 Admissible characters for steps and variables
Only the following characters may be used for steps and variables:
— Numbers from “0” to “9”
— Lower-case letters from “a” to “z”
— Upper-case letters from “A” to “Z”
— The underscore “_”
There are no limitations for the descriptions that can be shown for
conditions and actions, because these are only displayed and are
not used for simulation.
Labels of fluidic or electrical components that are intended to be

used from GRAFCETs (see Access to labels of fluidic and electrical
components) are allowed to contain only the characters mentioned
above.
8.6.9 Variable names
There are four different types of variables. All variables can be used
in conditions and assignations.
Action Variables Action variables are available throughout GRAFCET and can be set
in actions (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet10.ct).
Step Variables Step variables are inserted automatically for each step and have
the value “1” when and only when the corresponding step is active.
Step variables have the form X + “step name”. If, for example, the
step name is “12”, then the associated variable is “X12”. Step
names are only ever valid within a partial GRAFCET or within the
global GRAFCET. This means that the same step name can be used
in different partial GRAFCETs. In order to be able to address step
variables across partial GRAFCETs in FluidSIM, the step variable has
to be preceded by the partial GRAFCET name. Example: Partial
GRAFCET “1” contains step “2” and is meant to be addressed in the
global GRAFCET. Within the global GRAFCET, the step variable name
“G1.X2” has to be used. Within partial GRAFCET “1”, “X2” is
enough (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet11.ct). Variables of
macro-steps have the form XM + “step name”, macro inputs have
XE + “step name” and macro outputs have XS + “step name” (see
example: Grafcet/Grafcet15.ct).
Partial GRAFCET Variables Partial GRAFCET variables are automatically inserted for each
partial GRAFCET and have the value “1” when and only when at
least one step in the corresponding partial GRAFCET is active.
Partial GRAFCET variables have the form XG + “partial GRAFCET
name”. If, for example, the partial GRAFCET name is “1”, the asso-
ciated variable is “XG1” (see example:
Labels of Fluidic or Electrical These labels can be used as GRAFCET input variables (see Access to
Components labels of fluidic and electrical components).
8.6.10 Access to labels of fluidic and electrical components
GRAFCET-I/O components are the standard means to access elec-

trical components in FluidSIM. In addition, certain labels of a circuit
can be used as Boolean input variables in GRAFCET directly, with-
out using a GRAFCET-I/O component (see example
Grafcet/TP201_09gc2.ct). Such a direct access pertains to
labels of the following components:
— Distance rule
— Semi-rotary actuator
— Pressure switch
— Manually actuated switch
— Relay
— Valve solenoid
8.6.11 Functions and formula entry
A range of functions can be used in conditions and assignations.

These functions are displayed according to the GRAFCET specifica-
tions (e.g. upwards arrow for rising edge). Entering GRAFCET-
specific functions is supported by the buttons in the dialogues with
the relevant labels:
— “+” (logical OR)
— “*” (logical AND)
— “NOT” (logical NOT)
— “RE” (rising edge)
— “FE” (falling edge)
— “s / / s” (delay)
— “s /” (delay, short form)
— “NOT(s /)” (time limit)
If the functions “NOT”, “RE” or “FE” refer to a term, the term has to
be placed in brackets. Examples: NOT a NOT (a + b) RE X1 RE (X1 *
X2) The following additional mathematical functions are available:
— abs (absolute amount)
— sign (algebraic sign: +1, 0, -2)
— max (maximum of two numbers)
— min (minimum of two numbers)
— ^ (to the power of, e.g. a^3)
— sqrt (square root)
— exp (to the power of constant “e”)
— log (natural logarithm)
— sin (sine)
— cos (cosine)
8.6.12 Delays / time limits
Delays have the following form (see example:

Grafcet/Grafcet03.ct): “Time in seconds” s / “Boolean
term” / “time in seconds” or “Time in seconds” s / “Boolean term”
Examples: 1 s / X1 / 2s 3s/X3 Time limits have the following form:
NOT (“time in seconds” s / “Boolean term”) Example: NOT(6s/X28)
8.6.13 Boolean value of an assertion
In GRAFCET, you can use Boolean values to calculate an assertion,

for example: a counter “C” should be larger than 6 and step “X1”
should be activated. “C” is larger than “6” can be calculated as with
a variable. To do this, the assertion has to be set in square brack-
ets. So in this example: [C > 6 ] * X1 If a Boolean assertion is posi-
tioned on its own in a condition, then you can omit the square
brackets in FluidSIM, for example C > 6 instead of [C > 6]. (See ex-
ample: Grafcet/Grafcet13.ct)
8.6.14 Target information
If you want to interrupt an operative connection from a transition to

a step, you can enter the name of the target step in the transition’s
properties dialogue (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet14.ct).
8.6.15 Partial GRAFCETs
Partial GRAFCETs can be used to separate a GRAFCET into different

hierarchy levels. This function is most often used for enclosing
steps and compulsory commands. The name of a partial GRAFCET is
always preceded by a “G”. In order to determine partial GRAFCETs
in FluidSIM, the partial GRAFCET frame has to be placed over the
relevant GRAFCET part and you have to assign a name in the prop-
erties dialogue. The preceding “G” is not part of the name that you
have to enter; it is added automatically by FluidSIM and shown at
the bottom left of the partial GRAFCET frame. You can alter the size
of the partial GRAFCET frame by dragging its edges with the mouse
(see example: Grafcet/Grafcet11.ct). It is important that all
the elements of the partial GRAFCET are located entirely within the
relevant frame and that there are no “foreign” elements overlap-
ping the frame.
8.6.16 Macro-steps
Macro-steps can be specified using a step’s properties dialogue.

The preceding “M” is not a part of the name that you have to enter;
it is added automatically by FluidSIM. You can specify macro inputs
and macro outputs in the same way. The preceding “E” and “S” in
these cases are not part of the name either and are automatically
added by FluidSIM (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet15.ct).
8.6.17 Compulsory commands
Compulsory commands can be used to control partial GRAFCETs

regardless of their normal sequence. There is an entry mask to help
you enter these commands in FluidSIM. There are four types of
compulsory command. They are shown here using four examples
(see example: Grafcet/Grafcet16.ct).
G12 {8, 9, 11} Setting a specific situation. This example activates steps 8, 9 and
11 of partial GRAFCET 12.
G12 {*} Freezing a partial GRAFCET. In this example, the current situation
for partial GRAFCET 12 is maintained as it is. No further transitions
are triggered.
G12 Setting a blank situation. All steps in partial GRAFCET 12 are deac-
tivated in this example.
G12 {INIT} Setting the initial situation. In this example, the steps in partial
GRAFCET 12 that are marked as initial steps are activated.
8.6.18 Enclosing step
Enclosing steps can be specified using a step’s properties dialogue.

You can either enter the enclosed partial GRAFCETs directly or
select them from a list. You have to separate individual partial
GRAFCETs with a comma or a blank space. During simulation, the
name of the enclosing step is shown at the top left of the partial
GRAFCET frame, as soon as the step is activated (see example:
Grafcet/Grafcet17.ct). You have to set the “Activation link”
field in the properties dialogue for steps within the enclosed partial
GRAFCET that you wish to activate when the enclosing step is
activated.
Dimension
Chapter 9
9. Dime nsion
FluidSIM allows both automatic and manual dimensioning.
9.1 Draw dimension
The buttons
Horizontal
Vertical
Align
Angular
Flag
activate the corresponding mode for drawing the dimension ar-

rows. Alternatively you can also access the dimensioning functions
in the Draw menu under Dimension .
Horizontal, vertical and diagonal dimensioning is done by defining

two points for the distance as well as then clicking to position the
dimension text. Angular dimensioning requires the center point to
be defined as well as two points for the angle. The fourth click in
turn defines the position of the dimension text. The Flag dimen-
sion function can also be used for general labeling of important
points in the circuit. Two points for a line with any pitch and a final
click for the text are needed for this.
9.2 Settings for the dimension
Figure 9/1: Dimension dialog window
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the dimension.
Automatic Dimensioning Activates or deactivates automatic adaptation of the dimension

when the dimension length is changed.
Length If the Automatic Dimensioning option is deactivated you can enter

any number that will be displayed as the length dimension. A unit
can also be selected. Show Unit defines whether the unit should be
displayed.
Decimals Defines the number of decimal places.
Factor Determines the factor by which the real length is multiplied for the
displayed value. This is necessary if you are creating a drawing with
a scale other than 1:1.
Color Defines the color for the dimension.
Line Style Defines the line style for the dimension.
Line Width Defines the line width for the dimension.
Dimensions, like all other objects in FluidSIM, can be moved, rotat-

ed, mirrored and scaled. The display value of the dimension is
automatically adapted during scaling if the Automatic Dimension-
ing option is activated.
Equipment identifications and designation conventions
Chapter 10
10. Equi pment identifications and desig nation conve ntions
FluidSIM supports the structured and hierarchical assignment of

equipment identifications, i.e. a complete equipment identification
can be made up of several component identifications.
The following attributes can be used for structuring and are put
together according to predefined conventions to form a complete
equipment identification:
— Installation
— Location
— Circuit
— Component
— Connector
The attributes Installation, Location and Circuit can be specified for

a symbol, circuit and project. You can specify whether the attrib-
utes should be copied over from a parent element (node). For
example, you can copy over the installation information from the
circuit diagram so that it does not have to be individually entered
for each symbol.
Designation conventions describe how the individual attributes

Installation, Location, Circuit, Component and Connector are put
together to form a full identification. They specify the order in which
the individual attributes are put together to form a full identifica-
tion and the separators (prefix or postfix) used between them.
The following example is intended to serve as an explanation. The

list below constitutes a set of designation conventions. Each attrib-
ute can have a preceding (prefix) or succeeding (postfix) separator.
The separators to be used are placed in inverted commas. The
specified set of designation conventions corresponds to the default
setting in FluidSIM for electrical engineering.
— “=” Installation
— “+” Location
— “-” Component
The value of the Component attribute is “B1” and is stored in the
symbol to be identified. Installation gets the value “G1” and Loca-
tion the value “X1”, both of which are stored in the circuit. A note is
included with the symbol that these attributes should be copied
over from the circuit. The full equipment identification is then as
follows:
— =G1+X1-B1
If it is clear from the context that Installation and Location are

stored in the circuit then this information can be hidden when
displaying the equipment identification in the circuit to make things
clearer. The Suppress Inherited Parts option must be selected in
the associated symbol for this. The identification that is displayed
is then:
— -B1
FluidSIM also supports the hierarchical structuring of identifica-

tions. Using a hierarchy makes sense if a symbol is a subobject of
another object, for example the plug in a plug strip or the solenoid
coil in a solenoid valve. The full identification is put together ac-
cording to the defined designation conventions. The Component
attribute is also added in accordance with the defined object hier-
archy. You start at the top hierarchy level when designating an
object.
The hierarchy is defined by establishing a reference between a

symbol (object) and the parent object. To illustrate this we will
expand upon the example described above. The symbol with the
Component attribute with the value “B1” was not previously hierar-
chically structured. This is changed by assigning an “A1” for a
parent symbol to the symbol. The full identification for “B1” is then
as follows:
— =G1+X1-A1-B1
The identification that is displayed remains unchanged.
FluidSIM supports different sets of designation conventions. For

each symbol you can select which set of conventions should be
used for its identification. The set of conventions to be used for the
supplied symbols is preset. The preset sets of conventions can be
customized in the Designation Conventions tab under Tools -
Options... . These sets of conventions are copied when a project or
circuit diagram is created from new. Copying the sets of conven-
tions into the circuit diagram or project guarantees that the desig-
nation conventions are not dependent on the FluidSIM presettings
if the circuit diagram or project is passed on to someone else.
Changes to the conventions must be made in the circuit diagram or
project.
The identification type Free Input can be chosen if no designation

conventions are to be used. In this case the identification is an
unstructured character string that is not made up of the attributes
described above.
The sets of conventions preset in FluidSIM are as follows:
Fluidics Fluid engineering symbols are designated in accordance with ISO

1219-2. The identification is put together as follows: Installation -
Circuit Component : Connector This set of conventions can be
customized if necessary.
Electrics Electrical engineering symbols are designated in accordance with

EN 81346-1 (successor to EN 61346-1). The identification is put
together as follows:
= Installation + Location - Component : Connector This set of con-

ventions can be customized if necessary.
User Defined This set of conventions allows you to freely define the identifica-
tion. The attributes Installation, Location, Circuit, Component and
Connector can be selected in any order for this. You can also speci-
fy separators that are to be inserted before (prefix) and after (post-
fix) the individual attributes.
10.1 Renumber Designations
Designations (identifications) are automatically assigned when

symbols are created. FluidSIM supports the reassignment of identi-
fications within a circuit diagram. You can define which symbols are
to get new identifications and the order in which they are to be
renumbered.
Renumbering is started via the Page Renumber Designations...

menu. The following dialog window opens.
Figure 10/1: Renumber Designations dialog window
Component Types For each symbol you can specify the designation convention to be
used. You can specify the designation conventions to be taken into
consideration during renumbering under Component Types. Only
those symbols with the appropriate convention will be given a new
identification.
Renumber Unenumerated Only symbols that have not yet been given an identification will be
Only (e.g. ?V1) taken into consideration.
If the Enumerate Automatically option is selected in the Designa-
tion Conventions tab in the program options then FluidSIM will
automatically assign identifications for newly created symbols. If
this option is not active identifications beginning with a question
mark will be assigned. As per the convention, FluidSIM will not
regard these symbols as having an identification.
Renumber main components If this option is activated the renumbering will be done in two
first, then secondary compo- passes. The main components are renumbered in the first pass and
nents the secondary components in the second pass. An example of a
main component is the coil of a relay, while its contacts are sec-
ondary components.
Labeling Order The labeling order can be defined using the various buttons.
The renumbering is started after you click the Next button.
Figure 10/2: Renumber Designations dialog window
Current Identification Shows the current full identification.
New Identification Contains the suggested new identification for the component. You
can change this suggestion. The new full identification is displayed
in the Full Identification field.
Full Identification Shows the new full identification.
Displayed Identification Shows the new identification as it is displayed in the circuit. If the
Suppress Inherited Parts option is selected then parts of the identi-
fication such as “Installation”, “Circuit” or “Location” will be hid-
den if they have been stored in the circuit diagram or project.
Designation Conventions The designation conventions for the component to be identified can
be selected here.
Inherit From Page If this option is not active the following identification components
can be defined for the symbol: “Installation”, “Location” and “Cir-
cuit”. Only components that are used in the set designation con-
vention are available.
The Next button copies over the new identification and the Skip
button leaves the old identification unchanged. FluidSIM then
continues with the next symbol.
Component attributes
Chapter 11
11. Compone nt attributes
The FluidSIM circuit symbols largely correspond to the components

in the Festo product catalogue. Even if you have not installed the
product catalogue FluidSIM can read most of the component attrib-
utes from the database supplied with the program. If you have
installed a newer version of the product catalogue then FluidSIM
automatically accesses the current data. Open the Properties dialog
window for the component by double-clicking a symbol or using the
Edit menu and the Properties... menu item.
11.1 Component attributes in the Properties dialog window
Figure 11/1: Properties dialog window for a component:
The properties of a component are saved in attribute value pairs.

The attributes are divided into different groups. The first group
contains the general properties:
Figure 11/2: Detail from the Properties dialog window for a compo-
nent: General properties
Symbol Name Displays the name of the circuit symbol. The symbol name is
mapped to appropriate products in the Festo product catalogue.
Users cannot edit the symbol name.
Description Contains a more detailed description or the complete name of the

circuit symbol where applicable. Users can edit this. The identifica-
tion is shown as text in the circuit drawing if the “ Display” option is
selected.
Part number The part number uniquely identifies a product. You can enter the
part number manually or search via the Find... button in the
product catalogue. The component attributes saved in the cata-
logue are only automatically taken over if the selection is made via
the product catalogue. You can find these attributes in the Catalog
Properties tab of the Properties dialog window for the component.
Layer In this selection list you define the drawing layer for the symbol.
Depending on the setting for the drawing layer it may not be possi-
ble to display or edit the symbol. In order to make the symbol
visible or change the settings you have to temporarily activate the
drawing layer on the Drawing Layers... menu item from the View
menu.
Identification Here you can assign an identification that uniquely identifies the
component in the circuit diagram. The identification is shown as
text in the circuit drawing if the “Display” option is selected.
Note: FluidSIM automatically assigns a unique identification when

inserting or copying circuit symbols. An automatically assigned
identification text begins with a question mark and can be edited by
the user (FluidSIM shows a warning if you are assigning an identifi-
cation that already exists). You can make more detailed settings for
the equipment identification in the Identification tab.
Display in Parts Lists Deactivate this option if you do not want the symbol to appear in
the parts list.
11.2 Identification
In the “Identification” tab you can enter properties that influence

how the identification for the symbol is displayed in the circuit
diagram. You can find further information under Equipment identi-
fications and designation conventions.
nent: Identification tab
Treat as Contact Actuator If this option is activated then contacts can be linked with this
symbol and the symbol is assigned a contact image. This allows the
number of symbols that can actuate contacts to be extended as a
user-defined setting. For example it allows custom relay magnets to
be defined.
Parent Object If this option is activated then a parent object can be specified
whose identification is used to make up the full identification.
Parent objects can be selected via the list box or their full identifica-
tion entered directly. The “ Browse... ” button opens a dialog
window that shows all objects in the project as a tree.
Full Identification This field shows the full equipment identification.
Inherit prefix/postfix If this option is deactivated then the separators that are placed
before (prefix) or after (postfix) the identification can be specified.
The separators specified in the designation conventions are ig-
nored in this case. In combination with parent objects this enables
aspect changes as described in EN 81346-1.
Displayed Identification This field shows the equipment identification displayed in the
circuit diagram. If the Suppress Inherited Parts option is selected
then parts of the identification such as “Installation”, “Location” or
“Circuit” will be hidden if they have been stored in the circuit dia-
gram or project. The parts of the parent object’s identification will
also be hidden if a parent object was specified.
Designation Conventions Here you define the designation convention to be used for the
identification. The following are available: Fluidics, Electrics, User
Defined and Free Input. The properties dialog window for the circuit
where the designation conventions can be displayed and custom-
ized is opened using the Designation Conventions... button.
Installation The Installation property that can be used as part of the identifica-
tion is defined in this field. If the Inherit From Parent Object option
is selected then the property will be copied over from the circuit,
project or specified parent object. This field will only be visible if
Installation is used in the set designation convention.
Location The Location property that can be used as part of the identification
is defined in this field. If the Inherit From Parent Object option is
selected then the property will be copied over from the circuit,
Location is used in the set designation convention.
Circuit The Circuit property that can be used as part of the identification is
defined in this field. If the Inherit From Parent Object option is
selected then the property will be copied over from the circuit,
Circuit is used in the set designation convention.
11.3 Catalog Properties
Component attributes from the product catalogue as well as attrib-

utes specified by the user are displayed in tabular form in different
tabs. The table entries from the catalogue cannot be edited. The
value of an attribute is listed in the “Value” column. This value can
be displayed as text in the circuit diagram next to the symbol if the
“Display” option is activated.
The component attributes copied over from the product catalogue

are displayed in the “Catalog Properties” tab.
nent: Catalog Properties tab
11.4 User Defined Properties
You can enter your own component attributes in the “User Defined
Properties” tab.
nent: User Defined Properties tab
Translation Table... If you are editing a text field you can use this button to open a
search dialog via which you can find the text ID for a language text
from the translation table.
In order to edit an entry the corresponding row must be selected by

clicking on it. Clicking on the table cell to be modified again then
enables you to edit the entry in the cell.
A row can be deleted by first clicking the row to highlight it. The
highlighted row can then be deleted using the Del key.
You can add any desired attributes by filling out the empty cells on
the last row.
11.5 Drawing Properties
You can enter a number of drawing properties that influence how

the symbols are displayed in the circuit diagram in the “ Drawing
Properties” tab.
nent: Drawing Properties tab
Scale Defines the scaling in the x or y direction. The scaling factor can
also be defined with the help of the mouse pointer. This is de-
scribed in the “Scale symbols” section.
Rotation Defines the angle of rotation in degrees. The angle of rotation can
also be defined with the help of the mouse pointer. This is de-
scribed in the “Rotate symbols” section.
Override Color If this option is activated then another color can be selected for the
symbol.
Reset Resets the geometrical settings to the default values: Scaling to 1,

rotation to 0 and “Override Color” deactivated.
11.6 Main and secondary components
As described under Component attributes in the Properties dialog

window, the FluidSIM circuit symbols largely correspond to the
components in the Festo product catalogue. These symbols are
called main components. However there are also secondary com-
ponents, which do not correspond to components in the Festo
product catalogue. These secondary components are usually sym-
bolic representations of a partial aspect of an associated main
component.
All product properties are stored in the main component. The

secondary components only have a description and a reference to
the associated main component. In electrical engineering in par-
ticular, components such as relays are divided into main and sec-
ondary components where the coil is the main component and the
contacts are the secondary components.
11.7 Linking main and secondary components
Main and secondary components are linked using the symbol for
the secondary component. The circuit diagram detail shows a relay
comprising a coil as the main component and two contacts as the
secondary components. The contacts are to be linked with the coil.
This information is evaluated when displaying the contact image.
Figure 11/7: Relay comprising coil with two contacts
The symbol identifications are the defaults used in FluidDraw. The

symbols are not linked together yet.
→ Open the corresponding properties dialog window by double-
clicking a contact.
Figure 11/8: Properties dialog window for a contact
Description Defines a description for the secondary component. In the case of a

contact, this is shown in the terminal diagram.
Main Component A compatible main component can be selected from a list. The main
component identification can also be entered directly as text.
Browse... Opens a dialog that shows all compatible main components as a

tree in accordance with the object hierarchy.
Link If this box is checked then the secondary component is logically

linked with the main component. If the main component is then
renamed, the link is retained and the identification of the linked
secondary component is adapted as appropriate to the main com-
ponent identification.
Find Target... If the secondary component is logically linked with a main compo-
nent, a search can be performed for the associated main compo-
nent using this button.
Display If this box is checked then the main component’s identification is

shown as the identification for the secondary component.
Suppress Inherited Parts If there are designation conventions assigned for the main compo-
nent, parent parts of the identification that are defined in the circuit
diagram or project will be hidden.
→ Select “Q1” from the list of compatible main components.

Proceed in the same way for the second contact.
Selecting from the list of compatible main components automatical-

ly establishes the logical links between the contacts and the coil.
The circuit diagram should now look as follows:
Figure 11/9: Relay comprising coil with two contacts
If you now change the coil identification to “Q2”, the logical links
mean that the identifications at the contacts will also be automati-
cally changed to “Q2”.
Examples of this are relays with the coil as the main component and
the contacts as secondary components as well as electromagnetic
directional control valves with the pneumatic symbol as the main
component and the valve solenoids as secondary components in
the electrical part of the circuit diagram.
11.8 Link solenoid valves and solenoid coils
The coils belonging to solenoid valves are usually displayed sepa-

rately in the electrical part of a circuit diagram. The link between a
solenoid valve and the associated coils is defined at the solenoid
valve symbol.
The following circuit diagram shows a solenoid valve and the sym-
bols for two separate solenoid coils. No link has been established
yet between the solenoid valve and the coils.
Figure 11/10: Solenoid valve and two separate coils
There are two ways of establishing a link between a solenoid valve

and a coil. The first is using the properties dialog window for the
solenoid valve.
→ Open the appropriate properties dialog window by double-

clicking the solenoid valve and select the Connector Labels tab.
Figure 11/11: Properties dialog window, Connector Labels tab
This tab shows all of the solenoid valve’s connectors. Connectors

refer, among other things, to the logical connection options for the
solenoid coils. The input fields of the left-hand electric connector
are described below. The descriptions apply analogously to the
right-hand connector and other types of logical connectors.
Electric Connector (Left) The identification for the left-hand solenoid coil can be entered in
this list box or selected from a list. When you click in this field the
corresponding connector is highlighted in the preview. This helps to
locate the connector, particularly when dealing with turned or
mirrored symbols.
Browse... Opens a dialog that shows all compatible solenoid coils as a tree in
accordance with the object hierarchy.
Link If this box is checked then the solenoid coil is logically linked with
the connector at the solenoid valve. If the solenoid coil is renamed
the link is retained and the identifications of the coils at the sole-
noid valve are changed to match the coil identifications.
Find Target... If the connector at the solenoid valve is logically linked with a coil a
search can be performed for the associated coil using this button.
Display If this box is checked the coil’s identification is shown as the identi-
fication for the solenoid valve connector.
→ Select “-K1” from the list of compatible solenoid coils.
Figure 11/12: Left connector linked with coil “-K1”
The second way of linking a solenoid valve with a coil is to double-

click the solenoid valve’s connector directly. The coil connectors are
represented like pneumatic connectors within the solenoid valve by
means of small circles.
→ Double-click the right connector of the solenoid valve.
A dialog window whose fields correspond to the entries for a con-

nector in the Connector Labels tab of the Properties dialog window.
Figure 11/13: Connector dialog window
→ Select “-K2” from the list of compatible solenoid coils.
The (electric) connectors of the solenoid valve are now linked with
the solenoid coils.
Figure 11/14: Link solenoid valve and solenoid coils
The above-mentioned ways of linking a solenoid valve and coils

should only be used if each symbol has been individually inserted
into the circuit diagram. For projects, FluidSIM manages the associ-
ated coil symbols for each solenoid valve internally. When a sole-
noid valve is inserted into a circuit diagram, the associated sole-
noid coils are simultaneously placed in a special library. This con-
cept is described under Unplaced objects.
11.9 Attributes of the text components
In FluidSIM text components serve, firstly, to insert comments and

labels and, secondly, can be defined by the labels and accessories
without displaying a symbol. Open the dialog window Properties of
the text component by double-clicking on a text or via the Proper-
ties... menu item on the Edit menu.
Figure 11/15: Properties dialog window for a text component:
A text component possess all of the attributes of a standard com-

ponent. The text properties are located on the “Edit Text” tab.
Figure 11/16: Detail from the Properties dialog window for a text
component: Edit Text tab
Edit Text Enter your text into the input field on the left-hand side. You can
also enter text with multiple lines. Press the Enter key to create a
line break.
Alignment Defines the horizontal or the vertical alignment of the text within
the text field.
Font... Defines the text font.
Color... Defines the text color.
Frame Text Draws a frame around the text field.
Attribute Link If this option is activated a text that identifies a link to an attribute
is displayed instead of the text entered. The value of the selected
attribute is displayed in the circuit diagram. You can find a detailed
description of this function under Link text components with attrib-
utes. A predefined placeholder such as the page number can also
be selected using the Predefined variable... button.
11.10 Link text components with attributes
Text components can also display attributes of other components,

values of predefined placeholders, attributes of a circuit or the
project. The text component must be linked to the corresponding
attribute for this. The linked attribute is defined in the input field of
the “Edit Text” tab in the Properties dialog window for the text
component. The activated Attribute Link option defines that the text
in the text field should not be displayed but rather interpreted as a
link.
Example:
Assuming that your project is called “Project1” and possesses the

“Supplier” attribute with the value “Festo”. You project contains
the “Circuit1” circuit and you would like to display the value of the
“Supplier” attribute, in this example namely the value “Festo”, in
this circuit diagram.
→ Insert a text component into the circuit drawing by selecting

the text element on the drawing elements toolbar and then left-
clicking the circuit drawing. The Properties dialog window for
the text component then opens.
Note: You can open the dialog window of an existing text compo-
nent by double-clicking it or using the Edit menu and the Prop-
erties... menu item.
→ Activate the Attribute Link option and then click the Browse...
button.
A window opens displaying the hierarchy of all of the available

attributes. Please note that only those objects are listed that have
an identification assigned by the user. Identifications beginning
with a question mark “?” are not listed. These are identifications
that have been automatically assigned by FluidSIM. The desired
attribute is located under “Attribute Tree” - “Project1” - “Supplier”.
Figure 11/17: Browse Attributes dialog window
→ Select “Supplier” and then click the Select button.
The “Project1.Supplier” value is displayed in the input field and

“Festo” in the preview. The complete and unique name of the
attribute contains all of the hierarchy levels beginning at the pro-
ject. The individual layers in the name are separated by a full stop.
It is also possible to enter only the attribute name into the input
field. In this example: “Supplier”. The hierarchy is then searched
from the bottom up for the attribute, beginning with the text com-
ponents. If the attribute searched for is not found in that compo-
nent then the circuit and then the project are searched for the
attribute.
If the attribute is not found then the attribute name is displayed in

the circuit diagram in angle brackets. The missing attribute can be
created at a later point in time. The link is then created automatical-
ly.
The concept of linking text components with attributes is also
utilized for labeling drawing frames.
11.11 Text components with specified links
Text components are automatically generated for displayable

component attributes and connector labels which are linked to the
corresponding attributes. Open the Display Attribute dialog window
with which you can adjust how the text is displayed by double-
clicking on the text component or via the Properties... menu item
on the Edit menu.
Figure 11/18: Display Attribute dialog window
Alignment Defines the horizontal or the vertical alignment of the text within
the text field.
Scale Defines the scaling factor of the text in the x or y direction.
Note: You can also change the text size by selecting another font
size in the font type dialog window. You open this dialog window
using the Font... button under Text Attributes.
Rotation Defines text’s angle of rotation in degrees.
Font... Defines the text font.
Color... Defines the text color.
Find Target... The target of a linked text is the attribute which the text refers to.
This button opens the Properties dialog window of the object which
contains this attribute.
11.12 Change the properties of multiple objects simultaneously
If multiple objects are selected, choosing the Properties... menu

item on the Edit menu opens a dialog window with a limited
selection of properties. It only contains those properties which
meaningfully relate to all of the selected objects. This enables you
to change the font for multiple texts in a single operation, for ex-
ample. The more different object types (symbols, connectors,
drawing elements, texts, etc.) that are selected, the less common
properties are available.
The following tabs are available for the common properties de-
pending on the objects highlighted.
11.12.1 Drawing Properties
The dialog elements available within a tab depend on the objects

highlighted.
Figure 11/19: Properties dialog window, Drawing Properties tab:
several highlighted objects
Font... Defines the font type of the text.
Scale Defines the scaling factor of the text in the x or y direction.
Rotation Defines the angle of rotation of the text field in degrees.
Line Width Defines the line width.
means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this. In particular
this means that symbols are not covered by filled drawing ele-
ments, for example.
means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this. In particu-
lar it means that symbols are covered by filled drawing elements,
for example.
Reset Reset the settings to the default values.
11.12.2 Main Component
Figure 11/20: Properties dialog window, Drawing Properties tab:

several highlighted objects
Main Component A compatible main component can be selected from a list. The main
component identification can also be entered directly as text.
Browse... Opens a dialog that shows all compatible main components as a

tree in accordance with the object hierarchy.
Link If this box is checked then the secondary component is logically

linked with the main component. If the main component is then
renamed, the link is retained and the identification of the linked
secondary component is adapted as appropriate to the main com-
ponent identification.
Find Target... If the secondary component is logically linked with a main compo-
nent, a search can be performed for the associated main compo-
nent using this button.
Parts list management and analyses
Chapter 12
12. Parts list manage ment a nd a nalyses
Various analyses can be inserted into a circuit diagram using the

Insert menu item. Alternatively you can also use the button on
the toolbar. The following dialog window opens.
Figure 12/1: List/Table... dialog window
The following analyses can be inserted into the circuit diagram

using this dialog: Parts List , Terminal diagram , Cable Map and
Cable List .
The use of parts lists is described below. The use and function of
the other analyses are described in the corresponding chapters.
FluidSIM creates parts lists that are automatically updated in the

background while the circuits are being edited.
If a parts list has been added to a circuit diagram as described

above it can be used like a symbol. The use of parts lists as a spe-
cial page type is described under Display parts list.
You can customise the appearance of the parts list under “ Proper-
ties... ” in the “Appearance” tab. You can see the effects of the
settings straight away in the preview on the right-hand side.
If the “Lines per Page” option is selected you can specify the num-
ber of lines to be displayed per page. The relevant pages will also
be output when the circuit diagram is printed. Buttons for naviga-
tion are displayed underneath the page if the list is split across
multiple pages.
Figure 12/2: Buttons for navigating through lists
12.1 Display parts list
We recommend setting up one file specifically for the parts list in a

project. If you wish to create a circuit drawing without creating a
project you can switch the view for this circuit to the parts list view.
Selecting the Parts List menu item from the View menu enables
you to switch from the circuit view to the parts list view. Conversely,
selecting the Circuit Diagram menu item from the View menu
enables you to switch from the parts list view to the circuit view.
A parts list is displayed as a table in the window. You can edit the
following options for editing the table:
— Attributes which the user can edit can be entered directly into
the corresponding table field.
— Clicking on the column header sorts the rows on the basis of

the column clicked. Clicking on the head of the same column
again reverses the sorting order.
— You can adjust the column width by dragging the edges of a

column header.
— You can change the order of the columns by dragging and

dropping a column header in another position.
12.2 Find components from the parts on the circuit diagram
FluidSIM enables you to easily find components on the parts list in

the circuit diagram and vice versa.
Figure 12/3: Finding components from the parts list
You have the following options:
— Clicking on the Find... button on the “Find Target” parts list

column switches to the circuit diagram display and an anima-
tion identifies the corresponding components. If the same cir-
cuit diagram is already open in another window than the parts
list view remains in the active window. The already opened
window containing the circuit diagram is moved into the fore-
ground and an animation identifies the corresponding circuit
diagram symbol.
— When you click a cell in the parts list table an animation identi-
fies the corresponding component in all of the opened windows
displaying the circuit diagram.
— If you click a column header in the parts list table then both the
entire column of the parts list as well as the corresponding
components in the associated circuit diagram windows are se-
lected.
— If you click a component in a circuit diagram then both this
component and the corresponding row in the open parts lists
are selected.
12.3 Set parts list properties
In the parts list view clicking on the Properties... button opens

the Parts List Properties dialog window.
Figure 12/4: Parts List Properties dialog window: Included Pages

tab
Accumulated Parts List Compiles the components with the same attributes.
Single Position Parts List Lists all of the components individually
Sort as Number Interprets the column contents as numbers, so that “10” appears
after “2”, for example.
Include This Page’s Compo- Only lists the components of the corresponding circuit diagram.
nents Only
Include All Project Files Lists all of the components of the active project.
Include Selected Files: Lists all of the components of the selected circuit diagrams belong-
ing to the active project.
Figure 12/5: Parts List Properties dialog window: Listed Attributes

tab
List All Attributes Lists all of the component attributes within a parts list row.
List Selected Attributes: Only lists selected component attributes within a parts list row.
Figure 12/6: Parts List Properties dialog window: Print Options tab
In this tab you can adjust the appearance of the parts list printout.
In the preview on the right-hand side you can immediately see the
effects of the adjustments. You can find information regarding
printing a parts list in the “Print circuit diagram and parts list”
section.
12.4 Export parts list
You can export the parts list as a text file.,
→ Click the Export... button in the parts list view.
A dialog window for selecting a file or entering a new file name

appears. After you have entered a file and left the dialog field you
can define the following format settings for the export in the Parts
List Export dialog window:
Figure 12/7: Parts List Export dialog window
Column Header If this option is selected then the names of the attributes appear in
the first row of the text file.
Quotation Marks Select this option to set the field elements in quotation marks.
Delimiter The selected separator is used to separate the columns.
Manage projects
Chapter 13
13. Manage pr ojects
FluidSIM supports the management of projects by compiling differ-

ent files under one name in a single project file. This has the fol-
lowing benefits: When opening a project all of the associated data
is loaded. It is possible to rapidly access files belonging to a project
via the project window.Parts lists whose elements are located in
different circuit diagram files can be maintained in one project.
13.1 Create new project
→ Select the New... / Project... menu item from the Project

menu and enter a file name for the new project.
Project files possess the prj file suffix. By default they only con-
tain links to files contained in the project. If you wish to pass on a
project then you must either pass on all of the associated files
along with the project file or activate the “Save Projects as Single
File” option.
When creating a new project, a project folder is automatically

created to store the project file and all other files belonging to the
project. This automatically created project folder has the same
name as the project file. If you create the project file in an empty
folder this will be used for the project (i.e. another new folder will
not be created underneath it). The automatic creation of project
directories can be activated and deactivated in the options under
Save.
In the project window a project is represented hierarchically as a

list. The top element is the project node. Below this are the associ-
ated circuit nodes and parts list nodes which can be differentiated
from each other via the symbol in front of the name.
13.2 Project nodes
Every project possesses one project node as the uppermost ele-

ment. All of the project-specific properties are saved with the pro-
ject node. Right-clicking on a project node opens a context menu.
You can also find the menu items on the Project menu. Here you
can find the functions for adding and removing files, among other
things.
Under the Properties... menu item from the Project menu you
can define properties for the project. Properties that can be speci-
fied for both projects and circuits are described under Circuit and
project properties.
13.2.1 Project archiving
Project files generally consist of links to the files contained therein.

However, where desired FluidSIM can also save the project along
with all of the associated files in one single file. Among other
things, this makes it easier to pass on the project. Activate the Save
Projects as Single File option in the Archiving tab.
Figure 13/1: Project dialog window: Archiving tab
Save Projects as Single File If this option is activated all of the files belonging to the project are
saved in a single file.
Please note the advice displayed under this option.
13.3 Circuit and parts list nodes
A circuit node is created beneath the project node for every circuit
file that belongs to the project. This also applies to parts lists since
they are saved as circuits. These are just displayed differently in the
window. All of the circuit-specific or parts list-specific properties are
saved with the circuit node.
Right-clicking a circuit node opens a context menu containing the

following menu items:
Open... Opens the selected circuit or the selected parts list in a window.
Double-clicking on the node in the project tree also opens the
window.
Close Windows Closes the window of the selected circuit or the selected parts list.
Remove From List Removes the selected circuit or the selected parts list from the
project.
Rename... Changes the description of the selected circuit or the selected parts
list.
Properties... In this dialog window you can enter data for the circuit or parts list.
Note: Please note that the additional parts list-specific properties

can be set using the window view of the parts list.
Figure 13/2: Page dialog window: Drawing Size tab
Here you can define the circuit dimensions and orientation, both of
which are relevant for printing.
13.4 Unplaced objects
Various symbols consist of a main component and several second-

ary components. For solenoid valves in particular FluidSIM manag-
es the associated solenoid coils automatically. The linking of sole-
noid valves with their solenoid coils is described in detail under
Link solenoid valves and solenoid coils.
If a main component is inserted into a circuit diagram, the associat-
ed coils are automatically entered in the Unplaced Objects symbol
library.
Figure 13/3: Circuit diagram with solenoid valve and associated

solenoid coils in the Unplaced Objects symbol library
The associated coils are already internally linked with the solenoid
valve in the circuit diagram. Clicking one of the “electric connect-
ors” in the solenoid valve automatically highlights the correspond-
ing coil in the Unplaced Objects library.
Figure 13/4: Highlighting of the connector link with associated

solenoid coil
As soon as you drag a coil from the library into a circuit diagram it is
“used up” and removed from the library. The valve is entered as the
parent object for the coil.
Figure 13/5: Inserting a solenoid coil
Assigning a new identification to the coil has a direct knock-on

effect on the valve since the coil and valve are linked. The identifi-
cation is displayed at the valve.
Figure 13/6: Automatic linking of solenoid valve and solenoid coil
If you delete the solenoid coil in the circuit diagram it is automati-

cally added to the Unplaced Objects symbol library again. This
symbol library is completely self-managing.
Circuit and project properties
Chapter 14
14. Circuit and project pr operties
Circuits and projects have a host of common properties. The prop-

erties set in the project can be used by circuits in the project. All of
the properties that can be specified for both circuits and projects
are listed below. The screenshots shown are dialog windows for the
circuits.
Figure 14/1: Properties dialog window
Properties The file name field displays the file name of the circuit or project
along with the complete path. The file name is carried over to the
input field for the “Description” and can be edited there. This entry
is displayed in the upper margin of the window as well as beside
the circuit or project node.
Page number Here you can specify a page number. The page number can be
made up of any character string. The page number can be defined
using the “%PageNumber” predefined placeholder. This placehold-
er can be used in text components and drawing frames among
others.
Drawing Frame Here you can make settings for the drawing frame. This function is
described in the section Drawing frame.
14.1 Attributes
Any number of attributes can be created for every circuit or node in

a project. The attributes are listed in a table in the “ Attributes” tab.
New attributes can be entered in the empty cells at the end of the
table. The use of attributes is described in the section Attributes of
the nodes in a project.
The attributes of a project node are automatically copied to all

circuit and parts list nodes (inherited) and are thus available in all
of the circuit drawings. This concept is particularly useful for the
drawing frames if project attributes are to be displayed in the
circuit diagram, for example. You can find further information in the
section Link text components with attributes.
Circuit attributes copied from a project cannot be edited initially.

The corresponding row in the Attributes tab of the Page dialog
window is grayed out and the “Inherit From Project” option in the
column is activated.
However it is possible to overwrite a copied attribute in a circuit.

The option in the “Inherit From Project” column must be deactivat-
ed for this. The value of the attribute can then be edited. This
function can be used to assign individual page numbers in the
drawing frame, for example. If the “Inherit From Project” option is
reactivated then the attribute value is copied from the project
again.
Figure 14/2: Attributes tab
Attribute This column contains the name of the attribute.
Value This column contains the value of the attribute.
Action The buttons in this column allow the following actions: if the attrib-
ute was created in the parent project node then the “ Find Target...
” action is available. Clicking this opens the Project or Circuit dialog
window for the project node as the target that contains the corre-
sponding attribute. If the attribute was created in the same node
then the “ Delete ” action that allows you to delete the attribute is
available.
Inherit From Project If the attribute was created in the same node then this option is
deactivated and grayed out. This applies to all of the attributes of
the project node since it does not have a parent node. For child
nodes the value of the attribute from the project node is copied
when this option is activated. After deactivating this option it is
possible to locally overwrite the attribute value.
Comment Here you can enter a comment about the attribute.
14.1.1 Predefined placeholders
FluidSIM provides a host of predefined placeholders. These place-

holders can be used in text components and drawing frames among
others.
The placeholders begin with a percentage sign. The following

predefined placeholders are some of those available:
%PageNumber The page number is specified in the properties dialog window for
the circuit diagram.
If analyses are split across several pages, the number of the sub-
page is added to the page number with a minus sign. If, for exam-
ple, the entered page number is “42-01” and the page displayed is
the third page in an analysis then the placeholder “%PageNumber”
is replaced by the character string “42-01-03”.
%PageDescription The description for the page is specified in the properties dialog
window for the circuit diagram.
%PageFileName Stands for the file name of the page without the file path.
%PageFullFilePath Stands for the file name of the page with the full file path.
%PageFileDateTime Stands for the date and time of the most recent change to the
circuit diagram.
%PageFileDate Stands for the date of the most recent change to the circuit dia-
gram.
%PageFileTime Stands for the time of the most recent change to the circuit dia-
gram.
14.2 Page Dividers
Page dividers can only be defined for pages. Editing of page divid-
ers is described under Page dividers.
14.3 Basic Unit Length
The symbols in the FluidSIM symbol libraries are created according

to various DIN ISO standards. Instead of specifying absolute units
of length, the standards simply use a relative basic unit of length
“M”. All of the symbols have been created with reference to this
basic unit of length “M”. The actual size of the symbol is not de-
fined until the symbol is inserted into a circuit.
Information on how to convert the basic unit of length “M” is stored

with the circuit diagram. You can change the set values for a circuit
diagram by calling up the properties dialog window for the circuit
diagram using the Page Properties... menu. You will find the
relevant settings in the Basic Unit Length tab.
Figure 14/3: Basic Unit Length tab
As soon as the value of “M” is changed, the sizes of the existing

symbols are recalculated with respect to the specified basic unit of
length. The specification has no effect on elements in the drawing
frame.
The Basic Unit Length tab is also in the project settings. The set-
tings made in this tab are used as a template for circuit diagrams
created from new in the project tree.
14.4 Language
The language settings are found in the Language tab. The settings
made in this tab affect language-dependent text, etc. in parts lists.
The language used for program elements such as buttons is de-
fined via the program options, see Language.
Figure 14/4: Language tab
Inherit From Parent Node Copies the language settings from the parent project node.
Product Catalog Defines the language used for the Festo product catalogue. All of
the product attributes are displayed in the relevant language. The
predefined attributes are also displayed in this language.
Translation Table Defines the translation table to be used.
Translation Language Defines the language from the selected translation table to be
used. The user-defined attributes are displayed in the selected
language.
14.5 Encryption
Projects and circuit diagrams can be encrypted. The encryption

method used is AES-128.
Figure 14/5: Encryption tab
Enable Encryption This option activates and deactivates encryption. When encryption
is activated the password to be used can be entered in the Pass-
word input field.
14.6 Designation Conventions
Figure 14/6: Designation Conventions tab
This tab is used to define the settings for the designation conven-
tions. Further information can be found under Equipment identifica-
tions and designation conventions.
Settings can be made for the following sets of conventions: Fluid-

ics, Electrics and User Defined. If the Inherit From Parent Node
option is active then the sets of conventions will be copied from the
parent project node.
Frame Identification Defines that the identifications produced by the selected set of
conventions will be framed.
Specifications can be made for Installation, Location and Circuit

that will be evaluated for displaying the symbol identifications. If
the Inherit From Parent Node option is active then the specification
will be copied from the parent project node.
Example The example shown illustrates the effects of the selected designa-
tion conventions.
Automatically frame identifi- If “free input” is chosen for a symbol identification then this option
cation for free input determines whether these identifications should be framed.
14.7 Cross Reference Representation
Figure 14/7: Cross Reference Representation tab
This tab is used to define the settings for the cross-reference repre-
sentation. You can find further information under Cross-reference
representation. If the Inherit From Parent Node option is active then
the settings will be copied from the parent project node.
Example Illustrates the effects of the settings using an example.
Reset Resets the settings to the settings defined in FluidSIM.
Special functions for electric circuits
Chapter 15
15. Special functions for electric circuits
15.1 Potentials and conduction lines
The creation of horizontal and vertical potential lines is supported

by drawing conduction lines. The end points of the conduction line
consist of potentials that also serve as interruptions. In the dialog
window for drawing conduction lines you can specify whether the
potentials should have an identification.
In this example we want to draw three horizontal potential lines

where each line comes from a preceding sheet “1” and is continued
on a sheet “3”.
You open a dialog window where you can make the settings shown
using the Insert Conduction Line... menu item or the button
on the toolbar.
Figure 15/1: Settings for the potential lines to be created
You can then define the end points of the line with two consecutive
mouse clicks.
Figure 15/2: Three horizontal potential lines
The identifications of the potentials can be changed. In this exam-

ple we want to rename the potential from L4 to L6.
→ Double-click the left-hand potential L1. Then enter L4 for the

identification in the dialog window.
Then following prompt then opens.
Figure 15/3:
FluidSIM supports the automatic renaming of the potentials linked

with the source potential. If you answer “Yes”, the potential L1 on
the right-hand side will also be renamed L4.
→ Rename the potentials L2 and L3 to L5 and L6 in the same way.
→ Then enter the corresponding markers for the predecessors or

successors in the properties dialog windows for the potentials.
If the corresponding cross-references have the same markers in
the respective predecessor and successor pages, the potential
lines might look as follows.
Figure 15/4: Three horizontal potential lines with cross-references
15.2 Cables and wiring
Cables and wiring are represented in the circuit diagram by a spe-

cial cable symbol. All of the lines defined by the cable symbol are
assigned to a cable or to wiring. You can define for the symbol
whether it is a cable or wiring.
Wiring only summarizes the defined lines (wires) graphically in the

circuit diagram and is assigned the identification “W” by default.
Wiring is not listed in analyses such as cable maps and cable lists.
Unlike a cable, wiring cannot be assigned to a product. With wiring,
product information can only be saved in the lines.
If the cable symbol represents a cable then a cable object must be
assigned to the symbol. Product properties can be saved in the
cable object and are analyzed in cable maps and cable lists, etc.
Several cable symbols can reference the same cable object. This is
the case if, for example, a cable has to be spread over several
pages.
Figure 15/5: Cable symbol
→ Select the Cable menu item from the Insert menu or click
the button to define a cable or wiring.
This activates a mode that allows you to insert a cable symbol by

making two consecutive clicks. All of the lines that are defined by
the cable symbol are initially assigned to wiring.
If you want to use a cable instead of wiring you can assign a cable
object to the symbol using the properties dialog window for the
cable symbol.
Figure 15/6: Cable Symbol dialog window, Wires tab
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the cable symbol.
Cable – Wiring Defines whether the cable symbol represents a cable or wiring
comprising single wires. Wiring is not listed in cable maps, etc. If
Wiring is selected then an identification can be specified that can
be displayed with Display Identification.
If Cable is selected then an existing cable object can be assigned to

the cable symbol using a drop-down list. A new cable object can be
created using the Create New... button. Clicking Properties...
opens the properties dialog window for the selected cable object.
Wires In order to analyze cable maps the component connections that join
a wire must be determined. The connectors are automatically
entered in the list box if they can be uniquely assigned. If a unique
assignment is not possible, the relevant connector must be select-
ed manually via the list box. The identification for the individual
wires can also be entered. These are saved in the individual lines
(wires). The wire identifications are displayed at the cable symbol
using the Display button.
Reverse Direction The entries in the From and To column are automatically defined as
the direction of the wires when creating the cable symbol. Clicking
the Reverse Direction button reverses the directions of all of the
wires.
Renumber From: Clicking this button renumbers all of the wires defined by the cable
symbol, starting with the number entered in the list box.
Figure 15/7: Cable Symbol dialog window, Display Attributes tab
In the “Display Attributes” tab you can select the attributes of the
associated cable object that are to be displayed at the cable sym-
bol.
→ Click the Create New... button to create a new cable symbol.
The following dialog window opens.
Figure 15/8: New Cable dialog window
Containing Page Indicates the page where the cable object will be saved. This is
important if various cable symbols on different pages reference the
same cable object. The cable object is only saved with one page.
Identification Enter the identification for the cable here.
Number of Wires Enter the number of lines (wires) in the cable here. The number can
be higher than the underlying lines if, for example, a concrete cable
has unconnected wires. If the associated cable symbols overscore
more lines than are defined in the cable object, a warning is output
when the page is checked and the corresponding entries are high-
lighted in color in the cable lists.
After you specify the identification for the cable and confirm the
dialog, the cable object is generated and the cable symbol is as-
signed to it.
→ Click the “ Properties... ” button to edit the properties of the

cable object.
Figure 15/9: Properties dialog window: Cable tab
Number of Wires Defines the number of lines (wires) in the cable. The number can be
higher than the lines overscored by the associated cable symbols if,
for example, a concrete cable has unconnected wires. If the associ-
ated cable symbols overscore more lines than are defined in the
cable object, a warning is output when the page is checked and the
corresponding entries are highlighted in color in the cable lists.
The associated cable symbols are listed in rows in the table. You
can jump to the associated cable symbol using the “ Find... ”
button.
The User Defined Properties tab in the properties dialog window for
the cable symbol lists the cable-specific product properties such as
Cable Type and Length. These properties and the entries in the
Cable tab are analyzed in the cable map, etc.
15.2.1 Manage cables
All cables within a circuit can be listed and renamed using the
Manage Cables... menu item from the Page menu. You open the
properties dialog window for the relevant cable object using the
Properties... button.
You can also call up the cables of all circuits belonging to the pro-
ject using the Manage Cables... menu item from the Project
menu.
Figure 15/10: Manage Cables... dialog window
Containing Page Shows which circuit the cable is assigned to. You can edit this
assignment within a project.
You can add a new cable object to the project using the Create
New... button. Each cable object must be assigned to a page.
Clicking the Create New... button first opens the following dialog
window where you can define the assignment.
Figure 15/11: Browse Pages dialog window
After you click the Select button a dialog window opens where
you can define the name and number of wires for the new cable
object. The dialog window is described under Cables and wiring.
15.2.2 Insert cable map
You can insert an associated cable map for a cable into the circuit
diagram. You do this by inserting a cable map into a circuit diagram
and then assigning a cable to this map.
→ To insert a cable map into the circuit diagram select the Cable
Map menu item from the Insert menu. Alternatively you can
click the button. Select Cable Map in the selection dialog
window that opens.
The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair. Click the position in the

circuit diagram where you want to insert the cable map. A dialog
window then opens where you can assign the relevant cable and
customise the appearance.
Figure 15/12: Cable Map dialog window
Cable Defines the relevant cable.
Properties... Opens the properties dialog window for the associated cable sym-
bol.
You can customise the appearance of the cable map in the “ Ap-
pearance” tab. You can see the effects of the settings straight away
in the preview on the right-hand side.
multiple pages.
15.2.3 Insert cable list
You can insert a cable list into a cable map.
→ To insert a cable list into the circuit diagram select the Cable
List menu item from the Insert menu. Alternatively you can
click the button. Select Cable List in the selection dialog
window that opens.

circuit diagram where you want to insert the cable list. A dialog
window then opens where you can select the associated cable and
customise the appearance.
Figure 15/14: Cable List dialog window, Included Pages tab
Include This Page’s Compo- Lists only the cables in the associated circuit.
nents Only
Include All Project Files Lists all cables in the active project.
Include Selected Files: Lists all cables in the selected circuit in the active project.
Figure 15/15: Cable List dialog window, Appearance tab
You can customise the appearance of the cable map in the “Ap-
pearance” tab. You can see the effects of the settings straight away
in the preview on the right-hand side.
If the cable symbols of a cable object overscore more lines than are
defined in the cable object, a warning is output when the page is
checked and the corresponding entries are highlighted in color in
the cable list.
multiple pages.
15.3 Terminals and terminal strips
15.3.1 Set terminals
You can set individual terminals or multiple terminals in one step.
→ Select the Terminal menu item from the Insert menu or

click the button to define an individual electric terminal.
This activates a mode that allows you to insert a terminal by click-

ing a free point on the electric line.
Figure 15/17:
As soon as you have set a new terminal in this way the dialog
window containing the settings for this terminal appears. You can
use this dialog window to assign the terminal to a terminal strip.
This assignment can also be made or changed later.
Figure 15/18: Terminal dialog window
Description Contains the description of the terminal or the terminal designa-

tion.
Display If this box is checked then the description entered will be displayed
beside the terminal.
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the line.
Pos. Defines the position of the terminal within the associated terminal
strip. An entry is only possible once the terminal has been assigned
to a terminal strip.
Internal # External Changes the direction of the terminal. The direction is indicated in
the circuit by an arrow that shows which connector is inside the
control cabinet and which is outside. The tip of the arrow points
into the control cabinet.
Show Direction If this box is checked then the direction arrow is displayed at the
terminal.
Terminal Strip Defines the terminal strip containing the terminal in question. The
list contains the terminal strips already created. You call up the
properties dialog window for the selected terminal strip using
Properties... . You can also create a new terminal strip using
Create New... .
Display Identification If this box is checked then the identification for the associated
terminal strip is displayed beside the terminal.
15.3.2 Set multiple terminals
As well as the option of setting individual terminals, FluidSIM also

offers a mode that allows you to set multiple terminals one after
the other. You can keep inserting terminals by simply clicking on
the electric lines until you leave the mode again.
→ To insert multiple terminals select the Multiple Terminals...

menu item from the Insert menu or click the button.
Figure 15/19:
The operation begins with a dialog window where you can make
some settings for the new terminals. Above all you need to first
select an existing terminal strip or create a new one. If a suitable
terminal strip does not already exist then a prompt to create a new
one will automatically appear.
Figure 15/20: Define Multiple Terminals dialog window
Description Defines how the new terminals are to be numbered. The Enumerate
Manually option allows you to specify a start number from which
the numbering continues. Otherwise a free terminal from the se-
lected terminal strip is automatically used. The start number “2”
was specified in the example shown.
Display If this box is checked then the description entered will be displayed
beside the terminal.
Direction Defines the direction of the new terminals. The direction is indicat-
ed in the circuit by an arrow that shows which connector is inside
the control cabinet and which is outside. The tip of the arrow points
into the control cabinet. The direction can also be changed later
using the properties dialog window for the individual terminals.
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the line.
Terminal Strip Defines the terminal strip containing the terminals in question. The
list contains the terminal strips already created. You call up the
properties dialog window for the selected terminal strip using
Properties... . You can also create a new terminal strip using
Create New... .
Display Identification If this box is checked then the identification for the associated
terminal strip is displayed beside the new terminals.
15.3.3 Create terminal strips
FluidSIM does not treat terminal strips as visible objects within the
circuit pages which explains why they cannot be interactively
selected using the mouse in order to highlight them, delete them or
change their properties. Terminal strips can either be managed via
the associated terminals or using the Manage Terminal Strips...
menu item under Page or Project .
A terminal strip is always part of a specific circuit. To define a new

terminal strip you must therefore define a circuit file in addition to
the description and number of terminals.
Figure 15/21: New Terminal Strip dialog window
All properties can also be changed later at any time. You open the
properties dialog window for a terminal strip via any terminal in
that terminal strip using the Properties... button.
Figure 15/22: Terminal Strip dialog window
External Target If the target of a terminal inside the control cabinet is unique due to
the wiring, FluidSIM automatically enters the identification for the
connected component. Otherwise the list contains the identifica-
tions of all objects that can be reached from the terminal. The
target search can be controlled by selecting a junction symbol as a
T distributor.
Internal Target The targets of the terminals outside the control cabinet are listed
here. As with the internal targets, unique links are automatically
entered.
Find... Jumps to the associated terminal in the circuit diagram.
15.3.4 Manage terminal strips
All terminal strips within a circuit can be listed and renamed using
the Manage Terminal Strips... menu item from the Page menu.
You open the properties dialog window for the relevant terminal
strip using the Properties... button.
You can also call up the cables of all terminal strips belonging to
the project using the Manage Terminal Strips... menu item from
the Project menu.
Figure 15/23: Manage Terminal Strips... dialog window
Containing Page Shows which circuit the terminal strip is assigned to. You can edit
this assignment within a project.
You can add a new terminal strip to the project using the Create
New... button. Each terminal strip must be assigned to a page.
Clicking the Create New... button first opens the following dialog
window where you can define the assignment.
Figure 15/24: Browse Pages dialog window
After you click the Select button a dialog window opens where
you can define the properties of the new terminal strip. The dialog
window is described under Create terminal strips.
15.4 Terminal diagram
You can insert an associated terminal diagram for a terminal strip

into the circuit diagram. You do this by inserting a terminal diagram
into a circuit diagram and then assigning a terminal strip to this
diagram.
→ Select the Terminal diagram menu item from the Insert

menu or click the button to insert a terminal diagram into
the circuit diagram. Alternatively you can click the button.
Select Terminal diagram in the selection dialog window that
opens.
circuit diagram where you want to insert the terminal diagram. A
dialog window then opens where you can assign the relevant
terminal strip and customise the appearance.
Figure 15/25: Terminal diagram - Properties dialog window
Terminal Strip Defines the associated terminal strip.
Properties... Opens the properties dialog window for the associated terminal
strip.
You can customise the appearance of the terminal diagram in the

“Print Options” tab. You can see the effects of the settings straight
away in the preview on the right-hand side.
multiple pages.
The entries in the “Description”, “Identification” and “Connector”

columns are taken from the object properties of the associated
targets.
15.4.1 Set links
You can set so-called links in a terminal strip. These links are drawn
in the circuit diagram as regular electric lines and marked as links.
The representation of the T distributors can be customized using
their properties dialog window.
The following example shows a circuit diagram with a terminal strip

X1 with 10 terminals and the associated terminal diagram. A link
plug is to be placed at level “1” between terminals “7” and “8” and
at level “2” between terminals “8” and “9”, and a wire link is to be
placed between terminals “9” and “10”.
Figure 15/26:
→ Double-click the electric line between terminals “7” and “8”.
Figure 15/27:
The properties dialog window for the electric line opens. The op-
tions for setting the links are in the top right:
Figure 15/28: Detail of the Line (electric) dialog window
Link Defines that this line is to be treated as a link.
Link Plug Defines that the link is a link plug.
Level Specifies the level if a link plug was selected.
Wire Link Defines that the link is a wire link.
→ Set “Link”, “Link Plug” and “Level 3”.
FluidSIM tracks the line across one distributor point at most. This
means that the specified link will find the contacts “7” and “8”. This
link will be represented in the terminal diagram as follows.
Figure 15/29:
→ Proceed in the same way to set a link plug between “8” and “9”
at level “2” and a wire link between “9” and “10”.
The terminal diagram then has the following appearance.
Figure 15/30:
15.5 Contact images
The contact images can be displayed within a circuit diagram be-

neath relay coils and similar symbols. The contact images list all the
contacts of the associated relay coil and show which current paths
these contacts are in. The division of the page or circuit diagram
can be defined using the page dividers.
→ To do this select the Display Contact Images menu item from

the View menu.
The contact images of the current circuit diagram are shown or

hidden.
Contact images can be highlighted, moved and aligned like other

symbols.
Figure 15/31:
You can have all of the contacts in a contact image displayed in a

list and customise the appearance by double-clicking the contact
image or highlighting the contact image and selecting the Proper-
ties... menu item from the Edit menu.
Figure 15/32: Contact Image dialog window
You can customise the representation of the contact image in the

“Print Options” tab.
The “Contacts” tab lists all of the associated contacts. You can
jump to the corresponding contact in the circuit diagram using the
Jump to Target button.
Circuit input and output
Chapter 16
16. Circuit input and output
16.1 Print circuit diagram and parts list
FluidSIM circuits and parts lists can be printed by opening the Print
dialog window via the Print... menu item on the File menu.
In FluidSIM a parts list is the representation of a circuit as a table. If

you wish to print an individual parts list then the corresponding
circuit must be shown in the parts list display.
Figure 16/1: Print dialog window:
Printer Select the desired output device from the list of the available print-
ers.
Properties... This button enables you to open the dialog window for setting the
printer options.
Print to File Activate this option if you wish to write the print data to a file.
Print Project Files When you work in a project you can select which circuits and parts
lists are to be printed.
Copies
Select the number of copies. If the printout consists of multiple
pages you can cause FluidSIM to print a correspondingly sorted
sequence.
Scale You can increase or decrease the output size by entering a scaling
factor. If the dimensions of the area to be printed are larger than
the printable area on the paper then the printout is spread across
multiple pages (tiled). You can see the page divisions in the print
preview.
Note: Please note that it may not always be possible to precisely

comply with the page margins. Therefore you should plan a certain
amount of leeway for the page margin.
Page Here you can specify additional margins in order to manually cus-
tomise the print area.
Margins You can select which page the print preview displays.
16.2 Import DXF file
Files saved in the DXF format can be imported and retain most of
their element attributes. If several special points were taken into
account when creating the drawing using a CAD program then
FluidSIM can easily expand the symbol library.
16.3 Export circuit
The FluidSIM circuits can be saved as a file with a variety of differ-

ent formats. The BMP, JPG, GIF, WMF, PNG, DXF, TIF and PDF for-
mats are available. Once you have selected the Export... menu
item from the File menu a dialog window opens where you can
define the different settings for the export. The settings depend on
the format selected.
Figure 16/2: Export Page dialog window
You are then prompted to select a file name or enter a new one.
Select a suitable resolution for the image file.
Please note that a high resolution generates extremely large files

which mean the export may take longer. However you can cancel
the image export at any time.
Options
Chapter 17
17. Options
You can access the various program settings in the Options dialog
window via the Options... menu item on the Tools menu.
17.1 General
Figure 17/1: Options dialog window: General tab
View In order to simplify connection of connectors FluidSIM draws a

small circle around the connectors on the circuit symbols. Deacti-
vate the Display Snap Radius option in order to disable the display
of the snap-in circles.
Product Catalog Activating the “Insert Symbols With Type Attribute” option causes a
text field to be added with the circuit symbol which contains a link
to the attribute with the type designation of the product when
components are inserted from the Festo product catalogue.
Text fields for accessories When inserting accessories without symbols texts with the type
designation of the products are displayed. Here you can limit the
number of text fields inserted.
Products Specifies which products from the Festo product catalogue are to
be used, for example Europe or Festo worldwide.
Grid Here you can set the grid width and the style. To display the grid
select the Show Grid menu item on the View menu.
As well as absolute values such as “mm” you can also specify the
relative basic unit of length “M”.
17.2 Save
Figure 17/2: Options dialog window: Save tab
Compress Files FluidSIM normally compresses the saved files in order to save
space on the disk. If you deactivate the option the files are saved as
XML files without compression. You can find further information in
the Circuit files section.
Create Backup Files The “Create Backup Files” option causes the previous versions of
saved files are created with the bak file suffix. This enables you to
restore previous versions.
Save New Projects as Single Project files generally consist of links to the files contained therein.
File However, where desired FluidSIM can also save the project along
with all of the associated circuit files in one single file. This serves
to simplify passing on or archiving the project, among other things.
You can set whether a project saves links or all of the associated
files using the Project dialog window – Properties of the project.
This option defines the default setting for new projects.
Create Folder For New Pro- A folder with the project name where all project files are stored is
jects automatically generated when a new project is created if this op-
tion is active.
17.3 Folder Locations
Figure 17/3: Options dialog window: Folder Locations tab
Page Files This is the default path for opening and saving circuits.
Project Files This is the default path for opening and saving projects.
Library Files This is the default path for opening and saving libraries.
Drawing Frames This is the default path for opening and saving drawing frames.
Database Files This is the default path for opening and saving database files.
17.4 Language
Figure 17/4: Options dialog window: Language tab
Program Defines the languages for the program interface including dialog
windows and messages.
Product Catalog Defines the language used for the Festo product catalogue.
Translation Table Defines the translation table to be used.
Translation Language Defines the language from the selected translation table to be
used.
17.5 Dimension
This tab is used to define the default settings for the dimensions.
You can find further information under Dimension.
Figure 17/5: Options dialog window: Dimension tab
All of the settings are only applied to newly generated dimensions.

They have no effect on existing dimensions in the circuit.
Layer Defines the drawing layer where the newly generated dimensions
are placed.
Automatic Dimensioning Activates and deactivates automatic dimensioning. If this option is

activated then the displayed dimension value is automatically
adapted if the dimension is scaled.
Unit Defines the unit to be used for the dimension.
Show Unit Defines whether the unit should be displayed.
Decimals Defines the number of decimal places.
Scale Factor Determines the factor by which the real length is multiplied for the
displayed value. This is necessary if you are creating a drawing with
a scale other than 1:1.
17.6 Designation Conventions
Figure 17/6: Options dialog window: Designation Conventions tab
This tab is used to define the default settings for the designation
conventions. You can find further information under Equipment
identifications and designation conventions.
The settings are only applied to newly generated projects or cir-

cuits. They have no effect on existing objects.
Settings can be made for the following sets of conventions: Fluid-

ics, Electrics and User Defined.
Frame Identification Defines that the identifications produced by the selected set of
conventions will be framed.
Enumerate Automatically Defines that the identifications of newly inserted symbols will be
automatically numbered. All of the project files and not just the
current circuit will be taken into consideration for the numbering if
Consider All Project Files is active.
17.7 Cross Reference Representation
Figure 17/7: Options dialog window: Cross Reference Representa-

tion tab
This tab is used to define the default settings for the cross-
reference representation. You can find further information under
Cross-reference representation.
The settings are only applied to newly generated projects or cir-

cuits. They have no effect on existing objects.
Example Illustrates the effects of the settings using an example.
Reset Resets the settings to the settings defined in FluidSIM.
17.8 Connector Links
Figure 17/8: Options dialog window: Connector Links tab
Allow connections between Only connectors of the same type can be connected if this option is
same connector types only active. For example a line from an electric connector to a pneumatic
connector cannot be created in this case.
FluidSIM supports the automatic connection of connectors. The

following settings define which connections should be automatical-
ly created.
Pneumatic – Horizontal Pneumatic connectors that are on one horizontal line will be auto-
matically connected when a symbol is inserted or moved.
Pneumatic – Vertical Pneumatic connectors that are on one vertical line will be automati-
cally connected when a symbol is inserted or moved.
Electric – Horizontal Electric connectors that are on one horizontal line will be automati-
cally connected when a symbol is inserted or moved.
Electric – Vertical Electric connectors that are on one vertical line will be automatical-
ly connected when a symbol is inserted or moved.
17.9 Warnings
Figure 17/9: Options dialog window: Warnings tab
Show Warnings Different types of warnings that FluidSIM should or should not
deliver can be activated and deactivated here. These warnings
include “Duplicated identification labels” and “Superimposed
objects”.
Enable Background Check All of the circuits will be checked during editing if this option is
active. Only the criteria that would lead to the warnings specified
under “Show Warnings” are checked. Objects that caused an error
are highlighted in red in the circuit. If this option is not active then
the check must be initiated manually using the Page – Check
Drawing menu.
17.10 Automatic Updates
Figure 17/10: Options dialog window: Automatic Updates tab
Check for updates at startup FluidSIM can search on the Internet for a new version when the
program starts. You can activate or deactivate the automatic search
here.
Check for updates now... As soon as there is an Internet connection you can use this button
to initiate the search for a new FluidSIM version.
17.11 Text Sizes
Figure 17/11: Options dialog window: Text Sizes tab
This tab defines the font sizes to be used for objects newly inserted
into the circuit diagram.
Label/Attribute This group lists the font sizes used for identifications and cross-
references, etc.
List/Table This group lists the font sizes used for analyses and tables.
Menu overview
Chapter 18
18. Menu overview
18.1 File
New
New / File...
Opens a new window for creating a new circuit drawing.
New / Project...
Opens the dialog window for creating a new project.
Open
Open / File...
Opens a new window for selecting an existing circuit drawing.
Open / Project...
Opens the dialog window for selecting an existing project.
Add
Adds files, etc. to the active project.
Add / New Page...
Creates a new circuit file and adds it to the active project.
Add / New Parts List...

Creates a new parts list and adds it to the active project.
Add / Existing Files...

Opens the dialog window for selecting existing files to be added to
the active project.
Close
Closes the active window or project, etc.
Close / File...
Closes the active window.
Close / Project...
Closes the active project.
Save File
Saves the circuit diagram in the active window to disk.
Save File As...

Saves the circuit diagram in the active window to disk under a new
name.
Save Project
Saves the active project.
Save Project As...
Saves the active project under a new name on the data storage
medium. Files that are within the project folder are duplicated while
references to external files are left. With external file references you
must therefore consider that changes to these files affect all pro-
jects containing them.
Save as Component Library...

Saves the active project as a library. As a result a new library sym-
bol is generated for every circuit. The new library bears the name of
the project with the lib file suffix.
DXF Import...
Opens the dialog window for selecting a saved DXF file. The select-
ed file is subsequently converted into a FluidSIM circuit diagram.
The original file remains unchanged.
Export...
Exports the circuit diagram in the active window to the data storage
medium as a BMP, JPG, GIF, WMF, PNG, DXF or TIF file.
Page Setup...
Sets up the printer properties for a page to be printed.
Print Preview
Opens a print preview as a page view.
Print...
Opens the FluidSIM Print dialog window to set the print options for
the active circuit.
Recent Files
A file can be selected for opening from a list of the recently opened
files.
Recent Projects
The most recently opened projects can be selected for opening
from a list.
Exit
Ends FluidSIM.
18.2 Edit
Undo
Undoes the last editing action for the active circuit.
Redo
Takes back the last undo-action for the active circuit.
Cut
Deletes the selected objects and adds them to the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected objects to the clipboard
Paste
Pastes the objects from the clipboard into the active circuit.
Delete
Deletes the selected objects from the active circuit.
Select All
Selects all of the objects from the active circuit.
Group
Groups the selected objects.
Create Macro Object

Creates a macro object out of the selected objects.
Create Cross-reference
Creates a cross-reference.
Ungroup/Break Off
Ungroups the selected groups or macro objects.
Enable Scale
Activates or deactivates the “enable scaling” mode which enables
the scaling of symbols with the help of the mouse pointer.
Enable Rotate
Activates or deactivates the “enable rotate” mode which enables
the rotation of symbols with the help of the mouse pointer.
Edit Poly Line

Activates or deactivates the “Edit Polyline” mode that allows you to
edit a polyline.
Align
Aligns the selected objects with each other.
Rotate
Rotates the selected objects by 90, 180 or 270 degrees anti-
clockwise. Grouped objects are rotated around the center point of
the group rectangle.
Mirror
Mirrors the selected objects horizontally or vertically. Grouped
objects are mirrored along the axis of the group rectangle.
Delete Connector
Deletes the selected component connector.
Properties...
Opens the Properties dialog window for the selected circuit sym-
bols in order to enter the component properties. This also enables
you to carry over attributes from the Festo product catalogue.
The Connector dialog window is opened for the selected compo-

nent connector enabling you to enter the connector propertiest.
When a line segment is highlighted a dialog window opens ena-

bling you to enter the line properties.
If multiple objects are selected then a dialog window with a limited

selection of properties appears. It only contains those properties
which affect all of the selected objects.
18.3 Insert
Find Symbol Description...

Opens the search dialog for selecting a symbol via its appearance
or its description.
From Festo Catalog...

Opens the Festo product catalogue to select a component via the
product features.
From Festo Shopping Basket...

Opens the Festo product catalogue to transfer components from an
existing shopping cars.
From File...
Opens the dialog window for selecting an existing text file in CSV
format which was created by an export from the Festo product
catalogue.
From Custom Database

Opens a dialog window similar to the Festo product catalogue for
selecting a component via the product properties. It is not the
database of the Festo product catalogue that is used, however, but
the selected user database.
Conduction Line...
Opens a dialog window that defines the settings for one or more
conduction lines that are to be inserted in the circuit diagram after
the dialog window is confirmed.
Define Connector...
Creates a new component connector the next time the left mouse
button is clicked in a circuit symbol.
Interruption/Potential...
Adds an interruption or an electric potential to the circuit diagram.
Parts List
Inserts a parts list into the circuit diagram.
Terminal
Inserts a terminal into the circuit diagram.
Multiple Terminals...
Inserts multiple terminals into the circuit diagram.
Terminal diagram
Inserts a terminal diagram into the circuit diagram.
Cable
Inserts a cable into the circuit diagram.
Cable Map
Inserts a cable map into the circuit diagram.
Cable List
Inserts a cable list into the circuit diagram.
18.4 Draw
This menu contains functions for freely drawing graphical elements

such as lines, rectangles, circles, etc as well as for inserting texts
and images.
Line
Draws a line by defining two defined end points.
Poly Line
Draws a polyline by defining the vertices with successive mouse
clicks. The drawing operation can be cancelled by pressing the
Esc key or clicking the right mouse button. The last vertex must
be set with a double-click.
Rectangle
Draws a rectangle by defining two diagonally opposite corner
points.
Circle
Draws a circle by defining a middle point and a radius.
Ellipse
Draws anellipse by defining a middle point and a radii on parallel
axes.
Text
Inserts a text at the mouse position.
Picture
Inserts an image at the mouse position.
Dimension
Inserts a dimension symbol.
18.5 Page
Check Drawing
Checks the active circuit drawing for drawing errors.
Paper Size...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to set the paper size.
Language...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to set the circuit language.
Renumber Designations...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to interactively renumber the
symbol identifications.
Manage Terminal Strips...

Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the terminal strips
in the circuit.
Manage Cables...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the cable objects
in the circuit.
Properties...
Opens an dialog window enabling you to set the circuit properties.
18.6 Project
Add Current Window

Adds the active window to the file list of the open project.
Remove Current Window

Removes the active window from the file list of the open project.
Manage Terminal Strips...

Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the terminal strips
in the project.
Manage Cables...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the cable objects
in the project.
Manage Cross References...

Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the cross-
references in the project.
Properties...
Opens the dialog window for entering the project properties.
18.7 View
Circuit Diagram
Switches from the parts list view to the circuit diagram view.
Parts List
Switches to the parts list view.
Library
Shows or hides the libraries window.
Project
Shows or hides the window for managing the project files.
Standard Size
Displays the circuit diagram in its original size.
Previous View
Displays the previous view of the circuit diagram. Repeatedly
activating this function switches back and forth between the views
previously used.
Fit to Window
Set the zoom level to fit the entire circuit diagram into the window.
View Detail
Defines the new view by drawing a rectangle while holding down
the left mouse button.
Zoom In
Zooms the view of the circuit diagram in by one step. Three steps
correspond approximately to doubling the zoom factor.
Zoom Out
Zooms the view of the circuit diagram out by one step. Three steps
correspond approximately to halving the zoom factor.
Show Page Borders

Shows or hides the page borders in the form of a red rectangle. This
rectangle displays the borders of the paper format defined on the
Paper Size... menu. Using the print preview you can decide
whether and how the drawing is distributed among multiple sheets
when printing.
Show Grid
Shows a background grid in the active circuit window. The grid
settings can be made in the General tab under the Options...
menu item from the Tools menu.
Show Rulers
Shows or hides the rulers in the active circuit window.
Show Page Dividers

Shows or hides the page dividers in columns and rows. Cross-
references can refer to the column and row containing a symbol.
The position and number of the columns and rows can be interac-
tively defined via the page dividers shown.
Show Connector Descriptions
Shows or hides the connector descriptions. The Display option can
be selected in the properties dialog window for the connectors. This
option is only evaluated if “ Individual ” was selected.
Show Connector Descriptions / All

Shows all connector descriptions regardless of the settings at the
connectors.
Show Connector Descriptions / Individual

Shows only the connector descriptions for those connectors with
the Display option activated.
Show Connector Descriptions / None

Hides all connector descriptions regardless of the settings at the
connectors.
Show Terminal Directions

Shows or hides the direction arrows at the terminals. The tip of the
arrow points into the control cabinet here.
Show Terminal Directions / All

Shows all arrows regardless of the settings at the terminals.
Show Terminal Directions / Individual

Shows only the arrows for those terminals with the Show Direction
option activated.
Show Terminal Directions / None

Hides all arrows regardless of the settings at the terminals.
Display Contact Images
Shows or hides the contact images.
Drawing Layers...
Opens a Drawing Layers dialog window enabling you to set the
properties of the drawing layers.
18.8 Library
Add New Library...

Creates a new library.
Add Existing Library...

Opens the dialog window enabling you to select a saved library file
with the lib file suffix. The library saved in the file is added to the
library window.
Add Existing Symbol Folder...

Opens the dialog window for selecting an existing folder. The entire
contents of the selected folder, including all of the circuit symbols
and sub-folders contained therein are displayed as a library.
Close Current Library

Removes the active library from the list in the library window. The
library file is not deleted by this action and can be opened again
using the Library menu and the Add Existing Library... menu
item.
Rename Active Library...
Opens a dialog window for entering the name of the library. This
function is only available to libraries which the user has created.
For write-protected libraries the folder name is shown in the tab.
Sort Current Library Alphabetically

Sorts the contents of the active library alphabetically. This function
is only available to libraries which the user has created. Write-
protected libraries are automatically sorted and cannot be resorted
by the user.
18.9 Tools
Options...
Opens the dialog window with program settings, file paths and
language options.
Custom Product Databases...

Opens a dialog window for managing custom product databases.
Translation Tables...
Opens a dialog window for managing translation tables.
Restore Defaults...
Resets the program settings to the default values. This enables you
to undo unintentional settings made.
Note: Use this function if you feel that FluidSIM is behaving unex-
pectedly or files and windows have suddenly disappeared.
18.10 Window
New Window
Opens a window with an additional view of the active window.
Navigation Pane
Opens an overview window with a scaled-down view of the entire
circuit diagram. The currently visible area of the active window
appears as a white area. The non-visible area of the drawing is
shaded grey. By drawing a rectangle in the overview window with
the mouse pointer you can define the section of the circuit diagram
displayed in the active window. Simply left-clicking on the overview
window moves the visible area while retaining the zoom level.
Cascade
Arranges the windows so that they overlap.
Tile Horizontally
Arranges the windows into horizontal tiles.
Tile Vertically
Arranges the windows next to each other.
Close All
Closes all open windows.
18.11 Help
Contents
Displays the contents of the FluidSIM help pages.
Index
Displays the index of the FluidSIM help pages.
Search
Displays the search dialog for the FluidSIM help pages.
Check for updates...

As soon as there is an Internet connection you can use this menu
item to initiate the search for a new FluidSIM version.
About...
Displays the FluidSIM program information.
Functional diagram
Chapter 19
19. Functional diagra m
You can find the function diagram in the standard FluidSIM library.
You can apply the functions from the Edit menu to the function
diagram. Double-click the function diagram or open the Functional
diagram using the Properties... menu item on the Edit menu.
The buttons in the upper toolbar of the editor are for editing a
function diagram. The following six buttons determine the editing
mode:
Edit Mode
Draw diagram curves
Insert signal elements
Insert text boxes
Draw signal lines and insert signal connections
Insert additional signal lines
The selected mode is highlighted in white or displayed as a pressed

button. shows that signal lines can be drawn in the diagram
area by clicking, for example.
If you hover the mouse pointer over a button for a short period of
time then a short description is displayed.
Figure 19/1:
19.1 Edit Mode
This mode serves to adjust the objects in the function diagram.

Elements in the diagram can be moved. Changing the size of text
boxes is only possible in this mode.
Movement and dragging operations can be cancelled using the

Esc key.
If the mouse pointer is moved outside the window area while the
left mouse button is held down the view automatically scrolls.
Double-clicking on a diagram element (diagram row, text box,

signaling element, etc.) opens a dialog window in which you can
make the desired adjustments.
19.1.1 Set diagram properties
Clicking on the button opens a dialog window in

which you can set the diagram properties.
Figure 19/2:
Text columns – Number If the number of text columns is changed than all of the table text
boxes are distributed horizontally and evenly.
Text columns – Width If the width of the text columns is changed than all of the table text
boxes are distributed horizontally and evenly.
Diagram columns – Number The diagram columns are located on the right-hand side of the
function diagram. The diagram curves can be drawn in this area.
The number of diagram columns can also be changed by dragging
the mouse pointer to the right-hand edge of the diagram.
Diagram columns – Width
Color The color which the grid lines are drawn in the diagram area.
Row height Defines the row height of all of the rows.
19.1.2 Table textboxes
The table textboxes are located on the left-hand side of the function
diagram.
Figure 19/3:
Double-clicking on a table textbox opens the corresponding dialog

window.
Figure 19/4:
Font size The font size of the text to be shown.
Color A selection from sixteen standard colors for the text to be dis-
played.
Width The width of the selected table column can be changed by dragging
the mouse pointer.
Height The height of the selected table column can be changed by drag-
ging the mouse pointer.
Horizontal adjustment The following alignment options are available: “Left” “Center” and
“Right”.
Vertical adjustment The following alignment options are available: “Top”, “Center” and
“Bottom”
Alignment within a table cell If a text within a textbox should resemble a table then set a tab stop
between the text parts. The text is displayed in the textbox in ac-
cordance with the number of tab stops and the specified horizontal
and vertical alignment. To enter tab stops hold down the Ctrl
key.
Examples:
1.
2.
Insert text boxes
19.1.3 Adjust the presentation of the diagrams
The area in which curves can be drawn is located on the right-hand

side of a diagram row.
Figure 19/5:
Double-clocking on this area opens a corresponding window in

which you can define the appearance of the drawing area. Please
ensure that no diagram element, such as a signaling element, for
example, is underneath the mouse pointer.
Figure 19/6:
States – Number The entry defines the number of states and thus the number of
horizontal lines in the diagram row.
States – Base state Horizontal lines are drawn through the base state with a thin pencil.
Numbering – Start column The start column defines which column the numbering should
begin with.
Numbering – Start number The start number defines which number the numbering should
begin with.
Numbering – Number The number specified who many steps need to be numbered.
Numbering – Step width Defines the step width between two numbers.
Numbering – Loop If this field is selected then an equals sign and the start number are
always displayed after the last number.
Representation – Display If this field is selected then two arrows are displayed.
arrows
Representation – Display grid If this field is selected then the background grid is displayed.
Representation – Display text If this field is selected then a textbox is shown which can serve as a
1 label. This textbox belongs to the selected row and cannot be
moved to another row.
Representation – Display text If this field is selected then an additional textbox is shown which
2 can serve as a label. This textbox belongs to the selected row and
cannot be moved to another row.
Representation – Line color Sets the color of the diagram lines.
19.2 Draw diagram curve
In this mode diagram curves can be drawn. Supporting points

can only be inserted on the grid. A supporting point is drawn at
every left-click.
1. 2. 3. 4.
If you hold down the left mouse button then supporting points can
be moved as in the selection mode.
Selected supporting points are shown in grey. Use the Del key to
delete a selected symbol.
19.3 Insert signal elements
In this mode signaling elements can be inserted by left-clicking.
1. 2.
If you hold down the left mouse button then signaling elements can
be moved as in the selection mode.
Selected signaling elements are shown in grey. Use the Del key
to delete a selected signaling element.
Double-clicking on a signaling element in the selection mode opens

a dialog window in which you can modify how the signaling element
is shown.
Figure 19/7:
Signal type
Display description If this field is selected then a text is shown which can serve as a
label for the signaling element.
Color The signaling element is displayed in this color.
19.4 Insert text boxes
In this mode textboxes can be inserted by left-clicking.
1. 2. 3.
Selected textboxes are shown in grey. Use the Del key to delete
a selected textbox.
In “Edit Mode” the size and position of a textbox can be changed
using the mouse pointer.
Adjust size:
1. 2. 3.
Move textbox:
1. 2. 3.
Double-clicking on a textbox in the selection mode opens a dialog

window in which you can modify how the textbox is shown.
Figure 19/8:
Font size The font size of the text to be shown.
Color A selection from sixteen standard colors for the text to be dis-
played.
Frame If this field is selected then a frame is drawn around the textbox.
Width The width of the textbox.
Height The height of the textbox.
Horizontal adjustment The following alignment options are available: “Left”, “Center” and
“Right”.
Vertical adjustment The following alignment options are available: “Top”, “Center” and
“Bottom”
Table textboxes
19.5 Draw signal lines and insert signal connections
In this mode signal lines can be drawn freely or automatically

laid from signaling elements.
19.5.1 Free-draw signal lines
An additional supporting point is set with every left-click. The

process ends when you click the current line while holding down
the Ctrl key, press the Esc key or switch the editing mode. Use
the Del key to delete a selected signal line. If only a supporting
point is selected then only this is removed from the line.
In “Edit Mode” the supporting points belonging to the signal lines

can be moved. If the Shift is held down while setting or moving
supporting points then the supporting point is vertically or horizon-
tally aligned.
In the selection mode double-clicking can change the way the line
is displayed.
Figure 19/9:
Display description A framed label on the line and a label next to the framed label is
shown. The framed label can be moved freely along the line. The
additional label can be moved freely.
Start with arrow An arrow is displayed at the beginning of the line. The arrow can be
moved freely along the line.
End with arrow An arrow is displayed at the end of the line. The arrow can be
moved freely along the line.
Color Line color
If you click a finished signal line to activate the “Freely move signal
lines” mode then a signal logic is inserted. This logic point
(snap point) can then be freely moved along the line 1.
2. 3. + 4. .
In the selection mode you can change how the signal logic is dis-
played by double-clicking on it.
Figure 19/10:
19.5.2 Drawing signal lines from signals
In the “Freely draw signal lines” signal lines can be drawn from
signals. Left-click a signal and hold down the mouse button. Drag
the mouse pointer to a position which you have selected as the end
point of a signal line. The signal line will be drawn once you release
the mouse button.
1. 2. 3.
19.5.3 Draw signal lines from diagram support points
In the “Freely draw signal lines” mode signal lines can be

drawn from curve support points. Left-click a supporting point and
hold down the mouse button. Drag the mouse pointer to a second
supporting point. The signal line will be drawn once you have the
mouse pointer over the second supporting point and release the
mouse button.
1. 2. 3.
19.6 Insert additional signal lines
In the “Insert additional signal lines” mode additional support-

ing points can be inserted into existing signal lines.
1. 2. 3.
19.7 Insert row
Clicking on the “Insert row” button inserts a new diagram row

above the current selection. If no cell is market then a new row is
attached to the end of the diagram.
19.8 Delete row
Clicking on the “Delete row” button deletes a selected diagram

row. If nothing is selected then the function is not available.
19.9 Additional editing functions
19.9.1 Zoom
Using the button the view is reset to the standard zoom level.
Using the button increases the zoom level.
Using the button decreases the zoom level.
19.9.2 Undo editing steps
Using the button you can undo the last 50 editing steps.
Using the button you can redo the previously undone editing
steps.
The Component Library
Chapter 20
20. The Component Library
In FluidSIM each component in the component library is assigned a

physical model. Using these models, FluidSIM first creates a global
behavior model of the circuit which is then processed during simu-
lation.
This chapter provides for a short description of the components in

FluidSIM ’s component library. If the component has adjustable
parameters, their value ranges are given. A number in brackets
after the value range indicates the default setting for the parame-
ter.
20.1 Hydraulic Components
20.1.1 Service Components
Pump unit
The pump unit sup-plies a constant volumetric flow. The operating

pressure is limited by the internal pressure relief valve. The pump
unit has two tank connections.
Adjustable parameters
Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (6)
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (1450)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 5000 cm3 (1.6)
Internal leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.002)
Pump unit (simplified)
Simplified representation of the detailed pump unit. The compo-

nent does not have tank connections in the circuit diagram.
Delivery rate: 0 ... 500 l/min (2)
Maximum pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (6)
Internal leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0)
Fixed displacement pump
The fixed displacement pump delivers a constant volumetric flow

rate dependent upon the revolutions and the displacement volume.
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (1320)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 10000 cm3 (1.6)
Maximum pressure: 0.1 ... 40 MPa (6)
Variable displacement pump
The revolutions of the variable displacement pump can be changed

under operating conditions. The pump delivers a variable volumet-
ric flow rate dependent upon the variable revolutions and the
displacement volume.
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (1320)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 10000 cm3 (1.6)
Flow rate ratio: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Proportional pump
The revolutions of the variable displacement pump can be changed

proportionally from zero to maximum through a voltage signal
between 0 V and 10 V and the assistance of a proportional-
amplifier. The pump delivers a variable volumetric flow rate de-
pendent upon the variable revolutions and the displacement vol-
ume.
Mode of control: Displacement control, Speed control (Displace-
ment control)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 5000 cm3 (1.6)
Revolution (min): 0 ... 5000 1/min (0)
Revolution (max): 0 ... 5000 1/min (1320)
Flow rate ratio (min): 0 ... 1 (0)
Flow rate ratio (max): 0 ... 1 (1)
Hydraulic power pack with LS variable and constant displacement

pump combination
Vane pump with hydraulic load-sensing controller
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (910)
Displacement (Variable displacement pump): 0 ... 10000 cm3
(5.6044)
Opening pressure (Variable displacement pump): 0 ... 40 MPa (5)
Spring preload: 0.1 ... 10 MPa (1.17)
Displacement (Fixed displacement pump): 0 ... 10000 cm3
(4.5055)
Opening pressure (Fixed displacement pump): 0 ... 40 MPa (5)
Steering unit (Orbitrol)
The steering unit is used to steer vehicles that are equipped with
hydrostatic steering.
The steering unit consists of a proportional rotary valve, a pump

control valve and a dosing pump. The rotary valve is opened pro-
portional to torque (steering force) and direction of rotation. The
control edges of the proportional valve are arranged radially at
several levels on the rotary piston and the inside of the rotary valve
housing. A spring package assures a spring centred, closed mid-
position.
External torque: -10 ... 10 N.m (0)
Displacement: 0 ... 10000 cm3 (32)
Hydraulic resistance: 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.1)
Steering unit (Orbitrol)
The steering unit is used to steer vehicles that are equipped with
hydrostatic steering.
The steering unit consists of a proportional rotary valve, a pump

control valve and a dosing pump. The rotary valve is opened pro-
portional to torque (steering force) and direction of rotation. The
control edges of the proportional valve are arranged radially at
several levels on the rotary piston and the inside of the rotary valve
housing. A spring package assures a spring centred, closed mid-
position.
Displacement: 0 ... 10000 cm3 (32)
Tank
The tank is integrated into the pump unit and has a pressure of 0
MPa. It can be inserted into the circuit diagram as an independent
component.
Hose with quick-action coupling
The hose is available in 3 lengths: 600 mm, 1500 mm, and 3000
mm. The pressure loss in a hose is taken into account by specifying
a hydraulic resistance. In FluidSIM no pressure loss is simulated
with simple connections between two components.
Hydraulic reservoir
The reservoir enables the performance of a hydraulic system to be

optimized. For example, it can be utilized as an energy reservoir
and for the absorbance of pressure surges or flow fluctuations.
Reservoirs are capable of absorbing a defined volume of fluid under
pressure and releasing it again with minimal losses. The construc-
tion consists essentially of a pressure resistant container, generally
a gas charge of nitrogen and a separator e.g. a piston, a membrane
or a bubble elastomer. Hydraulic fluid only starts to flow into the
reservoir when the fluid pressure is greater than the gas-preload
pressure.
Volume: 0.01 ... 100 l (0.32)
Pre-load pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (1)
Polytropic exponent: 0.5 ... 3 (1.4)
Hydraulic reservoir
The reservoir enables the performance of a hydraulic system to be

optimized. For example, it can be utilized as an energy reservoir
and for the absorbance of pressure surges or flow fluctuations.
Reservoirs are capable of absorbing a defined volume of fluid under
pressure and releasing it again with minimal losses. The construc-
tion consists essentially of a pressure resistant container, generally
a gas charge of nitrogen and a separator e.g. a piston, a membrane
or a bubble elastomer. Hydraulic fluid only starts to flow into the
reservoir when the fluid pressure is greater than the gas-preload
pressure.
Volume: 0.01 ... 100 l (0.32)
Polytropic exponent: 0.5 ... 3 (1.4)
Diaphragm accumulator with shutoff block
Stores the pressure and is equipped with a pressure relief valve to

prevent overpressure.
Volume: 0.01 ... 100 l (0.32)
Filter
The filter limits the contamination of the fluid respecting a certain

tolerance value in order to reduce the risk of damage at the com-
ponents.
Cooler
An unacceptable fall in the hydraulic fluid’s viscosity can be avoid-

ed through the use of a cooler.
Heater
The hydraulic fluid’s optimal viscosity can be reached quickly

through the use of a heater.
Connection (hydraulic)
A hydraulic connection is a place where a hydraulic line can be

attached to. To simplify the line drawing process, a connection
appears as a small circle in Edit Mode. Hydraulic connections can
be shut by means of a blind plug. An open hydraulic connection
may result in leaking oil; FluidSIM-H thus pops up a warning mes-
sage, if some hydraulic connection was left open. Note that at each
hydraulic connection values for the flow and pressure can be dis-
played.
Line (hydraulic)
A hydraulic line links two hydraulic connections. Note that a hy-

draulic connection may be a simple hydraulic connection or a T-
junction. A hydraulic line causes no pressure drop, i. e., it has no
fluidic resistance. From a drawing point of view, FluidSIM distin-
guishes between control lines and main lines. The former is repre-
sented by a dashed line, the latter is represented by a solid line and
establishes the default case.
T-junction (hydraulic)
A T-junction joins up to four hydraulic lines, thus having a single

pressure potential. Note that T-junctions are introduced automati-
cally by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto
another line in Edit Mode.
20.1.2 Configurable Way Valves
Configurable 2/n way valve
The configurable 2/n way valve is a way valve with two connec-
tions, where both its body elements and its operation modes are
user-definable.
Additionally, the hydraulic connections can be closed with blind

plug.
Desired position: 0 ... 4 (0)
Positioning time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.02)
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum voltage: 0.1 ... 300 V (20)
Electrically left at U_min: 0.01 ... 100 N (70)
Electrically right at U_min: 0.01 ... 100 N (70)
Mechanically left: 0.01 ... 100 N (100)
Mechanically right: 0.01 ... 100 N (100)
Physical spring force: 0.01 ... 100 N (30)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Min. pilot control force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Pilot control left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Pilot control right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
The configurable 3/n way valve is a way valve with three connec-
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
20.1.3 Mechanically Actuated Directional Valves
2/2-way stem-Actuated valve (i)
If the cylinder piston actuates the stem, flow is enabled from P to A.
This valve is derived from a configurable 2/n way valve. You find
this valve in the component library “Frequently used Way Valves”,
under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
2/2-way stem-Actuated valve (ii)
If the cylinder piston actuate the stem, the flow from P to A is shut
off. This valve is derived from a configurable 2/n way valve. You
find this valve in the component library “Frequently used Way
Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
3/2-way hand-lever valve
In normal position the connection P is closed and A to T opened.

When manually actuated T is shut off and P to A opened. This valve
is derived from a configurable 3/n way valve. You find this valve in
the component library “Frequently used Way Valves”, under the
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/2-way hand-lever valve (i)
In normal position the connection P is open to B and A to T. When

manually actuated the valve is set to parallel position. This valve is
derived from a configurable 4/n way valve. You find this valve in
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/2-way hand-lever valve (ii)
In normal position the connection P is open to A and B to T. When

manually actuated the valve is set to crossover position. This valve
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way hand-lever valve with shutoff position (i)
In normal position all connections are closed. When manually

actuated the valve is set to parallel or crossover position. This
valve is derived from a configurable 4/n way valve. You find this
valve in the component library “Frequently used Way Valves”,
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way hand-lever valve with shutoff position (ii)
In normal position all connections are closed. When manually

actuated the valve is set to crossover or parallel position. This
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way hand-lever valve with floating position (i)
In normal position the connections A and B are open to T. When

manually actuated the valve is set to parallel or crossover position.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way hand-lever valve with floating position (ii)

manually actuated the valve is set to crossover or parallel position.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way hand-lever valve with bypass position (i)
In normal position the connections A and B are closed and P to T

opened. When manually actuated the valve is set to parallel or
crossover position. This valve is derived from a configurable 4/n
way valve. You find this valve in the component library “Frequently
used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way hand-lever valve with bypass position (ii)

opened. When manually actuated the valve is set to crossover or
parallel position. This valve is derived from a configurable 4/n way
valve. You find this valve in the component library “Frequently used
Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
20.1.4 Solenoid-actuated Directional Valves
4/2-way solenoid valve (i)
In normal position the connection P is open to B and A to T. When

actuated by the control solenoid, the valve is set to parallel posi-
tion. If no current is flowing through the control solenoid, the valve
can be manually actuated. This valve is derived from a configurable
4/n way valve. You find this valve in the component library “Fre-
quently used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/2-way solenoid valve (ii)
In normal position the connection P is open to A and B to T. When

actuated by the control solenoid, the valve is set to crossover
position. If no current is flowing through the control solenoid, the
valve can be manually actuated. This valve is derived from a con-
figurable 4/n way valve. You find this valve in the component
library “Frequently used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way solenoid valve with shutoff position (i)
In normal position all connections are closed. When actuated by the

control solenoids, the valve is set to parallel or crossover position.
If no current is flowing through the control solenoids, the valve can
be manually actuated. This valve is derived from a configurable 4/n
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way solenoid valve with shutoff position (ii)
In normal position all connections are closed. When actuated by the

control solenoids, the valve is set to crossover or parallel position.
If no current is flowing through the control solenoids, the valve can
be manually actuated. This valve is derived from a configurable 4/n
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way solenoid valve with floating position (i)

actuated by the control solenoids, the valve is set to parallel or
crossover position. If no current is flowing through the control
solenoids, the valve can be manually actuated. This valve is derived
from a configurable 4/n way valve. You find this valve in the com-
ponent library “Frequently used Way Valves”, under the Library
menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way solenoid valve with floating position (ii)

actuated by the control solenoids, the valve is set to crossover or
parallel position. If no current is flowing through the control sole-
noids, the valve can be manually actuated. This valve is derived
from a configurable 4/n way valve. You find this valve in the com-
ponent library “Frequently used Way Valves”, under the Library
menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way solenoid valve with bypass position (i)

opened. When actuated by the control solenoids, the valve is set to
parallel or crossover position. If no current is flowing through the
control solenoids, the valve can be manually actuated. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
4/3-way solenoid valve with bypass position (ii)

opened. When actuated by the control solenoids, the valve is set to
crossover or parallel position. If no current is flowing through the
control solenoids, the valve can be manually actuated. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
20.1.5 Shutoff Valves
Shutoff valve
The shutoff valve can be manually opened or closed. The hydraulic

resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Check valve
If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B,

then the check valve allows the flow to pass, otherwise it blocks the
flow.
Check valve, spring loaded
If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B and

the nominal pressure, then the check valve allows the flow to pass,
otherwise it blocks the flow.
Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0.6)
Pressure regulation range: 0.01 ... 10 MPa (0.864)
Check valve with pilot control
If the input pressure is higher than the output pressure, the check
valve opens. Otherwise it is shut. In addition, the check valve can
be opened via a control line, allowing flow in both directions.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Check valve with pilot control, spring loaded
If the input pressure is higher than the output and nominal pres-
sure, the check valve opens. Otherwise it is shut. In addition, the
check valve can be opened via a control line, allowing flow in both
directions.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Double non-return valve, delockable
The valve is made up of two delockable non-return valves.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Double non-return valve, delockable
The valve is made up of two delockable non-return valves.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Pilot to close check valve
If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B,

then the check valve allows the flow to pass, otherwise it blocks the
flow. Additionally, the check valve can be closed using the pilot line
X.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Pilot to close check valve, spring loaded
If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B and

otherwise it blocks the flow. Additionally, the check valve can be
closed using the pilot line X.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Shuttle valve
If one of the two input pressures is larger than zero, the shuttle
valve opens (OR function) and the higher input pressure becomes
the output pressure.
Two-pressure valve
If both input pressures are larger than zero, the two-pressure valve
opens (AND function) and the higher input pressure becomes the
output pressure.
20.1.6 Pressure Control Valves
Pressure relief valve
In normal position the valve is closed. If the opening pressure is

reached at P, T opens. When the pressure drops below the preset
level, the valve closes again. The flow direction is indicated by the
arrow. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened
valve.
Pressure relief valve
The valve restricts the pressure at port P to the set value compared
with the pressure at T.
If the differential pressure (dp=pP-pT) times the cross-sectional

area of the sealing cone exceeds the spring force, the sealing cone
lifts out of the seat and allows oil through to port T. The valve
closes again once the pressure in port P drops again. The cushion-
ing piston acts like a shock absorber to increase stability during the
control response. The spring pretension can be adjusted at the
handwheel. Oil flows through the non-return valve if the pressure at
port T is greater than at P.
Hydraulic resistance (Pressure relief valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.08)
Hydraulic resistance (Non-return valve): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2
(0.06)
Pressure regulator, balanced
The valve restricts the pressure at port P to the set value compared
with the pressure at T.
If the hydraulic force at the sealing cone exceeds the spring force,
the sealing cone lifts out of the seat and allows oil to flow to port T.
The valve closes again once the pressure in port P drops again. The
cushioning piston acts like a shock absorber to increase stability.
The spring pretension can be adjusted at the hand wheel. Oil flows
through the non-return valve when the pressure at port T is greater
than at P. Since the spring chamber is separated from the oil by the
stem, the pressure in T has no effect on the limiting pressure.
Nominal pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
Hydraulic resistance (Pressure relief valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.09)
(0.7)
Counterbalance valve
The valve limits pressure at port P vis-à-vis pressure applied to T to

the selected value.
Pressure regulation range: 0.01 ... 10 MPa (1)
Hydraulic resistance (Pressure control valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.1)
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3)
(0.1)
Pressure sequence valve
The valve connects port P and port T if the pressure at port X is

greater than the total of the spring force and pressure in port T.
Shutoff/counteracting valve
If the opening pressure is reached at the control line connection,

the valve opens from P to T. The hydraulic resistance relates to the
completely opened valve.
Priority valve Load Sensing, dynamic
The priority valve assures that priority is given to outlet CF as

opposed to outlet EF.
Spring preload: 0 ... 40 MPa (0.8)
Hydraulic resistance (P-CF): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.9)
Hydraulic resistance (P-EF): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.9)
Hydraulic resistance (CF): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (10)
Hydraulic resistance (LS-EF): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (1450)
Pressure relief valve with pilot control
In normal position the valve is closed. If the opening pressure is

reached at P, T opens. When the pressure drops below the preset
level, the valve closes again. In simple terms, the pilot pressure is
generated by the input pressure. The flow direction is indicated by
the arrow. The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a
pilot stage and a main stage. When open, there is less volumetric
flow at the pilot stage that leads internally to connection T. The
hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
Pressure relief valve with pilot control
The valve is closed in the idle position. The hydraulic fluid drains off
at T, when the pressure difference at the connections P and T
exceeds the nominal pressure. If the pressure falls below the preset
value, the valve closes again. The flow direction is marked with an
arrow. The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a pilot
stage and a main stage. When open, there is less volumetric flow at
the pilot stage that leads to connection Y. The hydraulic resistance
relates to the completely opened valve.
Shut-off-/counterbalancing valve
The valve connects port P with port T if the pressure set at control
port X is exceeded.
The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
2-way pressure reducing valve
The pressure regulator valve regulates the pressure at connection A

to the preset operating pressure and equalizes the pressure fluctu-
ations. The valve closes when the pressure at connection A exceeds
the operating pressure. The setting of the real components is
component dependent and cannot be changed. The hydraulic
resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
2-way pressure reducing valve, adjustable
The pressure regulator valve regulates the pressure at connection A

to the preset operating pressure and equalizes the pressure fluctu-
ations. The valve closes when the pressure at connection A exceeds
the operating pressure.
3-way pressure reducing valve
The pressure reducing valve maintains a constant output pressure

despite fluctuating input pressure. The hydraulic fluid is drained off
at T when the pressure at connection A exceeds the operating
pressure. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely
opened valve.
Pressure compensator, upstream
The pressure compensator maintains the differential pressure

between port A und port X.
If, for example, a throttle point is located between A and X, pres-

sure is held constant over the throttle point. This corresponds to
the function of a 2-way flow control valve.
Pressure compensator, upstream
The pressure compensator maintains the differential pressure

between port A und port X.
If, for example, a throttle point is located between A and X, pres-

sure is held constant over the throttle point. This corresponds to
the function of a 2-way flow control valve.
Pressure compensator, downstream
The valve is used as a downstream pressure compensator for flow

control in combination with a pump controlled by means of load
sensing (variable volume LS pump).
Pressure compensator, downstream
The valve is used as a downstream pressure compensator for flow

control in combination with a pump controlled by means of load
sensing (variable volume LS pump).
Pressure compensator for open centre load sensing
P -> T, pX = 0 MPa: Pressure at P pushes the piston against the

spring. As of adjusted pressure, the valve opens: P -> T. P -> T, pX > 0
MPa: Pressure at X is added to spring force. The valve opens as
soon as opening pressure plus spring pressure is greater than pX.
Pressure compensator for open centre load sensing
P -> T, pX = 0 MPa: Pressure at P pushes the piston against the

spring. As of adjusted pressure, the valve opens: P -> T. P -> T, pX > 0
MPa: Pressure at X is added to spring force. The valve opens as
soon as opening pressure is greater than pX.
Pilot valves, 2x2-channel
2-channel hydraulic pilot control is used. Each channel consists of

two pressure regulators. Depending on direction, the hand lever
actuates one of the two pressure regulators via a rocker. Pressure
is then regulated at the respective pilot port proportional to deflec-
tion.
Maximum pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (1.5)
Displacement (Left group): -100 ... 100 % (0)
Displacement (Right group): -100 ... 100 % (0)
Shock and anti-cavitation valve
The valve limits pressure from port A or B vis-à-vis pressure applied

to T to the selected value.
Opening pressure (Left group): 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
Pressure regulation range (Left group): 0.01 ... 10 MPa (3.8)
Hydraulic resistance (Left group): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.08)
Opening pressure (Right group): 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
Pressure regulation range (Right group): 0.01 ... 10 MPa (3.8)
Hydraulic resistance (Right group): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2
(0.08)
Closing pressure compensator
The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent hy-

draulic resistance. The pressure compensator closes when the
pressure difference X-Y exceeds the nominal pressure. A pressure
regulating valve is implemented by the combination of connections
A and X. The pressure balance is also a component of 2-way flow
control valves. The nominal pressure setting of the real compo-
nents is component dependent and cannot be changed. The hy-
draulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
Closing pressure compensator, adjustable

draulic resistance. The pressure compensator closes when the
regulating valve is implemented by the combination of the connec-
tions A and X. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely
opened valve.
Opening pressure compensator

draulic resistance. The pressure compensator opens when the
relief valve is implemented by the combination of connections P
and X. The pressure balance is also a component of 3-way flow
control valves. The nominal pressure setting of the real compo-
nents is component dependent and cannot be changed. The hy-
draulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
Opening pressure compensator, adjustable

draulic resistance. The pressure compensator opens when the
relief valve is implemented by the combination of connections P
and X. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened
valve.
Opening cartridge valve
The 2/2-way cartridge valve is a 2/2-way valve. It is fitted with two

working ports and the two switch positions “closed” and “open”.
Whether or not the cartridge valve is open or closed depends on
the effective areas A, B and X, the adjacent pressures pA, pB and
pX, as well as the spring force. A+B=X is valid. If pA*A + pB*B >
pX*X + F, then the valve opens, otherwise it is closed. The valve
therefore operates purely pressure dependent and can, with the
appropriate control, assume directional-, flow- and pressure func-
tions. The spring force is specified by means of the nominal pres-
sure. This is the minimum pressure, with pressureless connections
at B and X, necessary at connection A to open the valve. Whether
the valve has one (A=B) or two (A <> B) effective areas can be speci-
fied in the properties window. The relevant symbol is automatically
depicted. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened
valve.
Area A: 0.1 ... 100 cm2 (6)
Area B: 0.1 ... 100 cm2 (3)
Closing cartridge valve
The 2/2-way cartridge valve is a 2/2-way valve. It is fitted with two

working ports and the two switch positions “closed” and “open”.
Whether or not the cartridge valve is open or closed depends on
the effective areas A and X, the adjacent pressures pA, and pX, as
well as the spring force. A=X is valid. If pA*A > pX*X + F, then the
valve closes, otherwise it is open. The valve therefore operates
purely pressure dependent and can, with the appropriate control,
assume directional-, flow- and pressure functions. The spring force
is specified by means of the nominal pressure. This is the minimum
pressure, with pressureless connections at B and X, necessary at
connection A to open the valve. The hydraulic resistance relates to
the completely opened valve.
Area: 0.1 ... 100 cm2 (6)
20.1.7 Pressure Switches
Analog pressure sensor
The pressure switch takes the pressure and actuates the associat-
ed electrical pressure switch if the preset switching pressure is
exceeded.
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 40 MPa (3)
Hysteresis: 0 ... 10 MPa (0)
20.1.8 Flow Control Valves
Nozzle
The nozzle represents a hydraulic resistance.
Throttle valve
The setting of the throttle valve is set by means of a rotary knob.

Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute resistance value
can be set. This means that, in reality, different throttle valves can
generate different resistance values despite identical settings.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Orifice
The orifice represents a hydraulic resistance.
Orifice, adjustable
The orifice represents a variable hydraulic resistance.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
One-way flow control valve
The setting of the One-way flow control valve is set by means of a

rotary knob. A check valve (see check valve) is located parallel to
the throttle valve. Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute
resistance value can be set. This means that, in reality, different
throttle valves can generate different resistance values despite
identical settings.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Hydraulic resistance (Flow control valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.07)
(0.05)
2-way flow control valve
If the pressure is sufficient, the preset flow is maintained to a

constant level in the direction of the arrow. The hydraulic resistance
Nominal flow: 0 ... 500 l/min (1)
If the pressure is sufficient, the preset flow is maintained to a

constant level in the direction of the arrow. The hydraulic resistance
Hydraulic resistance (Flow control valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.4)
(0.08)
With sufficient pressure, the preset flow rate is kept constant in the
direction of the arrow. The surplus hydraulic fluid is drained at
connection T using a pressure compensator. The inlet pressure pA
is load dependent, i.e it changes with the outlet pressure pB. There-
fore a parallel circuit of several 3-way flow control valves is not
possible. In this case, the inlet pressures would be defined by the
valve with the lowest inlet pressure. Compared to the 2-way flow
control valve, the 3-way flow control valve is admittedly more
efficient in its energy consumption. The hydraulic resistance relates
to the completely closed pressure compensator.
Flow divider valve
The flow divider valve divides the flow from P into two equal flows
at A and B. This is achieved using two measuring orifices and two
variable control resistors. The control resistors are unified in a
pressure compensator. The hydraulic resistance relates to the
resistance of the individual measuring orifices and control resis-
tors.
Hydraulic resistance (Pressure compensator): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.375)
Hydraulic resistance (Metering orifice): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2
(0.537)
Flush valve with pressure relief valve
If differential pressure exceeds the required force for the spring, the
valve opens from B to the pressure-relief valve.
The pressure-relief valve assures that pressure on the suction side

does not drop to below the required minimum pressure for the
pump.
Hydraulic resistance (Directional valve): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2
(0.08)
Hydraulic resistance (Pressure control valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.08)
20.1.9 Continuous valves
4/3-way regulating valve
The regulating valve transforms an analog electrical input signal

into corresponding opening cross-sections at the outputs. The
setpoint signal must be within the range -10 V to +10 V. At 0 V the
hydraulic mid-position is adopted and the valve stops the flow (in
relation to the null overlap). The cross section area of the flow
opening widens with increasing slide distance. How far the area,
and with it the flow at the valve, changes depends on the shape
and form of the control notches. A triangular shaped notch results
in a progressive flow behavior, a rectangular shaped notch in a
linear flow behavior. The hydraulic resistance relates to a complete-
ly opened leading edge and the internal leakage relates to one
leading edge as appropriate. The overlap of the leading edges can
be specified relative to the maximal slide distance. By the use of an
integrated electronic position controller for the slide distance,
beneficial static and dynamic characteristics are achieved that are
manifested in a minimal hysteresis (less than 0,2 %) and a re-
sponse time of less than 12 ms at a signal change of 0 - 100
Control notch shape: Rectangular, Triangular (Rectangular)
Relative spool overlap: -50 ... 50 % (0)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.00026)
4/3-way proportional valve
By use of a twin-channel proportional amplifier, the proportional

valve transforms an analog electrical input signal into correspond-
ing opening cross-sections at the outputs. The setpoint signal must
be within the range -10 V to +10 V. At 0 V the hydraulic mid-position
is adopted and the valve stops the flow (in relation to the null
overlap). The cross section area of the flow opening widens by
increasing slide distance. How far the area, and with it the flow at
the valve, changes depends on the shape and form of the control
notches. A triangular shaped notch results in a progressive flow
behavior, a rectangular shaped notch in a linear flow behavior. The
hydraulic resistance relates to a completely opened leading edge
and the internal leakage relates to one leading edge as appropri-
ate. The overlap of the leading edges can be specified relative to
the maximal slide distance.
Control notch shape: Rectangular, Triangular (Triangular)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.001)
Proportional throttle valve
In order to alter the flow rate through the valve, the cross section of
the throttle valve is electrically manipulated with the assistance of
a proportional amplifier. The control voltage must be between 0 V
and 10 V. The deflection of the slide is proportional to the applied
voltage. At 0 V the valve is completely closed (in relation to the null
overlap). The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened
valve. The overlap of the leading edges can be specified relative to
the maximal slide distance.
Control notch shape: Rectangular, Triangular (Triangular)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0)
Proportional pressure relief valve
The proportional pressure relief valve, with the assistance of a

proportional amplifier, is a continuous, electrically adjustable
pressure relief valve. The control piston has two adjacent areas
exposed to pressure. The first area is exposed to the pressure at
connection P, the other to connection T. If the magnet is not sup-
plied with electricity, then the piston is fully retracted and the
complete passage from connection P to connection T is free. The
proportional magnet creates a force proportional to its magnetic
current, which moves the control piston according to the balance of
the adjacent forces (magnetic force, spring force and pressures).
The control voltage must be in the range 0 V to 10 V. The minimum
nominal pressure defines the opening pressure through the spring
force at 0 V. The maximum nominal pressure defines the opening
pressure at 10 V. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely
opened main stage leading edge.
Min. Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0)
Max. Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (10)
Proportional pressure relief valve, piloted
The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a pilot stage

with poppet valve and a main stage with control slide valve. The
pressure at connection P acts upon the pilot poppet via a drilling in
the control slide valve. If the force of the proportional magnet is
greater than the pressure exercised at connection P, then the pilot
stage remains closed. A spring keeps the main stage poppet valve
closed and the flow rate is null. If the force, that the pressure exer-
cises, exceeds the closing force of the pilot poppet, then this
opens. A lower flow rate develops from connection P to connection
Y. The flow of fluid causes a pressure loss at the throttle valve
inside the control slide valve. Thus the pressure at the spring side
is lower than the pressure at connection P. Due to the pressure
difference, the control slide valve opens so far until the spring force
re-establishes an equilibrium of forces and the valve is perfused
from P to T. The control voltage must be between 0 V and 10 V. The
minimum nominal pressure defines the opening pressure at the
pilot stage via the spring force at 0 V. The maximum nominal pres-
sure defines the opening pressure at 10 V. The hydraulic resistance
relates to the completely opened main stage leading edge.
Min. Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0)
Max. Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (10)
Proportional pressure reducing valve, piloted
The pilot operated proportional pressure regulator valve consists of

a pilot stage with poppet valve and a main stage with control slide
valve. The pressure at connection A acts upon the pilot poppet via a
drilling in the control slide valve. The proportional magnet exercises
the electrically adjustable counter force with the assistance of a
proportional amplifier. If the pressure at connection A is below the
preset value, then the pilot control remains closed. The pressure on
both sides of the control slide valve is equal. A spring holds the
main stage control slide valve open and the hydraulic fluid flow
freely from connection P to connection A. If the pressure at connec-
tion A exceeds the preset value, then the pilot stage opens causing
less volumetric flow to flow to connection A. The pressure falls at
the throttle valve inside the control slide valve. Thus the pressure
at the spring side is lower than the pressure at connection A. Due to
the pressure difference, the control slide valve closes so far until
the spring force re-establishes an equilibrium of forces. As a result,
the flow resistance at the control edge between connections P and
A increases and the pressure at connection A sinks. The control
voltage must be between 0 V and 10 V. The minimum nominal
pressure defines the opening pressure at the pre stage via the
spring force at 0 V. The maximum nominal pressure defines the
opening pressure at 10 V. The hydraulic resistance relates to the
completely opened main stage leading edge.
Min. Nominal pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0)
Max. Nominal pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
6/3-way proportional hand lever valve
The valve is used to control volumetric flow. Flow rate and direction
of flow are controlled. The mid-position is spring centred. The
piston is pushed out of its mid-position and against the spring with
the hand lever.
Displacement: -100 ... 100 % (0)
Hydraulic resistance (P1->T1): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.045)
Hydraulic resistance (P2->A,B): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.051)
Hydraulic resistance (T2->A,B): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.0362)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (5E-06)
Mobile valve block, Load sensing
The valve block has two slices, each with a proportional directional
control valve for controlling speed and direction. The directional
control valve in each slice has an upstream pressure compensator.
As a result, the slice functions like a proportional current regulator.
Displacement (Left group): -100 ... 100 % (0)
Displacement (Right group): -100 ... 100 % (0)
20.1.10 Actuators
Configurable cylinder
The configurable cylinder can be customized via its properties

dialog. Almost any combination of piston type (single-acting, dou-
ble-acting), the specification of the piston rods (double ended, with
magnetic coupling or slide) and the number (none, one, two) is
possible. An end position cushioning (without, with, adjustable)
can also be defined. FluidSIM automatically adjusts the symbol
according to the preset configuration. In addition, a load to be
moved (including possible static and sliding friction) and a variable
force profile can be defined in the properties dialog. In the compo-
nent library from FluidSIM there are several pre-configured cylin-
ders that can be inserted in your circuit and directly used. Should
no suitable symbol be available, then simply choose the compo-
nent with the most similarity to the required component, open the
properties dialog and adjust the configuration accordingly.
Piston diameter: 1 ... 1000 mm (16)
Piston rod diameter: 0 ... 1000 mm (10)
Piston Position: 0 ... 5000 mm (0)
Maximum stroke: 1 ... 5000 mm (200)
Mounting angle: 0 ... 360 deg (0)
Parameter input: Calculate automatically, Enter manually (Calcu-
late automatically)
Break-away force: 0 ... 10000 N (65)
Coulomb friction force: 0 ... 10000 N (55)
Viscous friction: 0.1 ... 10000 N.s/m (215)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Spring pressure at x=0: 0 ... 40 MPa (0.4)
Spring pressure at x=x_max: 0 ... 40 MPa (1)
Damping length: 0 ... 100 mm (10)
Double acting cylinder
Double acting cylinder with piston rod on one side. The piston of
the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid which can be used to
operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Double acting cylinder with shock adsorber at stroke end
The piston of the cylinder is controlled by the connected pressure

loads. The shock adsorber can be adjusted by means of two ad-
justment screws. The piston contains a permanent solenoid which
can be used to operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Double acting cylinder with in and out piston rod and shock
adsorber at stroke end
The piston of the cylinder is controlled by the connected pressure

loads. The shock adsorber can be adjusted by means of two ad-
justment screws. The piston of the cylinder contains a permanent
solenoid which can be used to operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Single acting cylinder
By connecting a sufficiently high pressure load, the piston of the

cylinder is extended to its stop. To move the piston back, an exter-
nal force must be applied.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Loading unit/cylinder load simulator
Two cylinders are positioned opposite each other. Various cylinder

types and loads can be combined using the four piston surfaces.
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.6)
Loading unit/cylinder load simulator
Two cylinders are positioned opposite each other. Various cylinder

types and loads can be combined using the four piston surfaces.
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.6)
Hydraulic motor
The hydraulic motor transforms hydraulic energy into mechanical

energy.
Displacement: 0.001 ... 5 l (0.008)
Friction: 0.001 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.0108)
Moment of inertia: 0.0001 ... 10 kg.m2 (0.0001)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.0126)
Semi-rotary actuator
The semi-rotary actuator is controlled by alternately switching the

pressure. In the end positions the swivel cylinder can activate
switches or valves via labels.
Initial Position: 0 ... 360 deg (0)
Rotation angle (max): 1 ... 360 deg (180)
Displacement: 0.01 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Friction: 0.01 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.1)
Moment of inertia: 1e-005 ... 1 kg.m2 (0.0001)
20.1.11 Measuring Devices
Manometer
The manometer measures the pressure at its connection.
Differential pressure gauge
The differential pressure gauge displays the pressure difference

between the adjacent pressures at the left and the right connection.
Pressure indicator
An optical signal is activated when the pressure at the connection

to the pressure display exceeds the preset switching pressure.
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 40 MPa (3)
Pressure sensor, analog
This symbol represents the hydraulic part of the analog pressure

sensor. The analog pressure sensor measures the adjacent pres-
sure and transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal.
In the process, only pressures in the specified pressure ranges are
considered. Within this range, the pressure in the voltage range
from 0 V to 10 V is represented, i.e. the minimum pressure delivers
0 V and the maximum pressure 10 V.
Minimum pressure: -40 ... 40 MPa (0)
Maximum pressure: -40 ... 40 MPa (10)
Voltage at p1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at p2: -100 ... 100 V (10)
Flow meter
The flow meter measures the flow rate. Either the current flow or
the total quantity flowed can be displayed. The component image is
automatically adjusted accordingly.
Flow meter
The flow meter consists of a hydraulic motor connected to an RPM

gauge.
Displacement: 0.1 ... 5000 cm3 (8.2)
Friction: 0.001 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.0108)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.0126)
Flow Direction: Ignore, Consider (Ignore)
Flow rate (min): -500 ... 500 l/min (0)
Flow rate (max): -500 ... 500 l/min (10)
Voltage (q1): -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage (q2): -100 ... 100 V (10)
Flow meter, analog
This symbol represents the hydraulic part of the analog flow meter.
The analog flow meter measures the volumetric flow and trans-
forms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal. In the process,
only flow rates in the specified pressure ranges are considered.
Within this range, the flow rate in the voltage range from 0 V to 10 V
is represented, i.e. the minimum volumetric flow delivers 0 V and
the maximum volumetric flow 10 V.
Voltage (q1): -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage (q2): -100 ... 100 V (10)
20.2 Pneumatic Components
20.2.1 Supply Elements
Compressed air supply
The compressed air supply provides the needed compressed air. It

contains a pressure control valve that can be adjusted to output the
desired operating pressure.
Operating pressure: 0 ... 2 MPa (0.6)
Max. flow rate: 0 ... 5000 l/min (1000)
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Compressor
The compressor provides the necessary compressed air. The pres-

sure is restricted to the preset operating pressure.
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Compressor, adjustable
The adjustable compressor provides the necessary compressed air,

whereby the maximum flow rate can be adjusted under actual
operating conditions and in the simulation. The pressure is restrict-
ed to the preset operating pressure.
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Air service unit, simplified representation
The service unit is made up of a compressed air filter with water

separator and a pressure control valve.
Nominal pressure: 0 ... 2 MPa (0.4)
Standard nominal flow rate (Pressure regulator): 0.1 ... 5000
l/min (300)
Standard nominal flow rate (Filter): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (1000)
Air service unit
The service unit is made up of a compressed air filter with water

separator and a pressure control valve.
Standard nominal flow rate (Pressure regulator): 0.1 ... 5000
l/min (300)
Standard nominal flow rate (Filter): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (1000)
Start-up valve with filter control valve
The filter with water separator cleans the compressed air of dirt,
pipe scale, rust and condensate. The pressure regulator adjusts the
compressed air supplied to the set operating pressure and com-
pensates for pressure fluctuations. The pressure gauge shows the
preset pressure. The on/off valve exhausts the entire control.
Manifold
The manifold enables a control system to be supplied with com-

pressed air eight individual connections.
Air pressure reservoir
The air pressure reservoir serves as compensation for pressure

fluctuations and is utilized (as a reservoir) for abruptly occurring air
consumption. Large time delays can be attained when used in
conjunction with time delay- and throttle valves.
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (1)
Air pressure reservoir (2 Connections)
The air pressure reservoir serves as compensation for pressure

fluctuations and is utilized (as a reservoir) for abruptly occurring air
consumption. Large time delays can be attained when used in
conjunction with time delay- und throttle valves.
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (1)
Filter
The compressed air filter removes contamination from the com-

pressed air. The size of the filterable particles is dependent upon
the filter class.
Standard nominal flow rate: 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (1000)
Filter, manual condensate drain

the filter class. Condensation, which can occur through sinking
temperatures or the expansion of the compressed air, can be man-
ually drained off.
Filter, automatic condensate drain

the filter class. Condensation, which can occur through sinking
temperatures or the expansion of the compressed air, is automati-
cally drained off.
Water separator
The water separator drains off accrued water.
Water separator, automatic condensate drain
The water separator drains off accrued water and is automatically

emptied.
Lubricator
The lubricator enriches the compressed air with oil.
Cooler
The cooler cools the compressed air.
Adsorption dryer
The adsorption dryer reduces the humidity in the compressed air.
Connection (pneumatic)
A pneumatic connection is a place where a pneumatic line can be

attached to. To simplify the line drawing process, a connection
appears as a small circle in Edit Mode. Pneumatic connections can
be shut by means of a blind plug. An open pneumatic connection
may result in leaking air; FluidSIM-P thus pops up a warning mes-
sage, if some pneumatic connection was left open. Note that at
each pneumatic connection values for the flow and pressure can be
displayed.
Line (pneumatic)
A pneumatic line links two pneumatic connections. Note that a

pneumatic connection may be a simple pneumatic connection or a
T-junction. A pneumatic line causes no pressure drop, i. e., it has no
fluidic resistance. From a drawing point of view, FluidSIM distin-
guishes between control lines and main lines. The former is repre-
sented by a dashed line, the latter is represented by a solid line and
establishes the default case.
T-junction (pneumatic)
A T-junction joins up to four pneumatic lines, thus having a single

pressure potential. Note that T-junctions are introduced automati-
cally by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto
another line in Edit Mode.
20.2.2 Configurable Way Valves
tions, where both its body elements operation modes are user-
definable.
Additionally, the pneumatic connections can be closed with either

blind plugs or exhausts.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
air spring left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (0.5)
air spring right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (0.5)
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
20.2.3 Mechanically Operated Directional Valves
3/2-way roller lever valve, normally closed
The roller lever valve is operated by pressing on the lever, for

example through the use of a switching cam of a cylinder. The flow
passes through from 1 to 2. After releasing the lever, the valve
returns to its initial position through the use of a return spring.
Connection 1 is shut. In the Simulation Mode, the valve can be
switched manually by clicking on the component, thus not requiring
a cylinder to operate the valve. This valve is derived from a config-
urable 3/n way valve. You find this valve in the component library
“Frequently used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
3/2-way roller lever valve, normally open
The roller lever valve is operated by pressing on the lever, for

example through the use of a switching cam of a cylinder. Connec-
tion 1 is shut. After releasing the lever, the valve returns to its initial
position through the use of a return spring. The flow may pass
through freely from 1 to 2. In the Simulation Mode, the valve can
be switched manually by clicking on the component, thus not
requiring a cylinder to operate the valve. This valve is derived from
a configurable 3/n way valve. You find this valve in the component
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
3/2-way idle return roller valve, normally closed
The idle return roller valve is operated when the roller is driven in a
specific direction by the switching cam of a cylinder. After releasing
the roller, the valve returns to its initial position through the use of
a return spring. Connection 1 is shut. When the roller is driven in
the opposite direction, the valve is not operated. In the Simulation
Mode, the valve can be switched manually by clicking on the com-
ponent, thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the valve. This
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Pressurizing valve
The pressurizing valve with plunger control is operated by the

surface of the cylinder cam. When the plunger is operated, com-
pressed air flows freely until the nozzle is closed. A signal up to the
level of the boost pressure is assembled at exit connection 2. In
the Simulation Mode, the valve can be switched manually by click-
ing on the component, thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the
valve.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Pneumatic proximity switch, solenoid operated
A permanent solenoid found on the piston of a cylinder drives this

3/2 pneumatic directional valve and triggers the control signal. The
flow passes freely from 1 to 2. In the Simulation Mode, the valve
can be switched manually by clicking on the component, thus not
requiring a cylinder to operate the valve. This valve is derived from
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
3/2-way valve with pushbutton, normally closed
Pressing the pushbutton operates the valve. The flow passes freely
from 1 to 2. Releasing the pushbutton allows the valve to return to
its starting position through the use of a return spring. Connection
1 is shut. By holding down the Shift key and simultaneously
clicking on the component with the mouse cursor, FluidSIM keeps
the valve in permanent operating position. Simply clicking on the
component cancels the operated state and returns the valve to its
starting position. This valve is derived from a configurable 3/n way
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
3/2-way valve with pushbutton, normally open
Pressing the pushbutton operates the valve. Connection 1 is shut.

Releasing the pushbutton allows the valve to returns to its starting
position through the use of a return spring. The passes freely from
1 to 2. By holding down the Shift key and simultaneously click-
ing on the component with the mouse cursor, FluidSIM keeps the
valve in permanent operating position. Simply clicking on the
component cancels the operated state and returns the valve to its
starting position. This valve is derived from a configurable 3/n way
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
3/2-way valve with selection switch or striking button
Pressing the red striking button operates the valve. The flow passes
freely from 1 to 2. Releasing the button has no effect; the valve
remains in its operating position. Turning the button to the right
sets the striking button back to its original position and the valve
returns to its starting position through the use of a return spring.
Connection 1 is shut. This valve is derived from a configurable 3/n
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
5/2-way valve, with selection switch
Turning the selection switch operates the valve. The flow passes
freely from 1 to 4. Releasing the switch has no effect; the valve
remains in its operating position. Turning the switch back to its
original position allows the flow to pass freely from 1 to 2. This
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
20.2.4 Solenoid Operated Directional Valves
3/2-way solenoid valve, normally closed
The solenoid valve is controlled by applying a voltage signal at the

solenoid coil. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. By stopping the
signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use
of a return spring. Connection 1 is shut. If no signal is applied to the
valve, it can be manually operated. This valve is derived from a
configurable 3/n way valve. You find this valve in the component
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
3/2-way solenoid valve, normally open

solenoid coil. Connection 1 is shut. By stopping the signal the valve
is set back to its starting position through the use of a return
spring. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. If no signal is applied to
the valve, it can be manually operated. This valve is derived from a
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
5/2-way solenoid valve

solenoid coil. The flow passes freely from 1 to 4. By stopping the
of a return spring. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. If no signal is
applied to the valve, it can be manually operated. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
5/2-way solenoid impulse valve

solenoid coil (flow passes from 1 to 4) and remains in this operat-
ing position even when the signal is cut off. Only by applying an
opposite signal will the valve return to its starting position (flow
passes freely from 1 to 2). If no signal is applied to the valve, it can
be manually operated. This valve is derived from a configurable
5/n way valve. You find this valve in the component library “Fre-
quently used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
5/3-way solenoid valve, mid-Position closed

solenoid coil (flow passes from 1 to 4 or from 1 to 2). By stopping
the signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the
use of a return spring. Connections 1, 2, and 4 are shut. If no signal
is applied to the valve, it can be manually operated. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
20.2.5 Pneumatically Operated Directional Valves
3/2-way valve, pneumatically operated, normally closed
The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying a pilot pressure at

connection 12. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. By stopping the
of a return spring. Connection 1 is shut. This valve is derived from a
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
3/2-way valve, pneumatically operated, normally open

connection 10. Connection 1 is shut. By stopping the signal the
valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return
spring. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. This valve is derived from
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
5/2-way valve, pneumatically operated

connection 14. The flow passes freely from 1 to 4. By stopping the
of a return spring. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
5/2-way impulse valve, pneumatically operated
The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying reciprocal pilot

pressures at connection 14 (flow passes from 1 to 4) and connec-
tion 12 (flow passes from 1 to 2). The valve’s operating position
remains until an opposite signal is received by the valve. This valve
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
5/3-way pneumatic valve, mid-Position closed
The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying reciprocal pilot

pressures at connection 14 (flow passes from 1 to 4) and connec-
tion 12 (flow passes from 1 to 2). By stopping the signals the valve
is set back to its starting position through the use of a return
spring. Connections 1, 2, and 4 are shut. This valve is derived from
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Low pressure amplifier unit, 2 compartments
Each of the two double-level low pressure amplifier units has the
function of a 3/2 directional valve that is normally closed. The
signal at connection 12 is raised to a higher boost pressure level
through the use of a double-level amplifier and is put out by con-
nection 2.
20.2.6 Shutoff Valves and Flow Control Valves
Shuttle valve
The shuttle valve is switched based on the compressed air entering

into either input connection 1 and leaving via an output connection
2. Should both input connections begin receiving compressed air,
the connection with the higher pressure takes precedence and is
put out (OR function).
Quick exhaust valve
The compressed air passes from connection 1 to connection 2. If

the pressure should decrease at connection 1, then the com-
pressed air from connection 2 will escape to the outside via the
installed silencer.
Standard nominal flow rate 1...2: 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (300)
Standard nominal flow rate 2...3: 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (550)
Two pressure valve
The two pressure valve is switched based on the compressed air

entering into both input connections 1 and leaving via an output
connection 2. Should both input connections begin receiving com-
pressed air, the connection with the lower pressure takes prece-
dence and is put out (AND function).
Check valve
If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2, then

the check valve allows the flow to pass, otherwise it blocks the
flow.
Check valve, spring loaded
If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2 and

otherwise it blocks the flow.
Check valve with pilot control
If the entering pressure at connection 1 is higher that the outgoing

pressure at 2, the check valve allows the flow to pass freely. Other-
wise, the valve stops the flow. Additionally, the check valve can be
opened via the control line 12. This action allows the flow to pass
freely in both directions.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Check valve with pilot control, spring loaded

otherwise it blocks the flow. Additionally, the check valve can be
released using the pilot line 12, thus enabling the flow in both
directions.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Pilot to close check valve
If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2, then

the non-return valve allows the flow to pass, otherwise it blocks the
flow. Additionally, the non-return valve can be closed using the
pilot line 10.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Pilot to close check valve, spring loaded

the nominal pressure, then the non-return valve allows the flow to
pass, otherwise it blocks the flow. Additionally, the non-return
valve can be closed using the pilot line 10.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Nozzle
The nozzle represents a pneumatic resistance.
Throttle valve
The setting of the throttle valve is set by means of a rotary knob.

Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute resistance value
can be set. This means that, in reality, different throttle valves can
generate different resistance values despite identical settings.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Orifice
The orifice represents a pneumatic resistance.
Orifice, adjustable
The orifice represents a variable pneumatic resistance.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
One-way flow control valve
The one-way flow control valve is made up of a throttle valve and a

check valve. The check valve stops the flow from passing in a cer-
tain direction. The flow then passes though the throttle valve. The
cross-section of the throttle is adjustable via a regular screw. In the
opposite direction the flow can pass through the check valve.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Standard nominal flow rate (Flow control valve): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min
(45)
Standard nominal flow rate (Non-return valve): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min
(65)
Pneumatic counter
The counter registers pneumatic signals starting at a predeter-

mined number and counting backwards. If zero is reached, then the
counter releases an output signal. This output signal continues
until the counter is reset either by hand or from at signal at connec-
tion 10.
Counter: 0 ... 9999 (3)
Time delay valve, normally closed
The time delay valve is actuated by a pneumatic signal at port 1

after a preset time delay has elapsed. It is returned to the normal
position via return spring when the signal is removed. The time
delay is infinitely adjustable by means of a regulating screw. The
time delay is reset automatically within 200 ms.
Delay time: 0.1 ... 100 s (3)
Time delay valve, normally open
After the pilot signal is applied at port 10, a preset time elapses
before the pneumatic timer is actuated. It returns to its initial
position via a return spring once the signal is removed. The time
delay is infinitely adjustable by means of a regulating screw. The
time delay is reset automatically within 200 ms.
Delay time: 0.1 ... 100 s (3)
Ring sensor
The ring sensor is a non-contact pneumatic signal output module. It

is supplied with low pressure at connection 1. If, due to an object,
the entering air flow is disturbed, a low pressure signal will be put
out by connection 2. To simulate an object in the air flow, as pre-
sented above, simply click on the component during FluidSIM
Simulation Mode.
20.2.7 Pressure Operated Switches
2-way pressure regulator valve
The pressure regulator valve regulates the compressed air supply

to the preset nominal pressure and equalizes pressure fluctuations.
The valve closes when the pressure at connection 2 exceeds the
nominal pressure. The setting for the real components is compo-
nent dependent and cannot be changed.
2-way pressure regulator valve, adjustable

The valve closes when the pressure at connection 2 exceeds the
nominal pressure.
Pressure regulator valve with manometer
The pressure control valve regulates the supplied pressure based

on the adjustable operating pressure and the variations in the
pressure. The manometer displays the pressure at connection 2.
3-way pressure regulator valve

The compressed air is discharged via connection 3 when the pres-
sure at connection 2 exceeds the nominal pressure. The setting for
the real components is component dependent and cannot be
changed.
3-way pressure regulator valve, adjustable

The compressed air is discharged via connection 3 when the pres-
sure at connection 2 exceeds the nominal pressure.
Closing pressure compensator
The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent

pneumatic resistance. The pressure compensator closes when the
pressure difference p3-p4 exceeds the nominal pressure. A pres-
sure regulating valve is implemented by the combination of connec-
tions 2 and 3. The nominal pressure setting of the real components
is component dependent and cannot be changed.
Closing pressure compensator, adjustable

pneumatic resistance. The pressure compensator closes when the
pressure difference p3-p4 exceeds the nominal pressure. A pres-
sure regulating valve is implemented by the combination of connec-
tions 2 and 3.
Opening pressure compensator

pneumatic resistance. The pressure compensator opens when the
pressure difference p3-p4 exceeds the nominal pressure. A se-
quence valve is implemented by the combination of connections 1
and 3. The nominal pressure setting of the real components is
component dependent and cannot be changed.
Opening pressure compensator, adjustable

pneumatic resistance. The pressure compensator opens when the
pressure difference p3-p4 exceeds the nominal pressure. A se-
quence valve is implemented by the combination of connections 1
and 3.
20.2.8 Pressure Operated Switches
The pressure sensor measures the pressure and operates the

pressure switch when the adjustable switching pressure has been
exceeded.
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 2 MPa (0.3)
Vacuum switch
The vacuum switch operates the linked pressure switch, when the
pressure falls below the adjustable switching pressure. If the sym-
bol is used as a pressure switch the respective switch is operated
when the pressure exceeds the switching pressure.
Differential pressure switch
The differential pressure switch can be employed as a pressure

switch (connection P1), a vacuum switch (connection P2) or as a
differential pressure switch (P1-P2). The respective pneumatic to
electric converter is operated when the difference in pressure
between P1-P2 exceeds the adjustable switching pressure.
Switching pressure: -2 ... 2 MPa (0.3)
20.2.9 Vacuum Technique
Vacuum suction nozzle
The vacuum suction nozzle creates its vacuum based on the ejector
principle. In this case, compressed air flows from connection 1 to 3,
creating a vacuum at connection 1v. A sucker can be connected to
the vacuum connection 1v. Stopping the input of compressed air at
connection 1 stops any suction also.
Maximum vacuum: -0.999 ... 0 bar (-0.85)
Operating pressure for max. vacuum: 0.1 ... 20 bar (4.25)
Air consumption at 600 kPa: 1 ... 1000 l/min (11.6)
Max. suction rate: 0.1 ... 1000 l/min (6)
Vacuum suction nozzle
The vacuum suction nozzle creates its vacuum based on the ejector
principle. In this case, compressed air flows from connection 1 to 3,
creating a vacuum at connection 1v. A sucker can be connected to
the vacuum connection 1v. Stopping the input of compressed air at
connection 1 stops any suction also.
Vacuum generator with ejector pulse
Vacuum generator with ejector pulse
Volume: 0.001 ... 10 l (0.05)
Sucker
The sucker can be used in connection with the vacuum suction

nozzle to suck in objects.
In order to put down or to lift the sucker in FluidSIM click on the

component in simulation mode.
Diameter: 1 ... 1000 mm (20)
Load to be lifted: 0.001 ... 1000 kg (0.1)
Safety factor: 0.1 ... 100 (1)
Suction gripper
Suction gripper with vacuum security valve.
Min. spring pressure: 0 ... 1 bar (0.1)
Max. Spring pressure: 0.01 ... 1 bar (0.2)
Min. Flow rate at p1-p2 = 50 kPa: 0.001 ... 1000 l/min (0.5)
Max. Flow rate at p1-p2 = 50 kPa: 0.1 ... 1000 l/min (4)
Adjustable vacuum actuator valve
The vacuum actuator valve is employed through the conversion of a

vacuum signal. As soon as the vacuum reaches the adjustable
value at connection 1v, the attached valve body is switched.
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 0 MPa (-0.025)
20.2.10 Valve Groups
Pressure sequence valve
The sequence valve is operated when the control pressure at con-

nection 12 has been reached. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2.
Removing the signal allows the valve to return to its starting posi-
tion through the use of a return spring. Connection 1 is shut. The
pressure of the control signal is infinitely adjustable via a pressure
setting screw.
Switching pressure: 0 ... 20 bar (3)
Time delay valve, normally closed
The time delay valve is made up of a pneumatically operated 3/2-

way valve, a one-way flow control valve, and small air accumulator.
When the necessary pressure is reached at the control connection
12 of the unit, the 3/2-way valve switches and the flow passes
freely from 1 to 2.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
(10)
Volume: 0.001 ... 100 l (0.01)
Standard nominal flow rate (Directional valve): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min
(50)
Time delay valve, normally open
The time delay valve is made up of a pneumatically operated 3/2-

way valve, a one-way flow control valve, and small air accumulator.
When the necessary pressure is reached at the control connection
10 of the unit, the 3/2-way valve switches and stops the flow from
passing between 1 and 2.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
(10)
Volume: 0.001 ... 100 l (0.01)
Standard nominal flow rate (Directional valve): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min
(50)
Stepper module, type TAA
The stepper module is made up of a memory unit (3/2-way impulse

valve), an AND and an OR component, a viewable announcement,
and an auxiliary manual operation.
Initial Position: Left, Right (Left)
Stepper module, type TAB
The stepper module is made up of a memory unit (3/2-way impulse

valve), an AND and an OR component, a viewable announcement,
and an auxiliary manual operation.
Initial Position: Left, Right (Right)
Quickstepper
The Quickstepper is a ready to be fitted, mechanical/pneumatic

control device with 12 in- and outputs. The outputs are successive-
ly synchronized with the input signals.
Two-hand control block ZSB
The two-hand control block ZSB is a pneumatic AND function.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
20.2.11 Continuous valves
5/3-way proportional valve
The proportional valve transforms an analog electrical input signal

into corresponding opening cross-sections at the outputs. At half
nominal voltage i.e. 5 V, the pneumatic mid-position is taken. Here
all leading edges are closed, so that no air flows through the valve.
Beneficial static and dynamic characteristics with minimal hystere-
sis (less than 0,3 %), short actuating time (typically 5 ms), and a
higher upper frequency limit (approx. 100 Hz), are achieved
through an integrated electronic position control for the slide
distance. Thus the valve, as control element and especially in
combination with a higher ranked position controller, is suitable for
the positioning of a pneumatic cylinder.
20.2.12 Actuators
Configurable cylinder
The configurable cylinder can be customized via its properties

dialog. Almost any combination of piston type (single-acting, dou-
ble-acting), the specification of the piston rods (double ended, with
magnetic coupling or slide) and the number (none, one, two) is
possible. An end position cushioning (without, with, adjustable)
can also be defined. FluidSIM automatically adjusts the symbol
according to the preset configuration. In addition, a load to be
moved (including possible static and sliding friction) and a variable
force profile can be defined in the properties dialog. In the compo-
nent library of FluidSIM there are several pre-configured cylinders
that can be inserted in your circuit and directly used. Should no
suitable symbol be available, then simply choose the component
with the most similarity to the required component, open the prop-
erties dialog and adjust the configuration accordingly.
late automatically)
Reference pressure: 0.1 ... 20 bar (6)
Reference velocity: 0.1 ... 2 m/s (1)
Friction at dp_ref: 1 ... 5000 N (120)
Break-away force at dp_ref: 1 ... 5000 N (12)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Single acting cylinder
The piston rod of a single acting cylinder is operated by the input of

compressed air at the front end position. When the compressed air
is shut off, the piston returns to its starting position via a return
spring. The piston of the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid
which can be used to operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Single acting cylinder with return spring
The piston of the single acting cylinder is extended to its back

position by the input of compressed air. When the compressed air
is switched off, a return spring moves the piston back to its front
position.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Double acting cylinder
The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is operated by the recip-

rocal input of compressed air at the front and back of the cylinder.
The end position damping is adjustable via two regular screws. The
piston of the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid which can be
used to operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Double acting cylinder with in and out piston rod
The in and out piston rod of the double acting cylinder is controlled
by alternating the compressed air input. The cushioning can be
adapted with two adjustment screws.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Double acting cylinder with two in and out piston rods and single
trestle.
This twin cylinder has two in and out piston rods that move in
parallel and that are coupled by a trestle. The construction guaran-
tees minimum torsion when positioning and moving tools or as-
semblies. Moreover, coming along with the same construction
height, the double piston rod conveys the double force as com-
pared to standard cylinders.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Double acting cylinder with two in and out piston rods and double
trestle.
This twin cylinder has two in and out piston rods that move in
parallel and that are coupled by a double trestle. The construction
guarantees minimum torsion when positioning and moving tools or
assemblies. Moreover, coming along with the same construction
height, the double piston rod conveys the double force as com-
pared to standard cylinders.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Multiple position cylinder
By connecting two cylinders of same piston diameter but different

maximum stroke three piston stop positions can be realized. From
the first stop position the third stop can be reached either directly
or via the intermediate stop. Note that the maximum stroke of the
second piston must be larger than the preceding one. When moving
back, an intermediate stop requires a particular control. The shorter
maximum stroke is half of the other maximum stroke.
Total stroke: 1 ... 2000 mm (200)
Intermediate position: 0 ... 1000 mm (0)
External force: -10000 ... 10000 N (0)
Linear drive with solenoid coupling
The sliding of the piston in the double rod cylinder is controlled by

a reciprocal input of compressed air.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Pneumatic linear drive with shape-fitting adaptor
The sledge of the double acting cylinder without a piston rod is

controlled by alternating the compressed air input. This type of
linear drive conveys forces by means of a shape-fitting piston-
sledge construction. The slitted cylinder prohibits the torsion of the
slider.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Pneumatic linear drive with shape-fitting adaptor
The sledge of the double acting cylinder without a piston rod is

controlled by alternating the compressed air input. This type of
linear drive conveys forces by means of a shape-fitting piston-
sledge construction. The slitted cylinder prohibits the torsion of the
slider.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Air motor
The air motor transforms pneumatic energy into mechanical energy.
Displacement: 0.001 ... 5 l (0.1)
Friction: 0.001 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (3)
Semi-Rotary actuator
The semi-rotary actuator is controlled by a reciprocal input of

compressed air. In the end positions the semi-rotary actuator can
activate switches or valves via labels.
Initial Position: 0 ... 360 deg (0)
Rotation angle (max): 1 ... 360 deg (180)
Displacement: 0.01 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Friction: 0.01 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.1)
Moment of inertia: 1e-005 ... 1 kg.m2 (0.0001)
20.2.13 Measuring Instruments
Manometer
The manometer displays the pressure at its connection.
Differential pressure gauge
The differential pressure gauge displays the pressure difference

between the adjacent pressures at the left and the right connection.
Pressure indicator
An optical signal is activated when the pressure at the connection

to the pressure indicator exceeds the preset switching pressure.
This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog pressure

sensor. The analog pressure sensor measures the adjacent pres-
sure and transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal.
In the process, only pressures in the specified pressure ranges are
considered. Within this range, the pressure in the voltage range
from 0 V to 10 V is represented, i.e. the minimum pressure delivers
0 V and the maximum pressure 10 V.
Voltage at p1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at p2: -100 ... 100 V (10)
This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog pressure

sensor.
Voltage at p1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at p2: -100 ... 100 V (10)
Flow meter
Flow meter
Flow meter, analog
This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog flow

meter. The analog flow meter measures the volumetric flow and
transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal. In the
process, only flow rates in the specified pressure ranges are con-
sidered. Within this range, the flow rate in the voltage range from 0
V to 10 V is represented, i.e. the minimum volumetric flow delivers
0 V and the maximum volumetric flow 10 V.
Voltage (q1): -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage (q2): -100 ... 100 V (10)
20.3 Electrical Components
20.3.1 Power Supply
Electrical connection 0V
0V connection of the power supply.
Voltage: 0 ... 400 V (0)
Electrical connection 24V
Voltage: 0 ... 400 V (24)
Function generator
The function generator is a voltage source that can create constant,

rectangle, sine and triangle signals. The voltage range is restricted
to -10 V to +10 V. The frequency, the amplitude and the Y-offset of
the signal can be set within this range. A voltage profile can be
additionally specified. Data points can be set interactively with a
mouse-click in the relevant graphic field. These can then be com-
bined to a closed polygon. Alternatively, existing data points can be
marked and both numeric values for the time and the correspond-
ing voltage can be entered in the input fields. If the option “loop” is
selected, then the voltage profile is started again.
Signal type: Rectangle, Sine, Triangle, Constant, Profile (Sine)
Frequency: 0.01 ... 100000 Hz (1)
Amplitude: 0 ... 400 V (5)
y offset: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Min. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (-30)
Max. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (30)
Function generator
The function generator is a voltage source that can create constant,

rectangle, sine and triangle signals. The voltage range is restricted
to -10 V to +10 V. The frequency, the amplitude and the Y-offset of
the signal can be set within this range. A voltage profile can be
additionally specified. Data points can be set interactively with a
mouse-click in the relevant graphic field. These can then be com-
bined to a closed polygon. Alternatively, existing data points can be
marked and both numeric values for the time and the correspond-
ing voltage can be entered in the input fields. If the option “loop” is
selected, then the voltage profile is started again.
Signal type: Rectangle, Sine, Triangle, Constant, Profile (Sine)
Frequency: 0.01 ... 100000 Hz (1)
Amplitude: 0 ... 400 V (5)
y offset: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Min. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (-30)
Max. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (30)
Setpoint value card
Voltage profiles in the range -10 V to +10 V can be created using

the setpoint value card. Up to 8 setpoints W1 to W8 can be speci-
fied in the voltage range -10 V to +10 V. The setpoint card requires
a power supply of 24 V. The increase from the current setpoint to
the next setpoint is defined using 4 ramps R1 to R4 with values
between 0 s/V and 10 s/V, i.e. a low ramp value signifies a large
increase, whereas a high ramp value results in a small increase. The
active ramp is defined as follows: R1 by a positive increase of 0 V,
R2 by a negative increase up to 0 V, R3 by a negative increase of 0
V and R4 by a positive increase up to 0 V. Three operating modes
can be selected: “Wait for switching time”, “Advance setpoints”
and “External control”. In operating mode “Wait for switching time”
the setpoints are sequentially advanced when the preset change
over time has expired. If “Advance setpoints” is selected then,
upon attaining the active setpoint, the next setpoint is started
without delay. In operating mode “External control” the selection of
the active setpoint is effected by gating the inputs I1, I2 and I3 with
at least 15 V. The corresponding setpoint is selected by means of
the specified bit table. During the process, the internal switching
time is inactive.
W1: I1=0 I2=0 I3=0

W2: I1=1 I2=0 I3=0
W3: I1=0 I2=1 I3=0
W4: I1=1 I2=1 I3=0
W5: I1=0 I2=0 I3=1
W6: I1=1 I2=0 I3=1
W7: I1=0 I2=1 I3=1
W8: I1=1 I2=1 I3=1
Connection (electrical)
An electric connection is a place where an electric line can be at-

tached to. To simplify the line drawing process, a connection ap-
pears as a small circle in Edit Mode. Note that at each electric
connection values for the voltage and current can be displayed.
Line (electrical)
A electrical line links two electrical connections. Note that a electri-

cal connection may be a simple electrical connection or a T-
junction. A electrical line causes no voltage drop, i. e., it has no
electrical resistance.
T-junction (electrical)
A T-junction joins up to four electrical lines, thus having a single

voltage potential. Note that T-junctions are introduced automatical-
ly by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto another
line in Edit Mode.
20.3.2 Actuators / Signal Devices
DC motor
The DC motor transforms electrical energy into mechanical energy.

DC motors produce the continual rotation through repeated chang-
es in the direction of current. The characteristics of the 24 V Dc
motor relate to the motor used by the Festo Didactic conveyor
belts.
External torque: 0 ... 20 N.m (0)
Idle revolution: 10 ... 20000 1/min (75)
Solenoid
The solenoid converts electrical energy into mechanical energy. An

iron core is pulled when a current flows through a coil. The iron
core is returned to its neutral position by a spring after electrical
current to the coil has been switched off. The solenoid can be used
as a gate or a stopper.
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (20)
Indicator light
If current flows, the indicator light is displayed in the user-defined

color.
Resistance: 0.01 ... 1E4 Ohm (193.5)
Buzzer
If current flows, a flashing ring around the buzzer is shown. Moreo-

ver, if “Buzzer” is activated in the menu under Options... Sound,
the buzzer is activated if a sound hardware is installed.
Resistance: 0.01 ... 1E4 Ohm (100)
20.3.3 Measuring Instruments / Sensors
Voltmeter
With a voltmeter, the voltage between two positions in a circuit can

be measured.
Resistance: 1E-3 ... 10 MOhm (1)
Ammeter
With an ammeter, the amperage (current strength) of the current

between two positions in a circuit can be measured.
Resistance: 1e-006 ... 1 Ohm (1E-6)
Displacement encoder
The displacement encoder is a slide potentiometer with longitudi-

nal contact and no connecting-rods. It delivers a voltage signal that
is proportional to the pick up position. The pick up position is
determined by the piston stroke. The voltage range, which will
depict the minimal and maximal piston position, can be defined
within the range -10 V to +10 V by the user. The displacement
encoder requires a power supply of at least 13 V.
Voltage (Cylinder retracted): -10 ... 10 V (0)
Voltage (Cylinder extracted): -10 ... 10 V (10)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (100)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog-pressure

sensor
This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog-pressure

sensor
Flow meter, analog
This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog-flow meter.
Flow meter, analog
This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog-flow meter.
20.3.4 General Switches
Break switch
General break switch that is tailored depending on the type of

component that actuates it. For example, if the break switch is
linked via a label to a switch-off delay relay, the break switch
changes to a switch-off delay break switch in the circuit diagram.
Make switch
General make switch that is tailored according to the component

that actuates it. For example, if the make switch is linked via a label
to a switch-on delayed relay, the make switch changes to a switch-
on delayed make switch in the circuit diagram.
Changeover switch
General changeover switch that is tailored according to the compo-

nent that actuates it. For example, if the changeover switch is
linked via a label to a switch-on delayed relay, the changeover
switch changes to a changeover switch in the circuit diagram.
20.3.5 Delay Switches
Break switch (switch-on delayed)
Switch with delayed opening after pickup. Switch-on delayed break

switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a
label.
Make switch (switch-on delayed)
Switch with delayed closing after pickup. Switch-on delayed make

switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a
label.
Changeover switch (switch-on delayed)
Changeover switch with delayed changeover after pickup. Switch-

on delayed changeover switches are created by using a general
changeover switch and setting a label.
Break switch (switch-off delayed)
Switch with delayed closing after dropout. Switch-off delayed break

label.
Make switch (switch-off delayed)
Switch with delayed opening after dropout. Switch-off delayed

make switches are created by using a general make switch and
setting a label.
Changeover switch (switch-off delayed)
Changeover switch with delayed changeover after dropout. Switch-

off delayed changeover switches are created by using a general
changeover switch and setting a label.
20.3.6 Limit Switches
Limit switch (break)
Switch that is opened by a cam attached to the cylinder rod. The

switch closes immediately when the cam has passed the switch.
Limit switches are created by using a general break switch and
setting a label.
Switch with roll (break)

Switches with roll are created by using a general break switch,
setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component’s
properties dialog.
Reed contact (break)

Reed contacts are created by using a general break switch, setting
a label and selecting the switch type in the component’s properties
dialog.
Limit switch (make)
Switch that is closed by a cam attached to the cylinder rod. The

switch opens immediately when the cam has passed the switch.
Limit switches are created by using a general make switch and
setting a label.
Switch with roll (make)

Switches with roll are created by using a general make switch,
setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component’s
properties dialog.
Reed contact (make)

Reed contacts are created by using a general make switch, setting a
label and selecting the switch type in the component’s properties
dialog.
Limit switch (changeover)
Switch that is changed over by a cam attached to the cylinder rod.

The switch changes back immediately when the cam has passed
the switch. Limit switches are created by using a general changeo-
ver switch and setting a label.
Switch with roll (changeover)

the switch. Switches with roll are created by using a general
changeover switch, setting a label and selecting the switch type in
the component’s properties dialog.
Reed contact (changeover)

the switch. Reed contacts are created by using a general changeo-
ver switch, setting a label and selecting the switch type in the
component’s properties dialog.
20.3.7 Manually Operated Switches
Pushbutton (break)
Switch that opens when actuated and closes immediately when

released. In FluidSIM switches can be actuated permanently
(locked) when continuing to hold down the mouse button and
pushing the Shift key. This permanent actuation is released by a
simple click on the component.
Pushbutton (make)
Switch that closes when actuated and opens immediately when

pushing the Shift - key. This permanent actuation is released by
a simple click on the component.
Pushbutton (changeover)
Switch that changes over when actuated and changes back imme-
diately when released. In FluidSIM switches can be actuated per-
manently (locked) when continuing to hold down the mouse button
and pushing the Shift - key. This permanent actuation is released
by a simple click on the component.
Detent switch (break)
Switch that opens and locks when actuated.
Detent switch (make)
Switch that closes and locks when actuated.
Detent switch (changeover)
Switch that changes over and locks when actuated.
Pneumatic to electric converter
The converter produces an electrical signal, if the preset differential

pressure of the differential pressure switch is exceeded.
Pressure switch (break)
Switch that opens when the preset switching pressure of the

pneumaitc or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded. Pressure
label.
Pressure switch (make)
The switch closes when the preset switching pressure of the pneu-
matic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded. Pressure switches
are created by using a general make switch and setting a label.
Pressure switch (changeover)
The switch changes over when the preset switching pressure of the
pneumatic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded. Pressure
switches are created by using a general changeover switch and
setting a label.
Pressure switch
The switch relays an electrical signal when the preset switching

pressure at the pneumatic pressure switch is exceeded.
Pressure switch
The switch relays an electrical signal when the preset switching

pressure at the hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded.
20.3.9 Proximity Switches
Magnetic proximity switch
Switch that closes when a solenoid is brought near by. In the Simu-
lation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by clicking
on it.
Inductive proximity switch
Switch that closes when the induced electro-magnetic field is

changed. In the Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be
actuated by clicking on it.
Capacitive proximity switch
Switch that closes when its electrostatic field is changed. In the

Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by
clicking on it.
Optical proximity switch
Switch that closes when the light barrier is interrupted. In the

Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by
clicking on it.
20.3.10 Relay
Relay
The relay picks up immediately when current is supplied and drops

out immediately when current is removed.
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay with switch-on delay
The relay picks up after a preset time when current is supplied and
drops out immediately when current is removed.
Delay time: 0 ... 999 s (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay with switch-off delay

out after a preset time when current is removed.
Delay time: 0 ... 999 s (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay counter
The relay picks up after a predefined number of current pulses

has/have been counted between the connections A1 and A2. If a
potential is supplied between the connections R1 and R2, the
counter is reset to its predefined value. In the Simulation Mode the
relay counter can also be reset by clicking on it.
Counter: 0 ... 9999 (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Starting current limiter
The starting current limiter consists essentially of a relay, whose

coil is situated between the connections IN and 0V, and whose
switch contact is situated between the connections 24V and OUT.
An electronic longitudinal controller restricts, with a switched relay
contact, the current flow to the preset value for the specified dura-
tion. The starting current limiter is usually deployed in combination
with the electric motor.
Duration: 1 ... 10000 ms (0.05)
Current limit: 0.01 ... 100 A (2)
20.3.11 Controller
Comparator
The comparator is a discontinuous (switching) two-step action

controller with differential gap (hysteresis). When activated, it
delivers a predefined voltage signal. The switch-on value for the
activation is defined by nominal value + 1/2 hysteresis and the
switch-off value by nominal value - 1/2 hysteresis. The comparator
requires a power supply of 24 V.
Set value voltage: -300 ... 300 V (5)
Hysteresis: 0 ... 100 V (0)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (100)
PID controller
The PID-Controller is a continuous controller consisting of three

control elements: Proportional, Integral and Derivative. The adjust-
able parameters refer to the PID-Controller in the Technology
Package TP111 pneumatic control TP511 hydraulic control from
Festo Didactic. The output voltage restriction can be set within the
range (i) -10 V to + 10 V or (ii) 0 V to +10 V. In the range (i), a ma-
nipulated variable offset from -7 V to + 7 V can be specified, and in
the range (ii) a manipulated variable offset from 1.5 V to 8.5 V can
be specified. The PID-controller requires a power supply of 24 V.
Range selection: -10 .. 10 V,0 .. 10 V (-10 .. 10 V)
Proportional gain: 0 ... 1000 (1)
Integral gain: 0 ... 1000 1/s (0)
Derivation gain: 0 ... 1000 ms (0)
Control quantity offset: -7 ... 7 V (0)
Status controller
The status controller is especially suitable for controlling pneumatic

positioning circuits. A pneumatic positioning circuit counts to the
controlled systems that can only be unsatisfactorily controlled with
a standard controller. Three parameters can be attributed to the
present status controller: position, speed and acceleration of the
piston. The controller is therefore referred to as a “triple loop”
controller. Speed and acceleration are not measured with sensors
out of cost reasons. They are calculated by the controller from the
differences in position. The adjustable parameters refer to the
status controller in the Technology Package TP111 Closed-loop
pneumatics TP511 Closed-loop hydraulics from Festo Didactic. The
output voltage restriction can be set within the range (i) -10 V to +
10 V or (ii) 0 V to +10 V. In the range (i), a manipulated variable
offset from -7 V to + 7 V can be specified, and in the range (ii) a
manipulated variable offset from 1.5 V to 8.5 V can be specified.
The status controller requires a power supply of 24 V.
Range selection: -10 .. 10 V,0 .. 10 V (-10 .. 10 V)
Deviation gain: 0 ... 10 (1)
Velocity damping: 0 ... 100 ms (0)
Acceleration damping: 0 ... 10 ms2 (0)
Total gain: 0 ... 1000 (1)
Control quantity offset: -7 ... 7 V (0)
20.3.12 EasyPort/OPC/DDE Components
FluidSIM Output Port
Communication with the EasyPort-Hardware and other applications

is implemented with the FluidSIM-Output.
FluidSIM Input Port

is implemented with the FluidSIM-Input.
FluidSIM Output Port (analog)

is implemented with the analog FluidSIM-Output.
FluidSIM Input Port (analog)

is implemented with the analog FluidSIM-Input.
Multi-pin plug distributor
Communication with EasyPort hardware, as well as with other

applications, is carried out with the multi-pin plug distributor. The
contacts on the right-hand side (1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11) represent the
digital outputs, and the contacts on the left-hand side (0, 2, 4, 6, 8
and 10) the digital inputs. If the “priority in case of connected
hardware” switch is activated, only the input signals from the
external sensors are taken into consideration, if an EasyPort has
been connected.
Universal-I/O
The universal input/output-unit is connected with the multi-pin

plug distributor by a label. The component is a input if the label
refers to a input channel of the multi-pin plug distributor. The
component is an output if the label refers to an output channel of
the multi-pin plug distributor. If used as an input the universal I/O-
component is a voltage source. If the correspondent input channel
of the multi-pin plug distributor on high level, the universal I/O-
Component delivers 24 V, otherwise 0V. If used as an output chan-
nel, the universal I/O-component sets the correspondent output
channel of the multi-pin plug distributor on high level, if there is a
higher voltage than 20 V.
20.4 Electrical Components (American Standard)
20.4.1 Power Supply
Electrical connection 0V (ladder)
Voltage: 0 ... 400 V (0)
Electrical connection 24V (ladder)
Voltage: 0 ... 400 V (24)
20.4.2 General Switches
Break switch (ladder)
General break switch that is tailored depending on the type of

component that actuates it. For example, if the break switch is
linked via a label to a switch-off delay relay, the break switch
changes to a switch-off delay break switch in the circuit diagram.
Make switch (ladder)
General make switch that is tailored according to the component

that actuates it. For example, if the make switch is linked via a label
to a switch-on delayed relay, the make switch changes to a switch-
on delayed make switch in the circuit diagram.
20.4.3 Delay Switches
Break switch (switch-on delayed, ladder)
Switch with delayed opening after pickup. Switch-on delayed break

label.
Make switch (switch-on delayed, ladder)
Switch with delayed closing after pickup. Switch-on delayed make

switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a
label.
Break switch (switch-off delayed, ladder)
Switch with delayed closing after dropout. Switch-off delayed break

label.
Make switch (switch-off delayed, ladder)
Switch with delayed opening after dropout. Switch-off delayed

make switches are created by using a general make switch and
setting a label.
20.4.4 Limit Switches
Limit switch (break, ladder)

setting a label.
Switch with roll (break, ladder)

setting a label.
Reed contact (break, ladder)

setting a label.
Limit switch (make, ladder)

setting a label.
Switch with roll (make, ladder)

setting a label.
Reed contact (make, ladder)

setting a label.
20.4.5 Manually Operated Switches
Pushbutton (break, ladder)
Switch that opens when actuated and closes immediately when

Pushbutton (make, ladder)
Switch that closes when actuated and opens immediately when

Pushbutton (changeover, ladder)
Switch that changes over when actuated and changes back imme-
diately when released. In FluidSIM switches can be actuated per-
manently (locked) when continuing to hold down the mouse button
and pushing the Shift key. This permanent actuation is released
by a simple click on the component.
Pressure switch (break, ladder)
Switch that opens when the preset switching pressure of the

pneumatic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded. Pressure
label.
Pressure switch (make, ladder)
The switch closes when the preset switching pressure of the pneu-
matic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded. Pressure switches
are created by using a general make switch and setting a label.
20.4.7 Relays
Relay

out immediately when current is removed.
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay with switch-on delay (ladder)
The relay picks up after a preset time when current is supplied and
drops out immediately when current is removed.
Delay time: 0 ... 999 s (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay with switch-off delay (ladder)

out after a preset time when current is removed.
Delay time: 0 ... 999 s (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
20.5 Electronic components
20.5.1 Power supply
Constant voltage source
A constant voltage source is an ideal voltage source, which can

maintain a fixed voltage that does not depend on the output cur-
rent or load resistance.
Voltage: 0 ... 400 V (12)
Potential
A potential is an ideal voltage source with a reference point of

“ground”.
Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (5)
Ground
The ground symbol defines the 0 V reference potential for all signal
and operating voltages.
Three-phase alternator
A three-phase alternator supplies a combined set of three sinusoi-

dal alternating electric voltages. The voltages are phase shifted to
one another.
There are three inductors inside the alternator, spatially off-set by

120°. The magnetic field of an evenly rotating permanent magnet
induces three alternating voltages, phase shifted to one another by
120°.
Frequency: 0.01 ... 1000 Hz (50)
String voltage: 0 ... 400 V (7)
20.5.2 Passive components
Resistor
A resistor represents an ideal ohmic resistor.
Resistance: 1e-6 ... 1E8 Ohm (100)
Resistor, temperature-dependent (NTC)
In a temperature-dependent resistor of type NTC, the resistance

value falls as the temperature rises.
Reference Resistance: 1 ... 1E6 Ohm (5208)
Reference temperature: 0 ... 100 °C (23)
Resistor, voltage-dependent (varistor, VDR)
A varistor is a voltage-dependent resistor. Resistance decreases

abruptly once a particular voltage threshold is exceeded.
Resistor, light-dependent (LDR)
A light-dependent resistor consists of an amorphous semiconduc-

tor film. As the incidence of light is increased, electrical resistance
is decreased, due to the internal photoelectric effect.
Light intensity: 0 ... 100 % (50)
Min. Resistance: 1 ... 1E6 Ohm (183)
Max. Resistance: 1 ... 1E6 Ohm (34324)
Potentiometer
A potentiometer is an electrical resistance component with me-

chanically adjustable (by means of rotation or sliding) resistance
values. It provides three connectors and is mainly used as a contin-
uously adjustable voltage divider.
Potentiometer position: 0 ... 100 % (0)
Resistance: 1E-4 ... 100000 kOhm (1)
Capacitor
A capacitor is a passive electrical component which is able to store

electric charge (and therefore electric energy.)
The capacitor in its basic configuration consists of two electrically

conductive surfaces, the electrodes. The electrodes are separated
through an insulating material, the so-called dielectric. The separa-
tion of the two electrodes is so narrow, that the electrical forces are
able to act through the insulating material.
If a constant voltage is applied to the connectors of an uncharged

capacitor, a current flows for a short period of time and one of the
electrodes is positively charged, the other one negatively. This
electric charge is retained when the capacitor is disconnected from
the voltage source. If charge resp. electric flow is extracted from the
capacitor, its voltage drops again.
Capacity: 1E-4 ... 1E7 uF (1)
Capacitor, polarized
A capacitor is a passive electrical component which is able to store

electric charge (and therefore electric energy.)
The capacitor in its basic configuration consists of two electrically

conductive surfaces, the electrodes. The electrodes are separated
through an insulating material, the so-called dielectric. The separa-
tion of the two electrodes is so narrow, that the electrical forces are
able to act through the insulating material.
If a constant voltage is applied to the connectors of an uncharged

capacitor, a current flows for a short period of time and one of the
electrodes is positively charged, the other one negatively. This
electric charge is retained when the capacitor is disconnected from
the voltage source. If charge resp. electric flow is extracted from the
capacitor, its voltage drops again.
In contrast to the non-polarized capacitor, the polarized capacitor is
only suitable for DC and for AC voltage that does not reverse the
capacitor’s polarity. The advantage of the polarized capacitor is the
much higher capacity for the same form factor compared to non-
polarized capacitors.
Capacity: 1E-4 ... 1E7 uF (1)
Inductor
An inductor is a passive electrical component which is able to

create induction voltage.
An inductor, also called an inductance, in its basic configuration

consists of wire coils. The inductor provides two terminals.
If an inductor is connected to a DC voltage, then an exponentially

increasing current will flow.
Inductance: 1E-3 ... 1E4 mH (100)
Transformer
The transformer consists of two transformer coils. If an alternating

voltage is applied to one transformer coil, an alternating voltage is
induced in the second coil. In the no-load case, the value of the new
voltage when compared to the originally supplied voltage, follows
the ratio of the number of windings of the corresponding coils to
each other.
Inductance 1: 1E-3 ... 1E4 mH (595)
Inductance 2: 1E-3 ... 1E4 mH (66)
Coupling coefficient: 0 ... 1 (1)
20.5.3 Semiconductor
Diode
A diode allows an electric current to pass in only one direction,

while in the opposite direction it acts as an insulator. Therefore,
diodes have a forward direction and a reverse direction.
Reference voltage: 0.1 ... 100 V (0.7)
Reference current: 1 ... 1000 mA (12.6)
Resistance in series: 0.001 ... 1000 Ohm (0.0341512)
Saturation current: 1e-15 ... 100 A (7.02767e-9)
Light-emitting diode, LED (red)
A light-emitting diode (LED) is a semiconductor component that

emits light and has the electrical characteristics of a diode. If an
electric current is flowing through the diode in forward direction, it
emits light with a wavelength that depends on the semiconductor
material and doping.
To make the use of the LED as a simple signal indicator easier,

FluidSIM allows setting the color independent of the physical
characteristics.
Reference voltage: 0.1 ... 100 V (2)
Reference current: 1 ... 1000 mA (25)
Resistance in series : 0.001 ... 1000 Ohm (12.5)
Saturation current: 1e-15 ... 100 A (1e-12)
Light-emitting diode, LED (green)


characteristics.
Light-emitting diode, LED (blue)


characteristics.
Light-emitting diode, LED (green/red)

In this component, a green and a red LED with opposite polarity are
connected in parallel. Depending on the current direction either the
green or red LED lights up. Connected to alternating current with a
frequency higher than about 30 Hz, the human eye cannot recog-
nize the blinking and it seems as if both LEDs are lit simultaneously.
Zener diode
Because of their characteristics, zener diodes are used in numerous

circuitries for stabilizing and limiting electrical voltages. In forward
direction, they behave like normal diodes. In reverse direction,
resistance drops off considerably after the voltage exceeds a cer-
tain value, the so-called breakdown voltage. The voltage does not
increase by much after that, even if the electric current is increased.
Z-voltage: 0.1 ... 100 V (10)
Current at Z-voltage: 1 ... 10000 mA (15)
NPN transistor
An NPN transistor is a bipolar junction transistor (BJT). It is operat-

ed with an electric current and is used for switching and amplifying
signals without using mechanically moving parts.
There are two types of BJTs: NPN and PNP. The letters indicate the
order and doping type of the layers. Essentially, a BJT constitutes
two p-n junctions connected together in series (like that of a p-n
diode.) The three terminals are called collector (C), base (B) and
emitter (E).
Forward current gain: 0.1 ... 1000 (120)
Reverse current gain: 0.1 ... 1000 (1)
Saturation current: 1e-16 ... 1e-3 A (8.81138e-14)
Forward early voltage: 1 ... 1000 V (64)
PNP transistor
An PNP transistor is a bipolar junction transistor (BJT). It is operated

with an electric current and is used for switching and amplifying
signals without using mechanically moving parts.
There are two types of BJTs: NPN and PNP. The letters indicate the
order and doping type of the layers. Essentially, a BJT constitutes
two p-n junctions connected together in series (like that of a p-n
diode.) The three terminals are called collector (C), base (B) and
emitter (E).
Forward current gain: 0.1 ... 1000 (230)
Reverse current gain: 0.1 ... 1000 (1)
Saturation current: 1e-16 ... 1e-3 A (8.81138e-14)
Forward early voltage: 1 ... 1000 V (64)
N-channel JFET
A junction gate field-effect transistor (JFET) controls the electrical

current that flows through the channel between the source and
drain terminals, by using a junction between the gate connector
and the channel.
Depending on doping type, JFETs are classified in two types: n-

channel and p-channel JFETs.
Threshold voltage: -20 ... 0 V (-3)
Transconductance parameter: 1e-6 ... 1e-1 A/V2 (1.304e-3)
Channel-length modulation parameter: 1e-6 ... 1e-1 1/V (2.25e-3)
P-channel JFET
A junction gate field-effect transistor (JFET) controls the electrical

current that flows through the channel between the source and
drain terminals, by using a junction between the gate terminal and
the channel.
Depending on doping type, JFETs are classified in two types: n-

channel and p-channel JFETs.
Threshold voltage: 0 ... 20 V (2.5)
Transconductance parameter: 1e-6 ... 1e-1 A/V2 (1.271e-3)
Channel-length modulation parameter: 1e-6 ... 1e-1 1/V (0.04)
N-Kanal-MOSFET-Transistor
A metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET) is an

active component with at least three terminals (electrodes): G
(gate), D (drain) and S (source.) In some designs, an additional B
(bulk) terminal is fed to the outside. Usually though, B is connected
internally with S.
Like other field-effect transistors, a MOSFET acts as a voltage-

controlled resistor, meaning that the voltage between gate and
source can be used to change the resistance (and thus the electri-
cal current) between drain and source by several orders of magni-
tude.
Depending on doping type, MOSFETs are classified in two types: n-

channel and p-channel MOSFETs.
P-channel MOSFET
A metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET) is an

active component with at least three terminals (electrodes): G
(gate), D (drain) and S (source.) In some designs, an additional B
(bulk) terminal is fed to the outside. Usually though, B is connected
internally with S.
Like other field-effect transistors, a MOSFET acts as a voltage-

controlled resistor, meaning that the voltage between gate and
source can be used to change the resistance (and thus the electri-
cal current) between drain and source by several orders of magni-
tude.
Depending on doping type, MOSFETs are classified in two types: n-

channel and p-channel MOSFETs.
Unijunction transistor
Similar to a normal bipolar transistor, a unijunction transistor (UJT)

provides three terminals. Unlike a bipolar transistor however, but
similar to a diode, there is only one p-n junction. In practice, it acts
like a controlled diode that, despite the constant polarity of the
applied voltage, can be made conductive or non-conductive. Be-
cause of the two B terminals, the UJT is also called “double-base
diode.”
If a small, positive control voltage against B1 is applied to the
emitter, nothing happens at first. If the control voltage is raised
further and a certain potential is reached, the UEB1 voltage will
collapse abruptly, and at the same time the emitter current will
jump to a certain value. In a sense, the UJT “has been fired.” This
behavior is very similar to a thyristor. A UJT is cleared when the
emitter current falls below a certain threshold.
Thyristor
A thyristor is a semiconductor component built from four or more

semiconductor films of varying levels of doping. Thyristors are
switchable components, meaning they are non-conductive in their
initial state and can be switched on through a small gate current.
After a thyristor has been switched on, it remains conductive even
of there is no gate current. A thyristor can be switched off by falling
below a minimum current, the so-called holding current.
DIAC
A DIAC (diode for alternating current) is an electronic component

with only two terminals. DIACs are also referred to as “symmetrical
trigger diodes.” The junction between the terminals only becomes
conductive after a breakover voltage has been reached.
The DIAC’s bidirectional layout allows for the switchng of alternat-

ing voltages. As soon as the voltage on the terminals (A1 and A2)
rises above a certain threshold voltage, it will switch through and
the p-n junction becomes conductive. Resistance will rise rapidly
again after the current that is flowing through the DIAC falls below a
certain value (the holding current.) This procedure is referred to as
“resetting the DIAC.”
TRIAC
In principle, A TRIAC (triode for alternating current) represents an

inverse-parallel connection of two thyristors. This allows for switch-
ing of alternating current, while a single thyristor can switch in only
one direction and thus acts - in its on-state - like a diode.
A TRIAC has a control terminal G (gate) and two main terminals MT1
and MT2, where MT2 is usually directly connected to the casing. In
order to be able to use a single control terminal for both thyristors,
TRIACs contain two firing, or helper, thyristor junctions, so that it
can be flipped into the low-impedance state by using a positive and
negative control pulse.
20.5.4 Measuring instruments / Sensors
Ohmmeter
An ohmmeter is an electrical test instrument which is used to

measure the electrical resistance of components.
Voltage: 0.1 ... 9 V (9)
Series resistor: 1 ... 1000 kOhm (47)
Oscilloscope
An oscilloscope is an electronic test instrument that allows visual

observation of one or more electrical voltages and their change
over time on a display device. The oscilloscope displays a history
graph, usually as a two-dimensional graph, where the horizontal x-
axis represents time and the vertical y-axis the voltages that are to
be displayed. The resulting image is called an oscillogram.
Resistance: 1E-3 ... 10 MOhm (10)
20.6 Digital Components
20.6.1 Constants and Terminals
Digital input
Digital inputs are designated with an “I”. In FluidSIM digital com-

ponents can be used inside and outside a digital module. If a
digital input is used inside a digital module, you can determine the
input connector of the digital module in question with which the
digital input shall be linked by allocating a number “I1” to “I16”. If
there is an analog signal of more than 10V at the chosen input of
the digital module, the digital input is set to “Hi”. If a digital input is
used outside a digital module, there is an additional analog electri-
cal connection at the digital input. If there is an analog signal of
more than 10V at this connection, the digital input is set to “Hi”. As
an alternative you can click on the digital input with the left mouse
button in order to set it to “Hi”. Another click resets the value to
“Lo”.
Digital output
Digital outputs are designated with an “Q”. The output connects a

digital signal through from its input to its output. In FluidSIM digital
components can be used inside and outside a digital module. If a
digital output is used inside a digital module, you can determine
the output connector of the digital module in question with which
the digital output shall be linked by allocating a number “Q1” to
“Q16”. If the status of the digital output is “Hi”, a potential of 24V
is set at the corresponding output connector of the digital module.
If a digital output is used outside a digital module, there is an
additional analog electrical connection at the digital output. If the
status of the digital output is “Hi”, a potential of 24 V is set at this
connection.
Memory bits
Memory bits are designated with a “M”. Memory bits are virtual
outputs, with a value at their output analog to that at their input.
When the simulation start is activated, you can define by using the
property dialog box if the output Q shall be set to “Lo” or to “Hi”,
independent on the input value. After the simulation start the value
at the output is set to the value of the input.
Initial state = Hi: ... (false)
Logic level HI
At the output Q you have the logic level “Hi”.
Logic level LO
At the output Q you have the logic level “Lo”.
Connection (digital)
An digital connection is a place where a digital line can be attached

to. To simplify the line drawing process, a connection appears as a
small circle in Edit Mode. Note that at each digital connection its
level “Lo” / “Hi” can be displayed.
Line (digital)
A digital line links two digital connections. Note that a digital con-
nection may be a simple digital connection or a T-junction.
T-junction (digital)
A T-junction joins up to four digital lines, thus having a single

digital level. Note that T-junctions are introduced automatically by
FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto another line
in Edit Mode.
20.6.2 Basic Functions
AND
The output Q of the AND is only “Hi” when all inputs are “Hi”, that
is, if they are closed. If an input pin of this module is not connected,
its status is automatically “Hi”.
Edge-triggered AND
The output Q of the edge-triggered AND is only “Hi” when all inputs
are “Hi” and if at least one input was “Lo” in the previous cycle. If
an input pin of this block is not connected, its status is automatical-
ly “Hi”.
NAND (AND not)
The output Q of the NAND is only “Lo”, when all inputs are “Hi”,
that is, if they are closed. If an input pin of this block is not con-
nected, its status is automatically “Hi”.
NAND With Edge Evaluation
The output Q of the NAND with edge evaluation is only “Hi”, if at

least one input is “Lo” and if all inputs were “Hi” in the previous
cycle. If an input pin of this block is not connected, its status is
automatically “Hi”.
OR
The output Q of the OR is only “Hi”, if at least one input is “Hi”, that
is, if it is closed. If an input pin of this block is not connected, its
status is automatically “Lo”.
NOR (OR not)
The output Q of the NOR is only “Hi” when all inputs are “Lo”, that
is, if they are switched off. As soon as any input is switched on
(status “Hi”), the output of the NOR is set to “Lo”. If an input pin of
this block is not connected, its status is automatically “Lo”.
XOR (exclusive OR)
The output Q of the XOR is “Hi”, if the inputs are nonequivalent. If

an input pin of this block is not connected, its status is automatical-
ly “Lo”.
NOT (Negation, Inverter)
The output Q is “Hi” if the input is “Lo”. The NOT block is an input
status inverter.
20.6.3 Special Functions
Digital module
The digital module is used for a compact embedding of a digital

switching circuit into a electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit.
The digital module offers 8 (16) electrical inputs and outputs, which
transfer their states to its digital switching circuit in the inner part.
Therefore the digital switching circuit does not need much space in
the electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit for the display of
the digital module as a rectangle with a total number of 18 (34)
connections. By making a double-click with the left mouse button
on the digital module you come to the digital circuit in the inner
part of the module. A new window opens. It shows the digital circuit
and can be handled in the usual way. The standard configuration in
the inner part of a new inserted digital module is a row with 8 (16)
inputs and 8 (16) outputs each. They correspond to the inputs and
outputs of the module in the electropneumatic or electrohydraulic
circuit. In order to be able to test the digital circuit during the setup,
it can be simulated separated from the electropneumatic or elec-
trohydraulic circuit. As soon as the processing window of the digital
module is closed or the original circuit window is put into the fore-
ground, the previously effected changes in the digital circuit are
automatically adopted into the digital module of the
electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit. Inside the digital
module only digital components can be inserted. Furthermore, an
encapsulating of additional digital modules inside a module is not
possible. However, you can use several digital modules in one
electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit. Please note that the
digital circuit inside a digital module only works correctly if corre-
sponding potentials are set at the electrical power supply units of
the module (+24 V) and (0 V).
On delay
An output with on delay is not switched on until a specified time

has expired. When the status of input Trg changes from “Lo” to
“Hi”, the on delay time starts. If the status of input Trg is “Hi” at
least for the duration of the configured time, the output Q is set to
“Hi” on expiration of this time. The output follows the input with on
delay. The time is reset, when the status of the input changes again
to “Lo” before the time has expired. The output is reset to “Lo”,
when the status at the input is “Lo”.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Off delay
The output is not reset until a configured time has expired. When
the input status turns to “Hi”, the output Q is switched instantane-
ously to “Hi”. If the status at input Trg changes from “Hi” to “Lo”,
the off delay starts. After expiration of the configured time, the
output is reset to “Lo” (off delay). When the input Trg is switched
on and off again, the off delay restarts. The input R (Reset) is used
to reset the delay time and the output before the configured time
has expired.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
On/Off delay
An output with on/off delay is switched on after a specified time

and is reset on expiration of a second specified time. As soon as the
status at input Trg changes from “Lo” to “Hi”, the configured on
delay time starts. If the status at input Trg remains “Hi” at least for
the duration of the configured time, the output Q is set to “Hi” on
expiration of the on delay time (the output follows the input on
delayed). If the status at input Trg changes again to “Lo”, before
the configured on delay time has expired, the time is reset. When
the status at input returns to “Lo”, the configured off delay time
starts. If the status at the input remains “Lo” at least for the dura-
tion of the configured off delay time, the output is set to “Lo” on
expiration of that time (the output follows the input off delayed). If
the status at the input returns to “Hi” before this time has expired,
the time is reset.
On delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Off delay time: 0 ... 100 s (6)
Retentive On delay
A specified time starts after an input pulse. The output is set on

expiration of this time. As soon as the status at the input Trg
changes from “Lo” to “Hi”, the specified time starts. After expira-
tion on the configured time, the output Q is set to “Hi”. Further
switching actions at input Trg have no influence on the running
time. The output and the time are only reset to “Lo” when the
status at input R is “Hi”.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Latching Relay
Input S sets output Q. Another input R resets the output Q. A latch-

ing relay is a simple logic memory. The output value depends on
the input states and on the previous output status.
Pulse Relay
A short oneshot at the input is used to set and reset the output.
Output Q status is toggled at every “Lo” to “Hi” transition of the
status at input Trg, that is, the output is switched on or off. Use
input R to reset the pulse relay to initial state, that is, the output is
set to “Lo”.
Wiping Relay - Pulse Output
An input signal generates a signal of specified length at the output.

The output status is switched to “Hi” after the input Trg is set to
“Hi”. The configured time is started at the same time and the out-
put remains set. After expiration of the configured time, the output
is reset to the status “Lo” (pulse output). If the input status chang-
es from “Hi” to “Lo” before the specified time has expired, also the
output follows immediately with a with a “Hi” to “Lo” transition.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Edgetriggered Wiping Relay
An input signal generates a signal of specified length at the output

(retriggering). The output status is switched to “Hi” after the input
Trg is set to “Hi”. The configured time is started at the same time.
After expiration of the configured time, the output Q status is reset
to “Lo” (pulse output). If the input status changes again from “Lo”
to “Hi” (retriggering), before the specified time has expired, the
time is reset and the output remains switched on.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Timer Switch
With the timer switch you can create timer switches referring to
days, weeks and years. Upon reach of the specified on-transition
time, the output Q of the timer switch is set to “Hi” and upon reach
of the specified off-transition time to “Lo”. If you have chosen the
option “repeat all”, the on and off transition is repeated each time
according to the specified repetition time.
On time: 0 ... 1000 s (10)
Off time: 0.1 ... 1000 s (30)
Repeat every: 0.1 ... 1000 s (60)
Up/Down Counter
Depending on the configuration of the input Dir, an internal value is

counted up or down through an input pulse. The output is set when
the configured count value is reached. With every status change at
the input Cnt from “Lo” to “Hi”, the internal counter is increased
(Dir = “Lo”) or decreased (Dir = “Hi”) by one unit. If the internal
counter is equal or larger compared to the specified value, the
output Q is set to “Hi”. You can use the reset input R to reset the
internal count value and the output to “Lo”. As long as R=“Hi”, also
the output is “Lo” and the pulses at input Cnt are not counted.
Counter: 0 ... 9999 (5)
Symmetric Clock Generator
A timing signal with a configurable period is given at the output. Via

the duration of the pulses you can determine the length of the on
and off times. Via the input En (for Enable) you can switch on the
clock generator, that is, the clock generator sets the output to “Hi”
for the duration of the pulse, subsequent the output to “Lo” for the
duration of the pulse and so on, until the input status is “Lo” again.
Impulse time: 0.0005 ... 100 s (0.5)
Asynchronous Pulse Generator
The pulse profile of the output can be changed via the configurable
pulse duration and pulse pause duration. It is possible to invert the
output with input INV. The input INV only negates the output, if the
block is enabled via EN.
Impulse time: 0.01 ... 100 s (3)
Impulse pause time: 0.01 ... 100 s (1)
Frequency Threshold Trigger
The output is switched on and off depending on two frequencies

which can be specified. The threshold trigger measures the signals
at input Fre. The pulses are captured across a measuring interval
which can be specified. If the frequency measured within the meas-
uring interval higher than the input frequency, the output Q is
switched to “Hi”. Q is switched again to “Lo” when the measured
frequency has reached the value of the output frequency or if it is
lower.
On frequency: 0.01 ... 9999 Hz (6)
Off frequency: 0.01 ... 9999 Hz (2)
Time interval: 0.001 ... 100 s (5)
20.7 GRAFCET Elements
20.7.1 GRAFCET
Step
The name of a step may contain the following characters: “0-9”, “a-
z”, “A-Z” and the underscore “_”. You can select from the following
seven different step types: simple step, initial step, macro-step,
macro input, macro output, enclosing step and initial enclosing
step. Furthermore, you can give the step an activation link.
Transition
You can give a transition a name, which is shown to the left of the
transition in brackets. Entering a transition condition is supported
by buttons for special symbols (AND, OR, NOT, falling edge, rising
edge, delay). Via Variable... you can select an existing GRAFCET
variable from a list. Alternatively to the formula, you can show a
descriptive text. To do this, you have to select the option “Display
description instead of formula”. In the “Connection ID/target in-
formation” field, you can enter a step that links to the transition’s
output without having to draw a connecting line. You can select an
existing step from a list.
Action
There are three types of action: assignations, allocations and

compulsory commands. For assignations and allocations, you can
enter a variable or an output, whose value is changed by the action.
The name of a variable may contain the following characters: “0-9”,
“a-z”, “A-Z” and the underscore “_”. For a “conditional action” or
an “action on event”, you can enter a condition that has to be
fulfilled before the action is executed. Entering a condition is sup-
ported by buttons for special symbols (AND, OR, NOT, falling edge,
rising edge, delay). Via Variable... you can select an existing
GRAFCET variable from a list. Alternatively to the formula, you can
show a descriptive text. To do this, you have to select the option
“Display description instead of formula”. For an allocation (“action
on activation”, “action on deactivation” and “action on event”), you
can enter any term whose value is to be allocated to the action
variable. Entering a term is supported by buttons for special sym-
bols (AND, OR, NOT, falling edge, rising edge). Via Variable... you
can select an existing GRAFCET variable from a list. Alternatively to
the formula, you can show a descriptive text. To do this, you have
to select the option “Display description instead of formula”. For a
“compulsory command”, you can enter the name of the partial
GRAFCET directly or select an existing partial GRAFCET from a list.
You can also enter the relevant steps directly or select them from a
list of existing steps. You have to separate the step names with
commas. You can select the special commands “*” and “INIT” using
the relevant buttons.
Synchronization
You can connect synchronizations like other FluidSIM components.

However, they do not initially have any connections. You always
have to draw connecting lines to a synchronization. The corre-
sponding connections are then generated automatically.
Partial GRAFCET
If you want to allocate GRAFCET elements to a specific partial

GRAFCET, place the partial GRAFCET frame over the relevant
GRAFCET part and give it a name. The preceding “G” is not part of
the name that you have to enter; it is added automatically by
FluidSIM and shown at the bottom left of the partial GRAFCET
frame. You can alter the size of the partial GRAFCET frame by drag-
ging its edges with the mouse. For the partial GRAFCET to function
correctly, it is important that all its elements are completely within
the frame and that the frame does not overlap with any foreign
elements or other frames.
GRAFCET-PLC-Component
The GRAFCET-PLC component is similar to a SPS controller, whose

behavior is described by a GRAFCET. For more information, please
read the section GRAFCET-PLC-Component.
GRAFCET-PLC-Component
The GRAFCET-PLC component is similar to a SPS controller, whose

behavior is described by a GRAFCET. For more information, please
read the section GRAFCET-PLC-Component.
GRAFCET-I/O
The GRAFCET I/O component is used to link the GRAFCET variables

with the electrical part of a circuit. You can enter eight GRAFCET
input variables and eight GRAFCET output variables into the
GRAFCET I/O component. The actions' variables serve as outputs.
The inputs can be the allocations and conditions of actions and
transitions. If a potential is created as the input of the GRAFCET I/O
component, the corresponding variable is set to “1”. If an output
variable has a value other than “0”, a potential of 24V is created at
the corresponding output of the GRAFCET I/O component.
20.8 Miscellaneous
20.8.1 Miscellaneous
Connection (mechanical)
A mechanical connection constitutes a place holder for the label of

a valve solenoid. To simplify clicking, a mechanical connection
appears as a small circle in Edit Mode.
Valve solenoid
The valve solenoid switches the valve. By means of a label the valve
solenoid can be linked to a valve that is solenoid operated.
Proportional valve solenoid, position controlled
In FluidSIM the proportional valve solenoid is coupled to the re-

spective continuous directional valve with the help of a label. The
required slide position is predetermined via a voltage signal. The
valve slide distance is position controlled. The control and amplifier
component is integrated in the valve.
Current (max): 0.01 ... 10 A (0.1)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (128)
Proportional amplifier, 1-channel
The amplifier is used to control proportional valves. For this pur-

pose, nominal values (voltage signals) from 0 V to +10 V are trans-
formed into the necessary magnetic current for the proportional
valves. In FluidSIM the amplifier is coupled to the respective valve
with the help of a label. The maximum current at the amplifier
output is hereby automatically adjusted in relation to the coupled
valve. A step current relative to the maximum current can be speci-
fied, in order to compensate the positive overlap of proportional
valves. The amplifier requires a power supply of 24 V.
Current (max): 0.01 ... 30 A (0.1)
Jump current: 0 ... 25 % (0)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (100)
Proportional amplifier, 2-channel
The amplifier is used to control proportional valves with two mag-

nets. For this purpose, nominal values (voltage signals) from -10 V
to +10 V are transformed into the necessary magnetic current for
the proportional valves. Output A is gated at a nominal value be-
tween 0 V and -10 V, output B between 0 V and -10 V. In FluidSIM
the amplifier is coupled to the respective valve with the help of two
labels. The maximum currents at the amplifier outputs are hereby
automatically adjusted in relation to the coupled valves. A step
current relative to the maximum current can be specified, in order
to compensate the positive overlap of proportional valves. The
amplifier requires a power supply of 24 V.
Current (max): 0.01 ... 30 A (0.1)
Jump current: 0 ... 25 % (0)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (100)
Valve solenoid (ladder)
The valve solenoid switches the valve. By means of a label the valve
solenoid can be linked to a valve that is solenoid operated.
Distance rule
The distance rule is a device for attaching switches at the cylinder.

The labels at the distance rule define links to the actual proximity
switches or limit switches in the electrical circuit.
Status indicator
In Edit Mode, the status indicator is automatically displayed at

those components that are actuated in the circuit’s initial position.
Cam switch
In Edit Mode, the cam switch is automatically displayed at those

mechanically operated way valves that are actuated in the circuit’s
initial position.
Text
The concept of text components in FluidSIM gives the user a way in

which to describe components in diagrams, assign identification
texts, or to provide commentary on the diagram. The text and the
appearance of text components can be customized to the user’s
liking.
State diagram
The state diagram records the state quantities of important compo-

nents and depicts them graphically.
Terminal assignment diagram
The terminal assignment diagram list automatically creates termi-

nals in the electrical circuit and displays the allocation in a table.
Functional diagram
With the functional diagram editor, functional diagrams e.g. dis-

placement-step diagrams can be created.
Parts list
The parts list component creates from the components of a circuit

diagram a table, which contains for each component its designation
and its description.
Rectangle
Rectangles are graphic primitives, which can also be used within
circuit diagrams.
Ellipse
Ellipses are graphic primitives, which can also be used within circuit
diagrams.
Bitmap
In FluidSIM images, as with all other components and objects, can

be inserted, positioned, moved, rotated and mirrored. In addition,
images such as rectangles and ellipses are freely scalable.
Learning, Teaching, and Visualizing Technologies
Chapter 21
21. Learning, T eachi ng, a nd Visual izi ng Technol ogies
Beside the creation and simulation of electro-fluidic circuit dia-

grams, FluidSIM also supports teaching basic knowledge. This
knowledge is presented in the form of texts, overview pictures,
sectional views, exercises, and educational films. Functions that
realize the selection of this instruction material are found under the
Didactics menu. One group of these functions refers to infor-
mation about single, selected components. Another group of func-
tions refers to ordered overviews of the didactics material, allowing
the selection of an interesting topic. Finally, it is also possible to
select and link together arbitrary topics into so-called Presenta-
tion... .
Appendix Component Library and Didactics Material offer a

complete and concise summary of the instructional material in
FluidSIM.
The following sections contain a description of the functions found

under the Didactics menu.
21.1 Information about Single Components
The first three entries under the Didactics menu refer to selected
components and are context sensitive. More precisely:
When a component in the current circuit diagram window is select-

ed, or all selected components are of the same type, the menu
entry Component description will be enabled.
21.1.1 Component Descriptions
All components possess a page with a technical description. This

page contains the diagram symbol for the component according to
the DIN standard (“Deutsche Industrienorm”), a textual description
of the component’s function, the designations of the connections,
and a listing of the adjustable parameters along with their value
ranges.
You will find a photograph of the real-life part provided for most
components. In the case that a component cannot exist singularly
in a real system, FluidSIM displays a photo of the assembly group
that this component belongs to. Examples for such components
include the indicator light, relays, switches, and the electrical
power supply. Components, that do not exist in reality, simply have
no photo. Examples include the text component and the distance
rule.
→ Select the one-way flow control valve and click on the menu
item Component description under the Didactics menu.
The following page opens:
Figure 21/1: Technical page of the one-way flow control valve
Figure 21/2: Technical page of the throttle check valve
Under the heading Related topics, but also when appropriate in the
component description, cross references for related instruction
material and components are defined. By clicking on a cross refer-
ence, the related page will automatically be displayed.
21.1.2 Component Illustrations
Component illustrations provide useful information relating a

component’s function. This may include a sectional view of the
component, but also illustrations of the component’s usage within
a circuit diagram. For several components, their sectional view can
be animated like a cartoon.
→ Select an air motor (4/2-way hand-lever valve in case of hy-
draulic version) and click on Component description under
the Didactics menu.
The following dialog box appears:
Figure 21/3: Page component-specific topics
Figure 21/4: Dialog box with component-specific topics
→ Please click the line with the relevant topic [35] Air
motor (hydraulics: [104] 4/2-way valve, two
pistons (1) ).
The following picture appears:
Figure 21/5: Function illustration of a air motor
Figure 21/6: Function illustration of a 4/2-way valve
Often it is easier to understand the functional nature of a compo-

nent, when its behavior is visualized through the use of animation.
For this reason, several components possess different sectional
views showing the component at different states. These sectional
views can be animated in much the same way as a flip book.
→ Please mark a quick-exhaust valve(hydraulics: 3-way pressure

reducing valve)and click the menu option Didactics Compo-
nent description to open the window with the component de-
scription. Now click the link with the function illustration [87]
quick exhaust valve (hydraulics: [84] 3-way pressure reducing
valve)
This function illustration can be animated.
→ Click on or Execute Start to start the animation.
An animation can be “frozen” with or by clicking on Pause in
the Execute menu. or Execute Stop stops an animation,
whereas or Execute Reset restarts an animation.
21.2 Selecting Didactics Material from a List
The entries Tutorial ’Simulating with FluidSIM' , Component

Library and Didactics Material under the Didactics menu
present the didactics material of FluidSIM organized in the form of
overview pages. From these pages topics can be chosen and
viewed independently of the current window and possibly selected
components.
21.2.1 Tutorial
Below this menu option you can launch the tutorial “Simulating
with FluidSIM”, which contains a variety of interesting experiments
and an excursus. By means of these useful examples you will get to
know the possibilities of simulating with FluidSIM. Furthermore, for
the most important components the mathematic models used in
FluidSIM are also described.
→ Please click the menu option Didactics Tutorial ’Simulating

with FluidSIM' to open the tutorial.
Figure 21/7: Tutorial (Hydraulics)
Figure 21/8: Tutorial (Pneumatics)
On the right-hand side the hierarchical directory is displayed. By

double-clicking the directory symbols you may list off or close the
applicable subsections. Clicking a page symbol will display the
contents of the page in the open window.
21.2.2 Component Library
Below the menu option Component Library you will find descrip-
tions and photos of all FluidSIM -components.
→ Click a menu option Didactics Component Library to open
the help pages of the component library.
Figure 21/9: Component Library (Pneumatics)
Figure 21/10: Component Library (Hydraulics)
21.2.3 Didactics Material
FluidSIM, alongside the tutorial and the component reference,

contains further didactics material particularly useful for group
work. Moreover, here you will find educational films, provided you
have copied them onto the hard disk during the installation. If you
haven’t installed the film files, you may choose a chapter via the
menu option Didactics EducationalFilm... to view the applicable
film from the included video-CD.
→ Click the menu option Didactics Didactics Material to open

the overview of the didactics material.
Figure 21/11: Didactics Material (Pneumatics)
Figure 21/12: Didactics Material (Hydraulics)
21.3 Presentations: Combining Instructional Material
Sometimes you may want to examine a topic from different angles

or combine individual topics into a lesson. For this purpose
FluidSIM offers the concept entitled Presentation... . There are a
number of already prepared presentations, which can be found on
the FluidSIM installation disks. However, editing presentations or
creating new presentations is also possible with FluidSIM. All
presentations can be found under Presentation... in the Didac-
tics menu.
→ Click on Didactics Presentation... .
The following dialog box appears:
Figure 21/13: Dialog box for selecting and editing presentations
(Pneumatics)
Figure 21/14: Dialog box for selecting and editing presentations
(Hydraulics)
Presentations This field contains a list of already created presentations.
New presentation... Clicking on “New Presentation...” opens a second dialog box for the
creation of a new presentation.
Edit presentation... Clicking on “ Edit presentation... ” opens a second dialog box to

begin editing a presentation.
Preview When the “Preview” setting is activated, the picture that pertains to
the selected presentation appears underneath the topics list.
→ Click on “New Presentation” to open the following dialog box.
Figure 21/15: Dialog box for editing presentations (Pneumatics)
Figure 21/16: Dialog box for editing presentations (Hydraulics)
Description In this text field a short description of the presentation can be

entered. This text may consist of up to 128 characters and will
appear with the other presentations, the next time the presentation
dialog box is opened.
Available topics This field contains a list of all available topics dealing with “ Pneu-
matics basics”, “Hydraulics basics”, “Working principle”, and
“Exercise”. Moreover, there exist two pictures that can be used to
announce a refreshment and a lunch break respectively. A double
click on a line in the “Available Topics” list inserts this line in the
“Selected topics” list above the highlighted bar. In this way a
presentation can be created or altered. Moreover, a user can inte-
grate his own circuit diagrams, DXF files, BMP- and WMF-picture
files, or even multimedia files such as sounds or video clips. To do
so, click on “ User file”: A dialog box opens that allows for the
selection of the desired data source on the file system.
Selected topics This field contains a list of topics chosen for the current presenta-
tion.
Add Clicking on “ Add ” is the same as double clicking a line in the “

Available topics ” list: The selected line in “ Available topics ” will
be inserted in the “ Selected topics ” list.
Delete Clicking on “ Delete ” deletes the selected line of the “ Selected

topics ” list.
Preview When the “ Preview ” setting is activated, the picture that pertains
to the selected topic appears underneath the respective list.
Within both topics lists the highlighted bar can be moved using the
arrow keys. Maybe it will be necessary to click and select the list
you want to work with. After creating a new presentation and clos-
ing the dialog box by clicking on “ OK ”, FluidSIM asks you to
name the presentation file . Presentation files have the extension
.shw and are located in the subdirectory shw under the instal-
lation directory.
21.4 Extended Presentations in the Microsoft PowerPoint

Format
The hydraulics version of FluidSIM contains an additional large set

of presentations written in the Microsoft PowerPoint Format. To use
these presentations, PowerPoint must not be installed on your PC
since FluidSIM installs the necessary viewer at its installation time.
→ Click on Extended Presentation... to open the dialog box of a

presentation.
Figure 21/17: Selection of an extended presentation
→ Select the item “Actuators” to open the related presentation in

full screen mode.
Most of the topics form a picture sequence, which can be viewed in

a single-step manner using the left mouse button or the spacebar.
→ Move two single steps forward in the current presentation.
Figure 21/18: Actuators
When clicking the right mouse button, a context menu is opened by

which, among others, the presentation can be closed or particular
pictures picked out. The files of the extended presentations are in
the subdirectory ppx of the FluidSIM installation. You can add
new PowerPoint presentations on your own by copying the related
files (format: “ppt” or “pps”) into the ppx -directory. Like the
other didactics material (illustrations of function, component pho-
tos, circuit drawings, educational films, etc.), the PowerPoint
presentations can linked and used within presentations (cf. Section
Presentations: Combining Instructional Material).
Didactics Material Survey (Pneumatics)
Chapter 22
22. Didactics Material Survey (Pne umatics)
This chapter provides a comprehensive listing of those parts of the

didactics material in FluidSIM that are not covered by chapter The
Component Library “The Component Library” . Basically, this mate-
rial consists of the components' behavior illustrations, the anima-
tions, the exercises, and the educational films, which all can be
activated under the Didactics menu. The subsequent sections
are arranged thematically. The icon indicates that an animation
exists for the related topic. The last section gives an overview of the
educational films.
22.1 Basics
[1] Pneumatic system structure and signal flow
A pneumatic system can be broken down into a number of levels

representing the hardware and signal flow from the energy source
to the actuating devices.
→ The topic highlights the relationship between signals, levels

and elements in a pneumatic system.
[2] Circuit diagram and pneumatic elements
Circuit diagrams are drawn in such a way that signals, for instance
energy or potential values, are oriented downwards. The number-
ing of the components is derived from their respective function in
the diagram.
→ The topic highlights the various levels in a circuit.
[3] Designating the elements, circuit diagram
This topic shows the relationship between levels in a circuit.
The figures contrasts the position of a roller lever valve (initial

position: actuated by the cylinder) in a circuit diagram and its
physical setup in a plant.
The figures contrasts the position of a roller lever valve (initial

position: not actuated) in a circuit diagram and its physical setup in
a plant.
All elements should be shown in the circuit diagram in the initial

position. If valves have been drawn with an actuated initial posi-
tion, this fact is indicated for example by an arrow, or for a limit
switch, by drawing the cam.
→ Explain the differences between the following terms: initial

position and starting position.
22.2 Supply elements
[7] Symbols of energy and supply components, supply and ser-

vice equipment
The Symbols are from the DIN ISO 1219 “Circuit symbols for fluidic
power components and systems”. The symbols for the energy
supply system can be represented as individual components or as
combined elements.
→ Compare the symbols with the combined symbols (topic 8).
[8] Symbols of energy and supply components, combined sym-

bols
In general where specific technical details are to be given, such as

requirements for non-lubricated air or micro-filtering, the complete
detailed symbol should be used. If a standard and common air
supply is used for all components, the simplified symbols can be
used.
→ Compare the symbols with the previous topic.
[9] Air service unit
The filter is normally combined with the pressure regulator and

lubricator to form a compressed air service unit. The selection of
the correct filter plays an important role in determining the quality
and performance of the control system which is to be supplied with
compressed air.
→ Refer to topic 10 for construction of the filter.
[10] Compressed air filter
The compressed air passes through a baffle plate in the filter bowl.
The air is rotated, and the heavier dust particles and water droplets
are spun by centrifugal force against the inner wall of the filter bowl
and run down the wall of the housing. The air which has been
precleaned then passes through the filter element.
→ The bowl must be emptied daily to prevent overflow.
[11] Air drying, low temperature
The lower the dew point the more the water will condense and
reduce the amount entrapped in the air. Using refrigeration meth-
ods, it is possible to achieve dew points of between 2°{C} and
5°{C}.
→ Compare with adsorption and absorption drying.
[12] Air drying, absorption
Absorption drying is a purely chemical process. The moisture in the

compressed air forms a compound with the drying agent in the
tank. This causes the drying agent to break down; it is then dis-
charged as a fluid at the base of the tank. The drying agent must be
replenished at a rate which is dependent on the compressed air
temperature, water content and flow rate.
→ Compare with adsorption drying.
[13] Air drying, adsorption
The lowest equivalent dew points (down to -90°{C}) can be

achieved by means of adsorption drying. In this process, the com-
pressed air is passed through gel and the water is deposited on the
surface, i.e. it is adsorbed.
→ Compare with absorption drying.
[14] Air lubricator
As a rule, the compressed air which is generated should be dry and

free of oil. For some components, lubricated air is damaging, for
others, it is undesirable, and for power components, it may in
certain cases be necessary. Lubrication of the air should therefore
be limited to the sections of the plant which require it.
→ Refer to picture of topic 9 for general arrangement.
[15] Air lubricator
Air passing through the lubricator causes a pressure drop between

the oil reservoir and the upper part of the lubricator. This pressure
difference forces the oil upwards through a tube and it then drips
into a nozzle which can be seen through an inspection glass. The oil
is atomized and carried along by the air stream.
→ It is necessary to carefully adjust the oil discharge rate.
[16] Pressure regulator with vent hole
The purpose of the regulator is to maintain the operating pressure

(secondary pressure) virtually constant regardless of fluctuations in
the line pressure (primary pressure). When air consumption in-
creases, the operating pressure drops and the spring opens the
valve. If the pressure on the secondary side increases considerably,
the center-piece of the diaphragm then opens and the compressed
air can flow to atmosphere through the vent holes in the housing.
[17] Delivery
Due to the pressure losses in the system, the compressor should

deliver between 650 and 700 kPa (6.5 and 7 bar). The operating
components of the system should be regulated to between 500 and
600 kPa (5 and 6 bar) for economic use. The receiver is used to
even out fluctuations in pressure due to demand. The drainage
points are at the lowest points.
→ The gradient should be away from the compressor.
[18] Piston compressor
The piston compressor is widely used. Multi-stage compressors are

required for compressing to high pressure. The drawn in air is
compressed by the first piston, cooled and then compressed fur-
ther by the next stage.
→ Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of piston compres-
sors.
[19] Axial flow compressor
Flow compressors produce large volumes of air at small increases

in stage pressure. The air is accelerated by the blades of the com-
pressor but there is only a small increase in pressure.
→ The kinetic energy is converted to pressure energy.
[20] Distribution
For ease of maintenance, repair or extension of the air network, it is

advisable to sub-divide the network into individual sections by
means of shut-off valves. Branches with T-pieces and manifolds
with plug-in couplings make it possible to supply additional con-
suming devices as the need arises.
→ To discharge condensate, the pipes should be inclined 1-2 %

and include water separators at low points.
[21] Absolute pressure and atmospheric pressure
Absolute pressure is calculated from the absolute zero mark. Below

atmospheric pressure the pressure is in the vacuum range. The
atmospheric pressure fluctuates but is approximately 100 kPa (1
bar).
→ Gauge pressure is normally that component above atmospheric

pressure and is not an absolute value.
22.3 Actuators
[22] Symbols for actuators, linear actuators
The single acting cylinder and the double acting cylinder form the
basis for design variations. The use of cushioning to reduce loads
on the end caps and mountings during deceleration of the piston is
important for long-life and smooth operation.
→ Refer to topics 25 - 30 for construction details.
[23] Symbols for actuators, rotary motion
Rotary actuators are divided into continuous motion and limited

angle of rotation. The air motor is normally a high speed device
with either fixed or adjustable speed control. Units with limited
angle of rotation are fixed or adjustable in angular distance. The
rotary actuator may be cushioned depending on the load and speed
of operation.
→ Refer to topics 34 and 35 for construction details.
[24] Control of a single acting cylinder
The position rod of a single acting cylinder is to move forward when

air is applied. A valve is to create a signal when a push-button is
released. The animation shows the operation of the push-button
and the extension of the cylinder. Pressure is maintained on the
piston until the push-button is released. The next stage shows
retraction of the cylinder and the release of air via the exhaust port
of the 3/2-way valve.
→ The topic can be used as an intermediate stage for explanation

of the related symbols.
[25] Single acting cylinder
The cylinder requires one pneumatic connection and an exhaust

port. The exhaust port must be clear of obstructions to ensure that
the piston is not restricted by the air passage. A filter is normally
fitted to the exhaust port.
→ Discuss the importance of selecting the size of the cylinder to

match the load conditions.
With single acting cylinders, compressed air is applied on only one

side of the piston face. The other side is open to atmosphere. The
cylinders can perform work in only one direction. The return move-
ment of the piston is effected by a built-in spring or by the applica-
tion of an external force. The spring force returns the piston to its
start position with a reasonably high speed under no load condi-
tions. The stroke is limited by the natural length of the spring.
Single acting cylinders are therefore only available in stroke lengths
of up to 100 mm.
→ Compare the construction with the double acting type. Discuss

the spring size and return speed.
[27] Control of a double acting cylinder
The 4/2-way directional control valve is suitable for the control of a

double acting cylinder. Normal practice is to use the 5/2-way valve.
The cylinder motion is controlled by air in both directions of motion.
The animation shows the advance and retraction sequences as
separate phases. The fully advanced position is related as long as
the push-button is actuated.
→ The topic can be used as an intermediate stage for explanation

of the related symbols.
[28] Double acting cylinder
Double acting cylinders are used particularly when the piston is

required to perform a work function in both directions of motion.
The construction is in general similar to the single acting cylinder.
→ Refer to the large number of variants, which result from the

different designs, materials, etc.
The first sequence shows the piston rod advancing. The second
stage the retraction. The speed of advance and retraction are fairly
constant under no load conditions.
→ Point at the positions of cylinder body, piston cover, cylinder

cover, piston seal, piston rod, bearing bush, and scraper ring.
[30] Cushioned double acting cylinder
If large masses are moved by a cylinder, cushioning is used in the

end positions. Before reaching the end position, a cushioning
piston interrupts the direct flow of air to the outside. For the last
part of the stroke the speed is slowed to reduce impact on the
cylinder.
→ Discuss the different concept of throttleling the exhausting air

by means of one-way flow control valve.
[31] Cylinder seals
The various piston seal arrangements are shown. The double-cup

seal materials used are, Perbunan for -20°{C} to +80°{C} Viton for -
20°{C} to +190°{C} Teflon for -80°{C} to +200°{C}.
→ Emphasize correct temperature range selection for reliability.
[32] Mounting arrangements for cylinders
The type of mounting is determined by the manner in which the

cylinder is to be fitted to a machine or fixture. The cylinder can be
designed with a permanent type of mounting if it does not have to
be altered at any time. Alternatively, the cylinder can utilize adjust-
able types of mounting which can be altered by using suitable
accessories on the modular construction principle.
→ Discuss application examples for each type of mounting.
[33] Tandem double acting cylinder
This design features the characteristics of two double acting cylin-

ders forming a single unit. This increases the effective piston area
of the unit for high force applications. It is suitable for applications
where a large force is required but the cylinder diameter is restrict-
ed.
→ Compare the double acting cylinder in topic 29.
[34] Semi-rotary actuator
The rotary actuator is compact with high torque ratings. The force is
transmitted to the drive shaft by a rotary vane. The range of angular
movement is adjustable with end stops. The angle can be adjusted
between 0° and 180°. The adjustable stop system is separate to the
rotary vanes. This allows force to be absorbed by the stop blocks.
At the end positions, impacts are cushioned by elastic cushioning
rings.
→ Discuss the mounting arrangements for the actuator. Discuss

applications for the rotary actuator.
[35] Air motor
Devices which transform pneumatic energy into mechanical rotary

motion, with the possibility of continuous motion. They are catego-
rized into the groups of piston motors, sliding vane motors, gear
motors and turbines.
→ Discuss applications for the air motor.
22.4 Directional control valves
[36] Symbols for directional control valves (1)
The directional control valve is represented by the number of ports

and the number of switching positions. Additional information is
required to fully describe the symbol function, including the meth-
ods of actuation and special flow path characteristics.
→ Compare the full range of symbols for directional control

valves.
[37] Symbols for directional valves (2)
Each valve position is shown as a separate square. The designation

of the ports is important when interpreting the circuit symbols and
the valve as fitted to the physical system.
→ Compare the full range of symbols for directional control

valves.
[38] Designation of connections
The designations for directional control valves are in accordance

with ISO 5599-3, edition 1990. Prior to this a lettering system was
utilized.
→ Discuss the examples and emphasize the numbering systems.
[39] Methods of actuation (1)
The methods of actuation of pneumatic directional control valves is

dependent upon the application. The methods of actuation include
manual, mechanical, pneumatic, electrical and combined.
→ Discuss the actuation and return actuation methods.
[40] Methods of actuation (2)
When applied to a directional control valve, consideration must be

given to the method of initial actuation of the valve and also the
method of return actuation. They are both shown on the symbol
either side of the position boxes. There may also be additional
methods such as manual overrides separately indicated.
→ Discuss the actuation and return actuation methods.
[41] 3/2-way valve, ball seat
A spring forces a hemisphere against the valve seat preventing the

compressed air from flowing from the air connection 1 to the work-
ing line 2. Initially port 1 is blocked and the output port 2 is ex-
hausted through the stem of the plunger. Actuation of the valve
plunger causes the sealing element to be forced away from the
seat. In doing this, the opposing force of the reset spring and that
generated from the compressed air must be overcome. The air
supply is then open to the output side of the valve and a signal is
generated.
→ Compare the symbol and the valve construction. Compare the

construction of the disc seat valve.
[42] 3/2-way valve, ball seat
The ball seat valve is compact with the possibility of fitting various
types of actuating heads. The limitation for directly actuated valves
is the force required to operate the stem. If the flow rate required is
very high, the valve ball will have a large working area. This re-
quires a large operating force. This limits the size of valve for this
design.
→ The load on the stem is dependent on the size of valve.
[43] 3/2-way valve, disc seat, normally closed
The valve is constructed on the disc seat principle. The response

time is short and a small movement results in a large area being
available for air flow. Valves of the single disc seat type are non-
overlapping. Using this topic, discuss the term “blocked normal
position”. When operated slowly, there is no loss of air. A 3/2-way
valve with flow blocked between ports 1 and 2 in the normal condi-
tion, is referred to as a normally closed valve. The valves are insen-
sitive to dirt and thus have a long service life. Explain the term
“non-overlapping” with this figure and the animation.
→ The animation sequence shows the operation of the 3/2 way

valve. The first sequence describes the actuation and the sup-
ply of a signal from 1 to 2. The second sequence shows the
closing of the disc seat and the release of air from 2 to 3 which
exhausts to atmosphere.
[44] 3/2-way valve, disc seat, normally open
A 3/2-way valve with free flow between ports 1 and 2 in the normal
condition, is referred to as normally open. Valves can be operated
manually, mechanically, electrically or pneumatically. The configu-
ration of the valve head is changed to meet the actuation method.
Upon operation of the actuating stem, the disc seat is sealed and
air supply port 1 is blocked. The air at port 2 is exhausted to at-
mosphere via port 3.
→ Note the change of construction compared to the normally

closed valve topic 43.
[45] 3/2-way valve, single pilot, normally closed
The pneumatically operated 3/2-way valve is operated by a directly

acting signal at port 12. This is referred to as a single pilot valve
since there is only one control signal and the valve has a spring
return. A signal is applied at port 12 and the valve plunger is moved
against the reset spring. The connections 1 and 2 are then inter-
connected creating a signal 2. The pressure at port 12 must be
sufficient to move the disc against the supply pressure.
→ Note the pneumatic symbol shows direct application of the

signal at port 12. Compare the construction of the valve to the
3/2-way disc seat valve topic 43.
[46] 3/2-way valve, single pilot
The valve ports are labeled to ensure the correct connections are
made. The pilot valve is available in a range of sizes depending
upon the flow rate.
→ Note the need to designate and label the ports.
[47] 3/2-way valve, internal pilot, roller operated
This type of valve can be used as either a normally closed valve or

as a normally open valve by exchanging connections 1 and 3 and
rotating the actuating head 180 degrees. The force required on the
roller lever is small due to the pilot operation.
→ Show the requirements to alter the valve configuration.
[48] 3/2-way valve, internal pilot, normally closed
To avoid high actuating force, mechanically controlled directional

valves can be equipped with an internal pilot valve to assist open-
ing. A small hole connects the pressure connection 1 and the pilot
valve. If the roller is operated, the pilot valve opens. Compressed
air flows to the main piston and actuates the main valve disc.
→ The symbol shows the roller operating a pilot signal.
[49] 4/2-way valve, disc seat
The valve is robust. Two stems directly operate the disc seats. The
load required to move the stems may be large for high flow rate
valves.
→ Compare the construction with the 3/2-way valve.
[50] 4/2-way valve, disc seat
The 4/2-way valve has four ports and two positions. A disc seat
4/2-way valve is similar in characteristic to the combination of two
3/2-way valves, one valve normally closed and the other normally
open. The plungers can be operated by an auxiliary mounted device
such as a roller lever or push-button. When the two plungers are
actuated simultaneously, 1 to 2 and 4 to 3 are closed by the first
movement. By pressing the valve plungers further against the
discs, opposing the reset spring force, the passages between 1 to 4
and from 2 to 3 are opened.
→ Show the similarities to the 3/2-way valve construction. Dis-

cuss the valve overlap.
[51] 4/3-way valve, mid-position closed
The 4/3-way valve has four ports and three positions. An example
of the 4/3-way valve is the plate slide valve with hand or foot
actuation. By turning two discs, channels are interconnected with
one another.
→ Compare the symbol with the valve construction.
[52] 5/2-way valve, longitudinal slide valve
The valve can be mounted onto a common sub-base for supply and
exhaust air. This compact arrangement also ensures adequate flow
is available to the valve.
→ Discuss the DIN ISO 5599/1 standard for 5 port valves.
[53] 5/2-way valve, longitudinal slide valve
The 5/2-way valve has five ports and two positions. The 5/2-way
valve is used for the control of cylinders primarily as a final control
element. In pneumatic valves, the gap between spool and housing
bore should not exceed 0.002–0.004 mm. The valve is shown here
with pilot pressure applied at port 12. To avoid damage to seals,
the ports can be distributed around the circumference of the hous-
ing. The actuation travel is considerably larger than with seat
valves. The valve is shown here with pilot pressure at 14.
→ Discuss the load conditions on the O-rings. Compare the con-

struction with the disc seat valve.
[54] 5/2-way valve, suspended disc seat
A method of sealing the 5/2-way valve is to use a suspended disc

seat with a relatively small switching movement. The disc seat seal
connects the 1 port to either the 2 port or the 4 port. The 5/2-way
double air pilot valve has the characteristic of memory control. The
last switched position is retained until a new switching position is
initiated by a unique pilot signal from the opposite side. There are
two manual override buttons to manually operate valve spool. The
animation shows the two switched positions. The air pilot signals
are applied from both directions. The manual override operations
are also shown. The manual overrides are used to manually actuate
the valve or initialize the valve position.
→ Compare the suspended disc seat construction to the longitu-

dinal slide principle topic 53. Explain the working principle of
the manual override button and its related diagram symbol.
[55] 5/3-way valve
The 5/3-way valve has five ports and three positions. Signals ap-
plied at ports 14 or 12 operate the valve. If the valve is not actuated
it is closed in the mid-position. After actuation via a pilot signal at
port 14 air flows from 1 to 4. Port 2 exhausts via 3. After actuation
via a pilot signal at port 12 air flows from 1 to 2. Port 4 exhausts via
port 5.
→ Show the three valve positions.
[56] Memory circuit, 5/2-way bistable valve
The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when a 3/2-

way push-button valve is actuated. The cylinder is to remain ex-
tended until a second push-button is actuated. The cylinder is to
then return to the initial position. The speed of the cylinder is to be
adjustable in both directions.
→ Discuss the memory characteristic of the bistable valve.
Signals initiated by the push-button signaling devices can be of

short or pulse duration due to the memory characteristics of the
bistable valve. Upon operation of push-button 1S1, a 1-signal is
generated at port 14 of the control valve 1V3. The 5/2-way memory
valve switches and the cylinder 1A1 advances.
→ The circuit is shown at the first operation of the button.
When the push-button 1S1 is released, the signal at port 14 is

exhausted. The valve 1V3 remains in the current position. The last
position is retained until a new input signal is given.
→ Compare the sequence of operation.
The valve 1V3 remains in the current position until the push-button
1S2 is operated. The cylinder then retracts. The cylinder remains
retracted until a new signal is generated at port 14 by the valve
1S1.
→ Compare the sequence of operation.
The flow control valves throttle the exhausting air in both directions
of piston motion. The cylinder remains retracted until a start signal
is generated at port 14 by the valve 1S1. The 5/2-way valve re-
mains in the current position with air supplied continuously to the
return side of the cylinder.
→ Discuss the situation when both 1S1 and 1S2 are operated
together.
[61] Direct control, unactuated
A single acting cylinder of 25 mm diameter is to clamp a component

when a push-button is pressed. As long as the push-button is
operated, the cylinder is to remain in the clamped position. Since
the cylinder is the only working element or actuator in the circuit, it
is designated 1A1. The final control element that advances the
cylinder is designated 1S1.
→ Discuss the circuit layout standard, numbering and operation.

Note the circuit is shown in the initial state.
[62] Indirect control (unactuated)
A large diameter single acting cylinder is to extend upon operation

of a push-button valve. The valve is situated at a remote and dis-
tant position. The cylinder is to retract once the remote push-
button is released. The signal at the pilot port 12 remains as long
as the push-button is held down. This is an indirect push-button
control of the cylinder. If the push-button is released, the spring
return closes the 3/2-way valve and removes the pilot signal at the
control valve.

Note the circuit is shown in the initial state.
[63] Exercise: Direct control of a double acting cylinder – Problem
A double acting cylinder is to advance when a push-button is oper-

ated. Upon release of the push-button, the cylinder is to retract.
The cylinder is of small bore (25 mm diameter) requiring a small
flow rate to operate at the correct speed.
[64] Exercise: Direct control of a double acting cylinder – Solution
The control valve for a double acting cylinder can be selected as a

4/2 way or a 5/2 way valve. In this case, since the cylinder has a
small capacity, the operation can be directly controlled by a push-
button control valve with spring return. On operating the push-
button, the air passes through the valve from port 1 to the port 4
and advances the piston rod. On release of the push-button, the
valve spring returns the control valve to its initial position and the
cylinder retracts. Air escapes from the cylinder via the exhaust port.
Since the cylinder is the only working element or actuator in the
circuit, it is designated 1A1. The final control element that advances
the cylinder is designated 1S1.
[65] Exercise: Direct control of a double acting cylinder – Note
→ If the push-button is pressed for a very short period, the cylin-

der only partially advances and then retracts, since the spring
resets the control valve as soon as the push-button is released.
In order to achieve full extension in this case, the push-button
must be held down until the cylinder moves fully forward.
[66] Exercise: Indirect control of a double acting cylinder – Prob-

lem
A double acting cylinder is to advance when a push-button is oper-

ated. Upon release of the push-button the cylinder is to retract. The
cylinder is 250 mm diameter and consumes a large volume of air.
For controlling cylinders at high speed or of large diameter large
size control valves should be used. The operating force to actuate
the valve may be relatively large and in this case indirect control is
preferable.
[67] Exercise: Indirect control of a double acting cylinder – Solu-

tion
Operating valve 1S1 supplies a pilot signal to port 14 of control

valve 1V1. This generates a 1-signal at the outlet 4 and the cylinder
advances. If the push-button is released the return signal is sup-
plied via port 2 of valve 1V1 and the return air is vented via exhaust
port 5. If the push-button is released before the cylinder fully ad-
vances, the cylinder immediately returns to the initial position. The
control valve requires a sustained signal for it to remain operated.
[68] Exercise: Indirect control of a double acting cylinder – Note
→ The supply line can be short since the control valve can be
mounted close to the cylinder. The other advantage is that the
signal element (i.e. push-button 3/2 way valve) can be small,
as it only provides a signal to operate the control valve and is
not required to operate the cylinder directly.
22.5 Shutoff valves
[69] Non-return valves
The non-return or check valve will open due to the supply pressure
exceeding the resistance of the spring (if fitted) and the inertia of
the valve. The non-return valve is the basis for development of
many combined components. The shuttle valve, two pressure valve
and quick exhaust valve incorporate features of the non-return
valve.
→ Indicate the valves that include the non-return function.
[70] Non return valve
Non return valves can stop the flow completely in one direction. In
the opposite direction the flow is free with a minimal pressure drop
due to the resistance of the valve. The one-way blocking action can
be effected by cones, balls, plates or diaphragms.
→ Discuss the relationship between pressure to open and the

spring size.
[71] Two pressure valve
The two pressure valve has two inputs 1 and one output 2. The two
pressure valve is used mainly for interlocking controls, safety
controls, check functions or logic operations. The application of a
signal at a single input produces no pressure at output 2. If pres-
sure is applied at both inputs 1, the signal which is last applied
passes to the output 2. The two pressure circuit is equivalent to
two input signaling devices in series, i.e. one after the other.
→ Refer to topics 72 - 74 for the circuit example. Discuss the

advantages of the shown solution against series connection.
[72] Circuit: Two pressure valve I
The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when a 3/2-

way push-button valve and a roller lever valve are actuated. If
either of the actuations is released, then the cylinder is to return to
the initial position.
[73] Circuit: Two pressure valve II
The inputs of the two pressure valve is connected to the outputs of

the two 3/2-way valves. Upon operation of the push-button 1S1, a
signal is generated at the left side of input 1 of the two pressure
valve. The signal is blocked by the two pressure valve. No output is
given at 2.
→ Discuss the logic function “AND”. Refer to the following topic

for additional conditions.
[74] Circuit: Two pressure valve III
If the roller lever valve 1S2 is also operated, then the two pressure
valve will produce a 1-signal at port 2 which operates the control
valve, via pilot port 1V1, against the return spring and the cylinder
advances.
→ Compare this topic to topic 73.
[75] Exercise: The logic AND function, the two pressure valve –
Problem
A transfer station removes a product from a conveyor belt. If the

product is detected as present and if the operator presses the
push-button, the pick-up cylinder 1A1 advances. The product is
sensed by a 3/2 way roller lever valve. Upon release of the push-
button, cylinder 1A1 is to retract to the initial position. The operat-
ing condition for the pick-up cylinder to advance is a logic AND
function between the product sensor and the operator push-
button. Therefore if a two pressure valve is used to combine the
signals from the sensor and push-button the logic conditions can
be met.
Solution
The two pressure valve is connected between the outlet lines of the
two 3/2 way valves. Operating the push-button, a 1-signal is gen-
erated at left input 1 of the two pressure valve. Once the part is
sensed as present, the 3/2 way roller valve generates a second 1-
signal, this time at the right input 1 of the two pressure valve. A
signal is passed through to port 2. This signal operates the control
valve pilot signal 14 against the spring return and the cylinder
advances. If either of the two signals created by the 3/2 way valves
is set to zero, the two pressure valve will release the 14 signal back
through the exhaust port of one of the 3/2 way valves. The return
spring in the control valve then switches the control valve to the
initial position. The control valve outlet port 2 is active and with
outlet port 4 exhausted to atmosphere the cylinder retracts. The
control valve can be a 4/2 or 5/2 way valve and can be sized to suit
the flow rate required for the cylinder speed.
Note
Discuss also the advantages of the shown solution against series

connection.
[78] Shuttle valve
This non-return element has two inputs 1 and one output 2. If

compressed air is applied to one input, the valve seat seals off the
opposing input and the air flows to the output 2. Note the similarity
in construction to the two pressure valve.
→ Compare the two pressure valve construction topic 71.
[79] Circuit: Shuttle valve I
If the condition states that either of two push-buttons are to ad-

vance a cylinder, the inexperienced designer may attempt to use a
junction for the output signals of 1S1 and 1S2. The circuit is not
functional due to the escape of air through the exhaust ports of the
valves.
→ Discuss the sequence of circuits for the shuttle valve.
[80] Circuit: Shuttle valve II
If push-button 1S1 is operated, the air escapes to atmosphere

through the exhaust port of 1S2. The air takes the easiest path and
the pressure will be very low and inadequate to operate the valve
1V1. This is an inadequate solution to the problem. A shuttle valve
is required.
→ Compare the topic with the previous one.
[81] Circuit: Shuttle valve III
The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when either

of two 3/2-way push-buttons are actuated. If both push-buttons
are then released, the cylinder is to retract. The shuttle valve is
incorporated at the junction and the circuit now functions correctly.
→ Note the function of the ball in the shuttle valve acting as a

non-return valve.
[82] Circuit: Shuttle valve IV
The shuttle valve is connected to the junction between the two 3/2-
way push-button valves. Upon operation of one of the push-
buttons, a signal is generated at the X or Y port of the shuttle valve
and an output signal is emitted at port 2. The cylinder advances.
→ Compare the topic with the previous one.
[83] Exercise: The logic OR function, the shuttle valve – Problem
A cylinder is used to transfer parts from a magazine. If either a

push-button or a foot pedal is operated, then the cylinder is to
advance. Once the cylinder has fully advanced, it is to retract to the
initial position. A 3/2 way roller lever valve is to be used to detect
forward end position of the cylinder.
[84] Exercise: The logic OR function, the shuttle valve – Solution
The shuttle valve is connected to the junction between the two

manual 3/2 way valves. Upon operation of one of the manual 3/2
way valves, a 1-signal is generated at either input 1 of the shuttle
valve. This signal passes through the shuttle valve and is emitted at
port 2. This operates the control valve via pilot port 14, and the
cylinder advances. A limit valve 1S2 senses that the cylinder has
fully extended. Pilot signal 2 from valve 1S2 actuates the 5/2 way
valve via port 12 and the cylinder retracts. The signal at port 12 is
only effective, if the opposing signal at port 14 is released. If both
of the signals produced via the push-button valves are set to zero,
then the shuttle valve will release the pilot signal 14 back through
the exhaust port of one of the 3/2 way valves. In other words, both
the push-button and the foot pedal must be inactive for retraction
to occur. The control valve can be a 4/2 way or 5/2 way valve and
can be sized to suit the flow rate required for the cylinder speed.
[85] Exercise: The logic OR function, the shuttle valve – Note
→ The necessity of the shuttle valve can be explained with topic

79.
[86] Quick exhaust valve
To reduce resistance to flow, the air is expelled to atmosphere

through a large orifice thus increasing cylinder piston speed. The
valve is normally silenced so as to reduce exhaust air noise.
[87] Quick exhaust valve
Quick exhaust valves are used to increase the piston speed of

cylinders. Lengthy return times can be avoided, particularly with
single acting cylinders. To reduce resistance to flow, the air is
expelled to atmosphere close to the cylinder and through a large
orifice. In the direction 1 to 2 the air is passed freely via the open-
ing of the non-return seal. Port 3 is blocked by the disc. If air is
supplied to port 2, the disc seals port 1. Air is expelled to atmos-
phere through the large orifice 3. Mount the quick exhaust valve
directly on the cylinder, or as near as possible.
→ Refer to topic 88 for the circuit example.
[88] Circuit: Quick exhaust valve
A cylinder piston rod is to travel at an increased speed, utilizing the

quick exhaust valve. The forward motion of the piston rod is assist-
ed by the release of exhausting air at the quick exhaust valve. The
return stroke is unchanged due to the bypass non-return valve.
→ Refer to topic 70 for construction of the valve.
[89] Exercise: The quick exhaust valve – Problem
A cylinder advances a forming tool on an edge-folding device. If a

sheet is detected as present and if a push-button is pressed, then
the cylinder is to advance. For rapid forward travel, the circuit
utilizes a quick exhaust valve. The forward movement folds the
edge of a flat sheet. If the push-button is released, the double
acting cylinder is to return slowly to the initial position.
[90] Exercise: The quick exhaust valve – Solution
Initial position: In the initial state, the cylinder assumes the retract-
ed position. If both of the 3/2 way valves are actuated, pressure is
present at the output port 2 of the two pressure valve 1V4. This
reverses the 5/2 way control valve. The cylinder advances with air
being supplied via an unrestricted passage through the one-way
flow control valve 1V1. The actuator travels rapidly to its forward
end position since the pressure space on the piston rod side is
rapidly exhausted through the quick exhaust valve. If both 3/2 way
valves remain actuated, the cylinder remains in the forward end
position. If the push-button is released, the actuator is no longer
pressurized, since the control valve reverses via the return spring.
The actuator travels to its initial position under conditions of re-
stricted flow (valve 1V1) and therefore at a reduced speed.
[91] Exercise: The quick exhaust valve – Note
→ The quick exhaust valve should be fitted as near as possible to

the connection of the cylinder to reduce resistance to flow.
22.6 Flow control valves
[92] Flow control valves
Most flow control valves are adjustable. If the non-return valve is

fitted, then the element is a one-way flow control valve.
→ Discuss the flow in both directions in both cases.
[93] One-way flow control valve
The valve is generally mounted as close to the cylinder as possible.

The valve is usually provided with a locking nut to allow finite
adjustments to be regulated and then set.
[94] One-way flow control valve
One-way flow control valves influence the volumetric flow of the

compressed air. One-way flow control valves are normally adjusta-
ble and the setting can be locked in position. The influence of
speed control is in one direction only. The first sequence of the
animation shows the total cross section of the one-way flow control
valve. The animation will be shown in detail by zooming into the air
passage area.
→ Refer to topic 96 for the circuit example.
[95] Throttle valve
Throttle valves are normally adjustable and the setting can be

locked in position. These valves are used to regulate the speed
regulation of actuators and if possible, should be mounted directly
on the cylinder.
→ Compare the flow control with throttle valves and one-way flow
control valve topic 94.
[96] Supply and exhaust air throttling
Exhaust air throttling should be used with double acting cylinder

circuits. For supply air throttling, the flow valves are installed so
that the air entering the cylinder is throttled. With exhaust air
throttling, the supply air flows freely to the cylinder and the exhaust
air is throttled.
→ Discuss the numbering system. Even numbers relate to advanc-

ing signals and odd numbers to the retracting signals.
22.7 Pressure control valves
[97] Pressure control valves
The pressure control valves are generally adjustable against a

compression spring. The sensing line for regulators is at the valve
outlet and for sequence valves the sensing is before the valve, i.e.
that pressure which is to be measured.
→ Compare the sensing line positions and flow arrows.
[98] Adjustable pressure sequence valve
The adjusting screw normally incorporates a look nut to set the

desired position. The valve body is fitted to a sub-base which can
frame mounted with other compact valves.
→ Some applications for the valve are clamping, pressing, gluing

and safety interlocks.
[99] Adjustable pressure sequence valve (unactuated)
Sequence valves are installed in pneumatic controls where a specif-

ic pressure is required for a switching operation. The output signal
is transmitted only after the required operation pressure has been
reached. If the signal pressure at port 12 exceeds that set on the
spring, the valve opens. Outlet port 2 is opened only if a preset
pressure has built up in pilot line 12. A pilot spool opens the pas-
sage between ports 1 to 2.
→ Discuss the two elements in the control symbol. Discuss the
adjustment required to set the desired operation pressure. A
pressure gauge is required.
[100] Circuit: Pressure sequence valve
A plastic component is embossed using a die powered by a double

acting cylinder. The die is to advance and emboss the plastic when
a push-button is operated. The return of the die is to be effected
when a preset pressure is reached. The pressure is to be adjusta-
ble.
[101] Exercise: Pressure dependent control, embossing of plastic

– Problem
A plastic component is embossed using a die and a double acting

cylinder. The die is to advance and emboss the plastic when a
push-button is operated. The return of the die is to occur when the
cylinder rod has fully advanced to the embossing position and a
preset pressure is reached. A roller limit valve is to be used to
confirm full extension. The embossing pressure is adjustable and is
indicated on a pressure gauge.

– Solution
The cylinder advances if valve 1V1 is switched by push-button valve

1S1. The pressure on the advancing side of the cylinder is fed from
a junction to the limit valve 1S2 and then in series to the sequence
valve. The signal port 12 at the sequence valve acts against the
preset compression of the adjustable spring. If the limit valve 1S2
is operated due to full extension of the cylinder and the preset
value is reached, then the sequence valve opens from 1 to 2 and
sends a pilot signal to port 12 of the control valve 1V1. The memory
valve switches and the cylinder retracts. At the same time the air
from port 4 is exhausted and the pilot signal at the sequence valve
is relieved through the limit valve.

– Note
→ If the pressure does not reach the preset limit, then the cylin-
der will remain advanced. If the cylinder is obstructed during
extension to the forward position, the cylinder will not retract
due to the dependency upon operation of the limit vale 1S2.
The power circuit must be initialized by operating the 5/2 way
memory valve manually (via the manual overrides) with the air
off. The air can then be turned on.
22.8 Time delay valve
[104] Time delay valve, normally closed
The valve has a lock-able adjusting screw for setting time. The valve
is sized to meet the flow requirements.
→ Discuss the accuracy of the time delay valve.
[105] Time delay valve, normally closed
The time delay valve is a combinational valve consisting of a 3/2-

way valve, throttle relief valve and an air reservoir. The 3/2-way
valve can be a valve with normal position open or closed. The delay
time is generally 0-30 seconds for both types of valves. By using
additional reservoirs, the time can be extended. When the neces-
sary control pressure from 12 has built up in the air reservoir, the
pilot spool of the 3/2-way valve is actuated. An accurate switch-
over time is assured if the air is clean and the pressure constant.
→ Discuss the need for clean and stable air for accuracy. Discuss
the relationship between time delay and the reservoir size.
[106] Circuit: Time delay valve
A double acting cylinder is to glue components. The push-button

operates the clamping cylinder and trips a roller lever valve. The
cylinder is to remain fully extended for a time of 6 seconds and then
immediately retracts to the initial position. A new start cycle is only
possible after the cylinder has fully retracted. The cylinder advance
is to be slow and the retraction adjustable but fast.
[107] Exercise: The time delay valve – Problem
A double acting cylinder is used to press together glued compo-

nents. Upon operation of a push-button, the clamping cylinder
advances and trips a roller lever valve. Once the forward end posi-
tion is reached, the cylinder is to remain for 6 seconds and then
immediately retract to the initial position. A new start cycle is only
possible after the cylinder has fully retracted and after a delay of 5
seconds. The cylinder extension is to be slow and the retraction
adjustable, but relatively fast.
[108] Exercise: The time delay valve – Solution
The start conditions are the actuation of roller limit valve 1S3, a
delay of 5 seconds after the end of cycle and the operation of 1S1.
The two pressure valve 1V4 actuates the 5/2 way memory valve at
port 14. The cylinder advances at a preset speed via the flow con-
trol valve 1V2. The limit switch 1S3 is deactivated and therefore
even if the start button is still held, the signal at port 14 is exhaust-
ed by the removal of the limit switch signal, which resets the timer
1V6 until the cylinder has retracted again. The cylinder reaches the
limit valve 1S2 and produces a pilot signal for the time delay valve
1V5. The time delay valve opens port 2 if the preset time is reached.
A pilot signal is produced 6 seconds after the limit valve 1S2 is
operated. The 5/2 way valve switches to the initial position and the
cylinder retracts and with speed controlled by the valve 1V1. The
roller limit valve 1S2 is deactivated and the pilot signal to the timer
1V5 is cut-off, removing the signal at port 12 of the 5/2 way valve.
[109] Exercise: The time delay valve – Note
→ The memory valve must be positioned manually before air is

supplied to the circuit to ensure that the cylinder will be re-
tracted initially.
[110] Exercise: Memory circuit and speed control of a cylinder –

Problem
A double acting cylinder is to fully advance when a push-button is

actuated and to retract after full extensions is reached (confirmed
by a roller lever valve). The cylinder is to continue forward even if
the push-button is released. Speed of the cylinder is to be adjusta-
ble.

Solution
Operating the push-button 1S1 then advances the cylinder 1A1.

Operation of valve 1V3 produces pressure at port 14 which switch-
es the air to port 4. Once the cylinder travels to the limit valve 1S2,
a pilot signal is sent to port 12 of the control valve switching the
control valve if the push-button valve is released. If the push-
button is held operated after the cylinder has fully advanced, it will
remain advanced until valve 1S1 is released. The final control
element 1V3 is a memory valve and the last position is retained
until a unique opposing signal is received. The speed of advance
and retraction is controlled by the throttle valves 1V1 and 1V2 and
in both cases the speed control is by exhaust air throttling. If the
roller lever valve is fitted at the mid-stroke position of the cylinder,
it will advance up to the limit valve and then retract.

Note
The memory control valve 1V3 when first fitted could be in either of
two positions 14 or 12. It is not easy to predict the position of the
valve when fitted. If a manual override button is available the valve
should be manually set to the 12 position before turning on the air
to ensure that the cylinder remains retracted initially.
22.9 Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit
[113] Sequential circuit, distance-step diagram
Confirmation is required that cylinder 2A1 is retracted before start

of the cycle. The sequence is, A+ B+ A- B-. The valves 2S2 and 1S3
are initially operated. There is no signal overlap at the final control
elements 1V2 and 2V2.
→ Discuss the relationship between the circuit and the distance-

step diagram.
[114] Sequential circuit
A sequential circuit has the following characteristics; when a 3/2-

way push-button valve is operated, cylinder 1A1 extends. Confirma-
tion is required at each step of the sequence. The sequence is A+
B+ A- B-.
→ There is no signal overlap with the circuit.
[115] Signal overlap circuit I
It is necessary to identify the points in the circuit where signal

overlap occurs on the 5/2-way valves 1V2 and 2V2. With this dis-
tance step diagram the circuit design using roller valves cannot
operate due to signal overlap.
→ Refer to the next topics for the overlap conditions.
[116] Signal overlap circuit II
The first overlap condition occurs at the start. The pilot signals at
the valve 1V2 from the valves 1S3 and 1S2 are opposed. The bista-
ble valve cannot move due to overlap.
→ Discuss the options for removal of overlap.
[117] Signal overlap circuit III
The second overlap condition occurs in the third step. The valve
2V2 has signals generated by 2S1 and 2S2 opposing each other
and causing a signal overlap condition.
→ Review the control diagram topic 118.
[118] Control diagram, signal overlap
The first control valve 1V2 has an overlap problem in the first step.
The first of these signals must be out short and therefore valve 1S2
could be an idle return roller lever valve. The second overlap prob-
lem is with valve 2V2 in step 3, when the cylinder 2A1 is fully ad-
vanced. Valve 2S1 could be an idle return roller valve only active in
step 2 for a short duration.
→ Idle return roller valves are not a recommended solution.
[119] Idle return roller valve solution
The idle return roller limit switch can be used to remove the signal
overlap points, i.e. replace the roller lever limit switches identified,
with an idle return roller lever valve. Valves 1S2 and 2S1 generated
the signal overlap and therefore these valves should be idle return
roller valves.
→ Idle return roller valves are not a recommended solution.
[120] Reversing valve solution
An alternative method of shortening the duration of signals is to

remove the air supply to the two signal valves, except at the steps
required. Using the reversing valve 1V2, lines S1 and S2 can be
activated consecutively and the signals are prevented from over-
lapping at the memory valves 1V1 and 2V1.
→ Emphasize the increased reliability of the circuit.
22.10 Educational Films
22.10.1 Educational Films
No. Title Length

1 Introduction 2:42
2 Fundamentals: Structure of hybrid systems 4:32
3 Fundamentals: Fundamentals of electricity 10:26
4 Sensors and relays – Signals 0:48
5 Sensors and relays – Sensors 3:24
6 Sensors and relays – Pressure switches 2:41
7 Sensors and relays – Relays 3:34
8 Solenoid valves 2:48
9 Solenoid valves: Double-solenoid valves 1:47
10 Solenoid valves: Pilot control 3:58
11 Pilot control: Circuit-diagram conventions 4:14
12 Pilot control: Hard-wired controllers 4:58
13 Pilot control: Programmable Logic Control- 2:25
lers
22.11 Standard Presentations
For several topics useful presentations have been provided within

FluidSIM. The following table lists the titles of the predefined
presentations.
22.11.1 Presentations
Presentation Title
All topics sorted by number
Basics
Supply elements
Actuators
Directional control valves
Shutoff valves
Flow control valves
Pressure control valves
Time delay valve
Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit
Educational films
Didactics Material Survey (Hydraulics)
Chapter 23
23. Didactics Material Survey (Hydra ulics)
This chapter provides a comprehensive listing of those parts of the

didactics material in FluidSIM that are not covered by chapter The
Component Library “The Component Library”. Basically, this mate-
rial consists of the components' behavior illustrations, the anima-
tions, the exercises, and the educational films, which all can be
activated under the Didactics menu. The subsequent sections
are arranged thematically. The icon indicates that an animation
exists for the related topic. The last section gives an overview of the
educational films.
23.1 Applications
[1] Lathe
Machine-tool construction is a typical area of application of hydrau-

lics. With modern CNC machine tools, the tools and workpieces are
clamped by hydraulic means. Feed motions and the spindle drive
can also be hydraulically powered.
→ This can also serve as an example of hydraulic circuit with two

pressure ranges, for example, 3 MPa (30 bar) for machining
and 9 MPa (90 bar) for clamping.
[2] Press with elevated reservoir
This is an application in which extremely high forces are required.

Due to the suspended cylinder and the tractive load, special
measures are required for the activation of the advance stroke.
This in turn requires specially-designed press drives.
→ A special feature is the elevated reservoir, which utilizes the

static pressure in the pressure medium.
[3] Mobile hydraulics: Excavator
On this hydraulic excavator, not only all working movements (linear

drives) but also the propulsion of the vehicle (rotary drive) are
hydraulically powered. The primary drive of the excavator is an
internal-combustion engine.
→ A model calculation can be used here to demonstrate an ad-

vantage of hydraulics - large forces with relatively small com-
ponents.
23.2 Components of a Hydraulic Plant
[4] Structure of a hydraulic system
This simplified block diagram shows the division of hydraulic sys-

tems into a signal control section and a hydraulic power section.
This signal control section is used to activate the valves in the
power control section.
→ The material depicted in these electronic slides is concerned in

the main with the hydraulic power section and the three “lev-
els” of this which are shown.
[5] Hydraulic power section
The diagram of the hydraulic power section is complemented in this

case by a circuit diagram to allow correlation of the various function
groups; the power supply section contains the hydraulic pump and
drive motor and the components for the preparation of the hydrau-
lic fluid. The energy control section consists of the various valves
used to provide control and regulate the flow rate, pressure and
direction of the hydraulic fluid. This drive section consists of cylin-
ders or hydraulic motors, depending on the application in question.
[6] Block diagram of a control system
In analyzing and planning an actual control task, it can be helpful to

use a differentiated block diagram showing the actual levels to be
found on the machine.
→ The light arrows show the signal flow, while the solid dark
arrows show the energy flow.
[7] Interaction of components
The animations show the sequences in a basic hydraulic circuit in

simplified form - the actuation and spring return of the final control
element (4/2-way valve), the advance and return of the drive com-
ponent (double acting cylinder) and the opening and closing of the
pressure relief valve.
→ The representations of the actuator and final control element

are based on the relevant circuit symbols. This can be used as
a preparation for the introduction of circuit symbols.
[8] Action related numbering
First of all the control chain is numbered sequentially according to

the principle. The first actuator is given the supplementary num-
ber.0 and the associated final control element the supplementary
number.1. The remaining elements get even numbers if they influ-
ence the advance stroke and uneven numbers if they influence the
return stroke.
→ The numbering should always be entered in the circuit diagram

and also on the machine to enable systematic fault-finding.
[9] Numbering in accordance with DIN ISO 1219-2
The DIN ISO Standard 1219-2 defines the code structure of the
components as a string consisting of the following four parts:
number of the plant, number of the circuit, component designation,
and component number. If the entire system consists of a single
plant only, the plant number may be dropped.
[10] Numbering in accordance with parts list
Another method used in practice is to number all the components

in a hydraulic system consecutively. The numbers then correspond
to the numbers in the parts list.
→ This method is used particularly with complex controls sys-

tems, for which a control-chain-related numbering system can
not be used due the overlaps involved.
23.3 Symbols
[11] Circuit symbols for energy transfer (1)
The symbols shown are used in circuit diagrams for energy transfer
and hydraulic-fluid preparation.
→ In the interests of clarity, the lines in the circuit diagram should

be drawn without cross-overs as far as possible.
[12] Circuit symbols for energy transfer (2)
The direction of the arrows in the circuit symbols for the heater and
cooler correspond to the direction of heat flow.
[13] Circuit symbols for energy conversion
Hydraulic pumps are shown by a circle with a part representation of

a drive shaft. Triangles in the circles show the direction of flow. The
triangles are shown solid, since pressure fluid is used in hydraulics.
→ If the pressure medium is gaseous, as in the case of pneumat-

ics, the triangles are shown in outline.
[14] Circuit symbols for hydraulic motors
The symbols for hydraulic motors are distinguished from the sym-
bols for hydraulic pumps by the fact that the arrows showing the
direction of flow are the other way round.
[15] Circuit symbols for single acting cylinders
Single acting cylinders have one port, i.e. pressure fluid can be
applied only to the piston side. With these cylinders, the return
stroke is produced either by external force, shown in the symbol by
an opening bearing cap, or by a spring is shown within the symbol
in this latter case.
[16] Circuit symbols for double acting cylinders
Double acting cylinders have two ports to allow pressure fluid to be

applied to both cylinder chambers. The symbol for a differential
cylinder is distinguished from the symbol for a double acting cylin-
der by the two lines added to the end of the piston rod. The area
ratio is generally 2:1. In the case of cylinders with double- ended
piston rods, the symbol shows that the piston areas are of equal
size (synchronous cylinders).
[17] Circuit symbols for directional control valves (1)
Designations for directional control valves always give firstly the

number of ports and then the number of switching positions. Direc-
tional control valves always have at least two ports and at least two
switching positions. The number of squares shows the number of
possible switching positions of a valve. Arrows within the squares
show the direction of flow. Lines shown how the ports are intercon-
nected in the various switching positions of the valve. The designa-
tions always relate to the normal position of the valve.
This illustration shows the circuit symbols for 4/2- and 5/2-way
valves.
→ There are two general methods for the designation of ports,

using either the letters P, T, R, A, B and L or consecutively using
A, B, C, D etc.; the first method is the preferred one in the rele-
vant standard.
The illustration shows the circuit symbols for 4/3-way valves with
various mid-positions.
[20] Circuit symbols for manual operation
The switching position of a directional control valve can be changed

by various actuation methods. The symbol for the valve is accord-
ingly supplemented by a symbol indicating the actuation methods
shown, such as pushbuttons and pedals, a spring is always neces-
sary for resetting. Resetting can, however, also be achieved by
actuating the valve a second time, for example in the case of valves
with hand levers and detents.
→ The various actuating methods possible are listed in DIN ISO

1219.
[21] Circuit symbols for mechanical actuation
This illustration shows the symbols for stem or push button, spring
and roller stem.
[22] Circuit symbol for pressure valves
Pressure valves are represented using squares. The flow direction

is indicated by an arrow. The valve ports can be designated as P
(supply port) and T (tank return port) or as A and B. The position of
the arrow within the square indicates whether the valve is normally
open or normally closed. Adjustable pressure valves are indicated
by a diagonal arrow through the spring. Pressure valves are divided
into pressure relief valves and pressure regulators.
[23] Circuit symbols for flow control valves
A distinction is made in flow control valves between types which

are affected by viscosity and those which are unaffected. Flow
control valves unaffected by viscosity are termed orifices. A 2-way
flow control valve consists of restrictors, one adjustable restrictor
which is unaffected by viscosity (orifice) and a regulating restrictor
(pressure compensator). These valves are represented by a rectan-
gle containing the symbol for the adjustable restrictor and an arrow
to represent the pressure compensator. The diagonal arrow
through the rectangle indicates that the valve is adjustable.
[24] Circuit symbols for non-return valves
The symbol for non-return valves is a ball which is pressed against

a seat. Delockable non-return valves are shown by a square con-
taining the symbol for a non- return valve. The pilot control for
unlocking the non- return valve is indicated by a broken line at the
pilot port. The pilot port is designated by the letter X.
[25] Circuit symbols for measuring devices
The illustration shows the symbols for measuring devices used in

hydraulics.
23.4 Some Physical Fundamentals
[26] Hydrostatic pressure
Hydrostatic pressure is the pressure created above a certain level

within a liquid as a result of the weight of the liquid mass. Hydro-
static pressure is not dependent on the shape of the vessel con-
cerned but only on the height and density of the column of liquid.
→ Hydrostatic pressure can generally be ignored for the purpose

of studying hydraulics (exception: see topic 2).
[27] Pressure propagation
If a force F acts on an area A of an enclosed liquid, a pressure p is

produced which acts throughout the liquid (Pascal’s Law).
→ Hydrostatic pressure has been ignored here. The term pressure
propagation is also used to mean the pulse velocity in liquids
(approx. 1000 m/s).
[28] Power transmission
If a force F_1 is applied to an area A_1 of a liquid, a pressure p

results. If, as in this case, the pressure acts on a larger surface A_2,
then a larger counter-force F_2 must be maintained. If A_2 is three
times as large as A1, then F_2 will also be three times as large as
F_1.
→ Hydraulic power transmission is comparable to the mechanical

law of levers.
[29] Displacement transmission (1)
If the input piston of the hydraulic press travels a distance s_1, a

volume of fluid will be displaced. This same volume displaces the
output piston by the distance s_2. If the area of this piston is larger
than that of the input piston, the distance s_2 will be shorter than
s_1.
→ Hydraulic displacement transmission is comparable to the

mechanical law of levers.
[30] Displacement transmission (2)
See topic 29
[31] Pressure transfer (1)
The fluid pressure p_1 exerts a force F_1 on the surface A_1 which
is transferred via the piston rod to the small piston. The force F_1
thus acts on the surface A_2 and produces the fluid pressure p2.
Since the piston area A_2 is smaller than the piston area A_1, the
pressure p_2 must be larger than the pressure p_1.
→ The pressure-transfer (pressure-intensification) effect is put to
practical use in pneumatic/hydraulic pressure intensifiers and
also in purely hydraulic systems when extremely high pres-
sures are required which a pump cannot deliver.
[32] Pressure transfer (2)
A pressure-transfer effect also occurs in conventional double acting

cylinders with single piston rod.
→ This effect also causes problems in hydraulics. If, for example,

an exhaust flow control is fitted to a differential cylinder for the
advance stroke, a pressure- intensification effect results in the
piston-rod chamber.
[33] Types of flow
A distinction is made between laminar flow and turbulent flow. In

the case of laminar flow, the hydraulic fluid moves through the pipe
in ordered cylindrical layers. If the flow velocity of the hydraulic
fluid rises above a critical speed, the fluid particles at the center of
the pipe break away to the side, and turbulence results.
→ Turbulent flow should be avoided in hydraulic circuits by ensur-

ing they are adequate sized.
[34] Diesel effect
A pressure drop to the level of vacuum may occur at points of

restriction, causing precipitation of the air dissolved in the oil.
When the pressure rises again, oil bursts into the gas bubbles and
spontaneous ignition of the oil/air mixture may occur.
[35] Cavitation
Motion energy is required for an increase in the flow velocity of the

oil at a restriction. This motion energy is derived from the pressure
energy. If the vacuum which results is smaller than -30 kPa (-0.3
bar), air dissolved in the oil is precipitated out. When the pressure
rises again due to a reduction in speed, the oil bursts into the gas
bubbles.
→ Cavitation is a significant factor in hydraulic systems as a cause

of wear in devices and connections.
[36] Cavitation
Local pressure peaks occur during cavitation. This causes the

erosion of small particles from the wall of the pipe immediately
after the reduced cross-section, leading to material fatigue and
often also to fractures. This effect is accompanied by considerable
noise.
[37] Input and output power
Various losses occur at the individual devices within a hydraulic

control chain. These consist essentially of mechanical, electrical
and volumetric losses.
→ After an installation has been in service for some time, there

will be a change in particular in the volumetric efficiency of the
pump, as the result, for example, of cavitation (see topic 35).
23.5 Components of a Power Unit
[38] Hydraulic power unit
The hydraulic power unit (power supply unit) provides the energy
required for the hydraulic installation. Its most important compo-
nents are the reservoir (tank) , drive (electric motor), hydraulic
pump, pressure relief valve (safety valve), filter and cooler. The
hydraulic power unit may also act as a carrier for other devices
(gauges, directional control valves).
[39] Hydraulic power unit: Reservoir
The hydraulic reservoir contains the hydraulic fluid required the

operate the installation. Within the reservoir, air, water and solid
matter are separated out of the hydraulic fluid.
→ The size of the reservoir will depend on the practical applica-

tion involved; for stationary systems, the volume of fluid deliv-
ered by the pump in 3 to 5 minutes can be taken as a guide. In
mobile hydraulic systems, on the other hand, the reservoir con-
tains only the maximum quantity of hydraulic fluid required.
[40] Externally toothed gear pump
The increase in volume which results when a tooth moves out of

mesh produces a vacuum in the suction area. The hydraulic fluid is
conveyed into the pressure area. The hydraulic fluid is then forced
out of the tooth gaps by the meshing of the teeth and displaced
into the above supply line.
[41] Internally toothed gear pump
The inner gear is driven by a motor. The teeth of the inner wheel
drive the outer gear wheel. The rotary motion creates a vacuum in
the gaps between the teeth, causing hydraulic fluid to be sucked in.
On the other side, the teeth engage once more and oil is displaced
from the tooth chambers.
→ The design can deliver pressures of up to approx. 17.5 MPa

(175 bar). Hydraulic motors represent the reverse of the func-
tion principle.
[42] Circuit diagram: Return flow filter
An oil filter situated in the return line to the tank has the advantage
that the filter is thus easy to maintain. A disadvantage, however, is
that contamination is removed from the hydraulic fluid only after it
has passed through the hydraulic components.
→ This configuration is often used.
[43] Circuit diagram : Pump inlet filter
With this configuration, the pump is protected from contamination.

The filter is, on the other hand, less easily accessible.
→ If these filters have a too fine mesh, suction problems and

cavitation effects may occur. Additional coarse filters upstream
of the pump are recommended.
[44] Circuit diagram: Pressure line filter
Pressure filters can be installed selectively upstream of valves

which are sensitive to contamination; this also enables smaller
mesh sizes to be used.
→ A pressure-resistant housing is required, which makes this

configuration more expensive.
[45] Circuit diagram: Contamination indicator
It is important that the effectiveness of a filter can be checked by a

contamination indicator. The contamination of a filter is measured
by the pressure drop; as the contamination increases, the pressure
upstream of the filter increases. The pressure acts on a spring-
loaded piston. As the pressure increases, the piston is pushed
against a spring.
→ There are a number of different display methods. Either the
piston movement is directly visible or it is converted into an
electrical or visual indication by electrical contacts.
[46] Water cooler
With this design of cooler, hydraulic fluid is fed through tubes over
which coolant (water) flows. The heat which is discharged can be
re-used.
→ The operating temperature in hydraulic installations should not

exceed 50 - 60°{C}, since this would cause an unacceptable re-
duction in viscosity, leading to premature aging of the fluid. In
comparison with air cooling, operating costs a higher due to
the required coolant and the susceptibility to corrosion. Tem-
perature difference of up to approx. 35°{C} can be handled.
[47] Air cooler
Hydraulic fluid from the return line flows through a coiled pipe
which is cooled by a fan.
→ The advantages here are simplicity of installation and low

operating costs. The noise of the fan may be a nuisance (see
also topic 46).
[48] Heating element
Heaters are often required to ensure that the optimum operating

temperature is reached quickly. Heating elements or flow preheat-
ers are used for heating and pre-heating hydraulic fluid.
→ If the viscosity is to high, the resulting increase in friction and

cavitation leads to greater wear.
[49] Circuit diagram: Hydraulic power unit
The illustration shows the detailed circuit symbol for a hydraulic

power unit.
→ Since this is an combination unit, a dot/dash line is placed
around the symbols representing the individual units.
23.6 Fundamentals of Valves
[50] Actuating force
With some types of poppet valves, the actuating force, which is

dependent on pressure and area, may be very high. In order to
avoid this, pressure compensation may be provided at the valves.
[51] Poppet principle
Valves are based either on the poppet principle or slide principle. In

poppet valves, a ball, a cone or a disc is pressed by a spring against
the seat of a passage. The high pressure per unit area which is
created, means that valves of this kind provide a very efficient seal.
The illustration shows a cone used as a sealing element.
[52] Slide principle
This illustration shows the principle of a longitudinal slide valve. In

order to allow the piston to move, it has a certain clearance and
floats in hydraulic fluids. Ring grooves ensure an even film of oil
and thus pressure equilibrium. The piston can thus be moved with
minimal frictional losses.
→ This type of valve cannot provide a perfect seal, which means

that there is always a certain oil leakage.
[53] Poppet valves
In poppet valves, a ball, cone or occasionally a disk is pressed

against a seat area to act as a sealing element. Valves of this type
provide a very efficient seal.
[54] Piston overlap
The switching characteristics of a valve are governed by, among

other things, its piston overlap. A distinction is made between
positive, negative and zero overlap. In the case of positive overlap,
the port in question is completely covered by the piston, while with
negative overlap it is less than completely covered. In the case of
zero overlap, the distances between the control edges of the piston
and of the port are exactly the same.
→ The individual control edges of the pilot piston can have differ-
ent overlaps.
[55] Negative switching overlap
In the case of negative overlap, flow from A to T is not quite closed

when the inlet P is opened. This means that the pressure at port A
rises slowly and the piston starts gently.
→ In manufacturers' data sheets, overlap positions are shown

within dotted lines between the switching positions, or the
overlap positions are shown in color or with a patterned back-
ground.
[56] Positive switching overlap
In the case of positive overlap, the left-hand piston does not open
the passage from P to A until the tank has been completely isolated
by the other piston. Pressure is immediately fed to the load device
(cylinder or hydraulic motor) with the result that this starts abrupt-
ly.
[57] Control edges
The control edges of the pistons are often either sharp, chamfered
or notched. The profiling of the control edges means that the throt-
tling action of the flow when switching is gradual rather than ab-
rupt.
→ See also the example in topic 144.
[58] Vertical interconnection system
Vertical interconnection systems (“modular hydraulics”) mean that

less space is required and that no piping is needed between the
components. The circuit symbols directly marked on the compo-
nents give greater clarity in the installation.
23.7 Pressure Valves
[59] Pressure relief valve (1)
In this design incorporating a poppet valve, a seal is pressed

against the inlet port P by a pressure spring when the valve is in its
normal position.
→ In this situation, for example, an unloaded piston rod is execut-

ing an advance stroke and the entire pump delivery is flowing
to the cylinder.
[60] Pressure relief valve (2)
As soon as the force exerted by the inlet pressure at A exceeds the

opposing spring force, the valve begins to open.
→ In this situation, for example, the piston rod is fully advanced;
the entire pump delivery is flowing at the preset system pres-
sure to the tank.
[61] PRV used to limit system pressure
This illustration shows a pressure relief valve within a basic hydrau-

lic circuit (used to control a double acting cylinder).
→ The resistances at the outlet (tank line, filter) must be added to

the force of the spring in the pressure relief valve. See also the
animation “Interaction of components” (topic 7).
[62] Circuit diagram: PRV used to limit system pressure
This illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration,

but with the cut-away view of the PRV replaced by the appropriate
circuit symbol.
[63] Circuit without brake valve
One application of pressure relief valves is as brake valves; these

prevent pressure peaks which may otherwise occur as the result of
mass moments of inertia when a directional control valve is sud-
denly closed. The animation shows an (incorrect) circuit in schemat-
ic form in which the working line on the exhaust side has fractured
due to the absence of a brake valve.
→ The next animation (topic 64) shows the correct circuit.
[64] Circuit diagram: Brake valve
This illustration shows the correct circuit for the problem in topic
63. This circuit incorporates not only a brake valve on the piston-
rod side but also a non-return valve on the inlet side via which oil
can be taken in from a reservoir during the vacuum phase following
the closure of the directional control valve.
→ The following animation shows the events which occur in the
two working lines.
[65] Circuit with brake valve
First the animation shows in schematic form the behavior of the

PRV during the braking phase, then it shows the behavior of the
non-return valve (NRV) in the supply line.
→
The necessity of the brake valve can be demonstrated bytopic 63.
[66] Circuit diagram: PRV as back-pressure valve
Back-pressure valves counteract mass moments of inertia with

tractive loads. The illustration shows a circuit with a back-pressure
valve on the piston-rod side. On the return stroke, the PRV is by-
passed by an NRV.
→ The PRV must be pressure-compensated and the tank port

must be capable of carrying a pressure load.
[67] PRV, internally controlled, cushioned
Pressure relief valves often incorporate cushioning pistons or flow

control valves. The cushioning device shown provides fast opening
and slow closing of the valve. This prevents damage caused by
pressure shocks (smooth valve operation).
→ Pressure shock arise, for example, when the pump delivers oil
in an almost unpressurized condition and the supply port of the
load device is abruptly closed by a directional control valve.
[68] PRV, externally controlled (1)
This pressure relief valve controls the flow in accordance with an

external pressure setting. This pressure acts against an adjustable
spring force. The passage from the supply port P to the tank port T
remains closed as long as no load acts on the pilot piston.
[69] PRV, externally controlled (2)
Pressure can be fed to the pilot piston via the pilot port X. As soon
as the pressure force at the pilot piston exceeds the preset spring
force, the pilot piston is displaced, allowing free flow.
[70] Sequence valve
The example shows a circuit with a pressure relief valve used as a

pressure sequence valve. The pressure at the pilot piston of the
PRV rises via the pressure regulator. The PRV opens and the high-
pressure pump delivers directly to the tank. As soon as the 2/2-way
valve opens, the pressure drops. The pressure relief valve closes
and the high pressure pump is connected to the system.
[71] Circuit diagram: Sequence valve
This illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration,

but with the cut-away view of the sequence valve replaced by the
appropriate circuit symbol.
[72] Pressure relief valve
Actual photograph of a pressure relief valve.
[73] 2-way pressure regulator (1)
This valve is normally open. The outlet pressure (A) acts via a pilot
line on the left-hand surface of the pilot piston against an adjusta-
ble spring force.
→ Pressure regulators reduce the inlet pressure to an adjustable

outlet pressure. It is appropriate to use these in hydraulic in-
stallations only if different pressures are required.
When the pressure rises at outlet A, the force at the left-hand

surface of the pilot piston becomes greater, the piston is displaced
to the right and the throttle gap becomes narrower. This causes a
pressure drop.
→ In the case of slide valves, it is also possible to design the

control edges in such way that the opening gap increases only
slowly. This gives greater control precision.
When the preset maximum pressure is reached, the throttle point

closes completely; the pressure set on the pressure relief valve is
produced at the inlet P.
In the circuit illustrated, the piston rod of the cylinder is executing

an advance stroke. The pressure at the outlet A of the pressure
regulator is less than the system pressure at P and constant.
The piston rod of the cylinder is now in its forward end position.
The pressure at outlet A thus continues to rise and the throttle
point closes completely.
[78] Circuit diagram: 2-way pressure regulator
The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration,

but with the 2-way pressure regulator in the form of a circuit sym-
bol.
It is appropriate to use PRVs only when different pressures are

required in an installation. The mod of operation of pressure regu-
lator will thus be explained here by taking an example with two
control circuits. The first control circuit acts via a flow control valve
on a hydraulic motor which drives a roller. This roller is used to
stick together multi-layered printed circuit boards. The second
control circuit acts on a hydraulic cylinder which draws the roller
towards the boards at an adjustable reduced pressure.
→ This example can be used as a preliminary stage to the intro-

duction of the 3-way PR. If the 2-way PR is closed due to the
fact that the preset maximum pressure has been reached,
thickening of the material of the workpieces would cause an in-
crease in the pressure on the outlet side of the PR to a higher
value than desired. (See also the animation for topic 84.)
The 3-way pressure regulator can be regarded as a combination of

a 2-way PR and a pressure relief valve (PRV). The PR is in its normal
position here; only a low pressure has built up at the outlet A.
When the pressure at A rises the result of external conditions, this

pressure acts via a pilot line on the left-hand piston surface of the
pilot piston against an adjustable spring force. Every pressure
increase causes the throttle gap to become narrower, resulting in a
pressure drop.
When the maximum preset pressure is reached, the throttle point

closes completely. The pressure set on the system-pressure limiter
is produced at the inlet P.
If the pressure rises above the preset value as the result of an

external load at outlet A, the valve opens to allow flow from A to
the tank port T (pressure-limiter function).
→ 3-way pressure regulators are available with both positive and

negative piston overlap. If a 3-way pressure regulator is creat-
ed by combining a 2-way pressure regulator and a pressure re-
lief valve, the “overlap” is adjustable.
[84] 3-way pressure regulator
The animation shows both the pressure-regulator and pressure-

limiter function of a 3-way pressure regulator through the example
of a roller which exerts a constant pressure on moving material of
variable thickness.
→ The final control element which is normally interposed has

been omitted here in the interests of clarity.
A 3-way PR is shown here in a functional representation, incorpo-

rated into a model circuit diagram. The piston rod of the cylinder is
subject to external force and the pressure regulator provides a
pressure-limiter function.

but with the functional representation of the 3-way pressure regu-
lator replaced by a “detailed” circuit symbol.
→ 3-way pressure regulators are available with both positive and

negative piston overlap. If a 3-way pressure regulator is creat-
ed by combining a 2-way pressure regulator and a pressure re-
lief valve, the “overlap” is adjustable.

but with the standard circuit symbol for a 3-way pressure regulator.
23.8 Way Valves
[88] 2/2-way valve (1)
The 2/2-way valve has a working port A, a supply port P and a

leakage-oil port L. In the case of the valve shown here, of slide
design, flow from P to A is closed in the normal position.
→ A relief line leading to the leakage-oil port is provided to pre-

vent a build-up of pressure in the spring and piston chambers.
[89] 2/2-way valve (2)
The 2/2-way valve is actuated and the passage from P to A is open.
→ 2/2-way valves are also available which are normally open

from P to A.
[90] 2/2-way valve as by-pass valve
This example shows a 2/2-way valve used as a by-pass valve; when

the 2/2-way valve is actuated, the flow control valve 0V2 is by-
passed, causing the piston rod of the cylinder to advance at maxi-
mum speed.
[91] Circuit diagram: 2/2-way valve as by-pass valve

but with the functional representation of the 2/2-way valve re-
placed by a circuit symbol.
[92] Circuit diagram: 2/2-way valve as final control element
In its initial position, the cylinder is advanced. If the 2/2- way valve
0V1 is actuated, the entire volumetric flow passes to the tank and
piston rod of the cylinder is reset by the external load m. If 0V1 is
not actuated, the system pressure set on the pressure limiter 0V2
builds up and the piston rod advances.
→ In the initial position, the pump operates against the preset

system pressure, which has an unfavorable effect on the power
balance of the circuit shown.
[93] 2/2-way valve as final control element
The animations show the actuation and release of the 2/2-way

valve, which causes the piston rod of the cylinder to advance and
retract.
[94] Circuit diagram for pressure-less pump recirculation
The part circuit diagram shows a 2/2-way valve used as a by-pass

valve to achieve pressure-less pump recirculation; if the valve is
actuated, the pump no longer needs to operate against the preset
system pressure.
→ One application of this circuit is with 4/3-way valves which are

closed in their mid-position in cases where, with the installa-
tion operational, it is desired to switch to pump recirculation
(see also topic 116).
[95] Circuit diagram: Pressure stage circuit
The part circuit diagram shows a 2/2-way valve used as a selector

switch for one of two preset system pressures (“pressure levels”);
if the 2/2-way valve is actuated, flow is enabled to a second sys-
tem-pressure limiter.
[96] 3/2-way valve (poppet principle) (1)
The 3/2-way valve has working port A, a supply port P and a tank
port T. Volumetric flow can be routed from the supply port to the
working port or from the working port to the tank port. The third
port in each case is closed. In the normal position shown, P is
closed and flow released from A to T.
→ See also topic 101 (slide principle).
[97] 3/2-way valve (poppet principle) (2)
The 3/2-way valve is actuated; flow is released from P to A, the

outlet T is closed.
→ 3/2-way valves which are normally open from P to A and T

closed are also available.
[98] 3/2-way valve as final control element
The circuit shows the 3/2-way valve in a functional representation

as a final control element of a single acting cylinder.
→ The non-return valve protects the pump in cases where the

3/2-way valve is actuated and the piston rod is subject to an
external load.
[99] Circuit diagram: 3/2-way valve as final control element

but with the circuit symbol for the 3/2-way valve.
[100] 3/2-way valve
The animations show the actuation and release of the manual

pushbutton for a 3/2-way valve, which causes the piston rod of the
cylinder to advance and retract.
[101] 3/2-way valve (slide principle) (1)
The 3/2-way valve has a working port A, a supply port P and a tank
port T. The volumetric flow can be routed from the supply port to
the working port, or from the working port to the tank port. The
third port in each case is closed. In the normal position shown, P is
closed and flow is released from A to T.
→ See also the 3/2-way valve designed on the poppet principle

(Topic 96).
[102] 3/2-way valve (slide principle) (2)
The 3/2-way valve is actuated; flow is released from P to A, and

the outlet T is closed.
→ 3/2-way valves which are normally closed from P to A and T are

also available.
[103] 3/2-way valves as diverter
In addition to their application as final control elements, 3/2-way

valves can also be used as diverters. In this case, port T is connect-
ed to a further device, to which a switch-over can then be made.
The part circuit diagrams show the facility to switch between the
flow control valves with different settings and between heating and
cooling.
→ The circuit symbol is drawn reversed to simplify the representa-

tion of the circuit diagram.
[104] 4/2-way valve, two pistons (1)
The 4/2-way valve has two working ports A and B, a supply port P
and a tank port T. The supply port is always connected to one of the
working ports, while the second working port is routed to the tank.
In the normal position, there is flow from P to B and from A to T.
→ In contrast to valves with three pistons, 4/2-way valves with

two pistons do not require a leakage-oil port (see topic 106).
[105] 4/2-way valve, two pistons (2)
The 4/2-way valve is actuated, and there is flow from P to A and

from B to T.
→ 4/2-way valves are also available which are normally open

from P to A and from B to T.
[106] 4/2-way valve, three pistons (1)
This 4/2-way valve has two working ports A and B, a supply port P
and a tank port T. The supply port is always connected to one of the
working ports, while the second working port is routed to the tank.
In the neutral position, there is flow from P to B and from A to T.
→ 4/2-way valves with three pistons require a leakage-oil port,

since hydraulic fluid would otherwise be trapped within the
valve.
The 4/2-way valve is actuated, and there is flow from P to A and

from B to T.
The circuit shows the 4/2-way valve in functional representation as

a final control element of a double acting cylinder.

piston rod of the cylinder is subject to an external load.
[109] Circuit diagram: 4/2-way valve

but with the 4/2-way valve as a circuit symbol.
[110] 4/3-way valve with pump bypass (1)
From the logic point of view, 4/3-way valves are 4/2- way valves
with an additional mid-position. There are various versions of this
mid-position (in the mid-position in the example shown, the supply
port P is directly connected to the tank T, see next illustration). In
the switching position shown, there is flow from P to B and from A
to T.
→ 4/3-way valves are easy to construct as slide valves and of

complex design as poppet valves.
The 4/3-way valve is in its mid-position; there is flow from P to T,

while A and B are closed. Since the output from the pump flows to
the tank, this switching position is called pump bypass or also
pump recirculation.
→ In the case of pump bypass, the pump needs to operate only

against the resistance of the valve, which has a favorable effect
on the power balance.
The valve is in its left-hand switching position; there is flow from P

to A and from B to T.

a final control element of a double acting cylinder. The valve is in its
mid-position; the pump delivery flows via the by-pass line within
the pilot piston to the tank.

piston rod of the cylinder is subject to an external load.
[114] Circuit diagram: 4/3-way valve with pump bypass

[115] 4/3-way valve with pump bypass
The animations show the switching of the 4/3-way valve into the
three switching positions and the corresponding cylinder move-
ments. During the advance stroke, movement can be halted by
switching to the mid- position.
→ As appropriate to the application in question, a circuit of this

kind must be equipped with a brake valve to prevent damage
to the installation when the valve is switched to the mid-
position (see also topic 64).
[116] 4/3-way valve with closed mid-position (1)
From the logic point of view, 4/3-way valves are 4/2- way valves
with an additional mid-position. There are various versions of this
mid-position (in the mid-position in the example shown, all ports
are closed in the mid- position, see next illustration). In the switch-
ing position shown, there is flow from P to B and from A to T.
The 4/3-way valve is in its mid-position; all ports apart from the
leakage-oil port are closed.
→ In this mid-position, the pump is operating against the system

pressure set on the pressure relief valve.
The valve is in its left-hand switching position; there is flow from P

to A and from B to T.

a final control element of a double acting cylinder. The valve is in its
mid-position; the pump is operating against the system pressure
set on the PRV.
→ If, with an operational installation, it is desired to switch to

pump recirculation, this can be achieved by using an additional
2/2-way valve as a changeover valve (see part circuit-diagram
in topic 94).
[120] Circuit diagram: 4/3-way valve with closed mid-position

[121] 4/3-way valve: overlap positions (1)
The illustration shows the left-hand overlap position of a 4/3-way

valve with positive overlap in the mid-position (closed mid-
position). This overlap position is a mixture of positive and negative
overlap; P is connected to A, B and T are closed.
→ With 4/3-way valves, the types of overlap positions is generally

specified in the data sheet.
[122] 4/3-way valve: overlap positions (2)
The illustration shows the “right-hand” overlap position of a 4/3-

way valve with positive overlap in the mid- position (closed mid-
position). This overlap position, too, is a mixture of positive and
negative overlap; P is connected to B, A and T are closed.
[123] Way valve
Actual photograph of a directional control valve with lever actua-

tion.
[124] 4/3-way module
This 4/3-way module with hand-lever actuation is used in vertical

interconnection systems (“modular hydraulics”).
→ See also the illustration in topic 58.
23.9 Shutoff Valves
[125] Non-return valve (1)
Non-return valves block flow in one direction and allow free flow
in the other. In the direction of flow shown, the sealing element is
pressed against a seat by a spring and the hydraulic fluid.
→ These valves are also available in designs without springs.

Since there must be no leaks in the closed position, these
valves are generally of poppet design.
[126] Non-return valve (2)
In the direction of flow shown, the valve is opened by the hydraulic

fluid, which lifts the sealing element from the seat.
[127] Circuit diagram: Pump protection
In this circuit, the non-return valve is used to protect the pump.

This prevents a load pressure from driving the pump in reverse
when the electric motor is switched off. Pressure peaks do not
affect the pump but are discharged via the pressure relief valve.
[128] Graetz block (1)
In the Graetz rectifier circuit (Graetz block), four non- return valves
are combined to form a function unit. The circuit diagram shows
how this operates in conjunction with a flow control valve; flow
passes through this valve from left to right during both the advance
and return strokes of the cylinder. The situation during the advance
stroke is shown.
→ During the advance stroke shown here, flow control is carried

out on the inlet side.
[129] Graetz block (2)
The cylinder is on its return stroke. The rectifier circuit means that
flow once again passes through the flow control valve from left to
right.
→ During the return stroke shown here, flow control is carried out
on the outlet side.
[130] Graetz block
The animation shows the actuation and spring return of a 4/2-way

valve and the flow through the Graetz block during the advance and
return strokes.
→ Similar rectifier circuits are also used in conjunction with line

filters or brake valves.
[131] Delockable non-return valve (1)
In the cases of delockable non-return valves, flow in the closed

direction can be released by means of an additional pilot port (X).
The illustration shows the valve in its normal position; flow from B
to A is closed.
The released piston is pressurized via pilot port X. This lifts the
sealing element from its seat and releases flow from B to A.
→ In order to release the valve reliably, the effective area of the

pilot piston must always be greater than the effective area of
the sealing element. Piloted non-return valves are also availa-
ble with lockable non-return function.
The model circuit diagram shows how a load can be positioned by

holding a cylinder using a suitable delockable non-return valve. The
valve becomes active in the return stroke whereby the restriction
on the piston side is released by actuation of the 3/2-way valve.
→ See also the animation 135 on this topic.
[134] Circuit diagram: Delockable non-return valve

but with the piloted non-return valve as a circuit symbol.
[135] Delockable non-return valve
The 4/2-way valve is actuated, the hydraulic fluid passes through

the non-return valve against the force of the return spring and the
piston rod advances. When the 4/2-way valve is reset, the outlet on
the piston side is closed by the non-return valve, and the cylinder
remains advanced. The 3/2-way valve is now actuated, the pilot
piston is reversed and the outlet flow released; the piston rod
begins to retract. During the return stroke, the 3/2-way valve is
brought temporarily into its normal position. This causes the outlet
to be closed again, and the piston rod and load remain in their
current position. When the 3/2-way valve is actuated again, the
piston rod travels to its retracted end position.
[136] Delockable double non-return valve (1)
Delockable double non-return valves allow a load to be positioned

reliably with the cylinder at a standstill, even if eternal leaks exist
around the cylinder piston. When, as in the case, neither of the
inlets A_1 or A_2 is pressurized, B_1 and B_2 are closed.
When A_1 is pressurized, the left-hand sealing element is lifted

from its seat, enabling flow to B_1. At the same time, the pilot
piston is displaced to the right, releasing flow from B_2 to A_2.
→ The opposite is true when inlet A_2 is pressurized.
The model circuit diagram shows a delockable double non-return

valve used in conjunction with a 4/3-way valve to allow the vertical
positioning of a load. In the mid-position of the final control ele-
ment shown, ports A and B are connected to the tank. This means
that the inlets A_1 and A_2 of the double non-return valve are
pressure-less and both cylinder supply lines are closed.
[139] Circuit diagram: Delockable double non-return valve

but with the delockable double non-return valve as a circuit sym-
bol.
23.10 Flow Valves
[140] Needle restrictor
Throttle and orifice valves are used to achieve a certain pressure

drop. This is done by creating a specific flow resistance. The needle
flow control valve shown generates considerable friction due to its
long narrowing. This means that the action of the flow control valve
is difficult to adjust due to the fact that a small adjustment produc-
es a large change in cross-section.
→ One advantage is the simple and inexpensive design. Needle

flow control valves can be used if the above- mentioned nega-
tive properties can be ignored for the purposes of a given con-
trol task.
[141] Gap restrictor with helix
Its short narrowing means that the action of this gap flow control
valve is virtually independent of viscosity. The helix provides pre-
cise adjustability, since adjustment from fully open to fully closed
requires a 360° turn. The helix is, however, very costly to produce.
[142] Circuit diagram: Flow division using restrictor
Throttle and orifice valves control the volumetric flow rate in con-
junction with a pressure relief valve. The PRV opens when the
resistance of the flow control valve becomes greater than that of
the opening pressure set on the PRV. This produces a division of
flow.
→ The volumetric flow to the load device varies, i.e. the action of
flow control valves is load-dependent.
[143] Throttle valve
Actual photograph of a flow control valve.
[144] One-way flow control valve (1)
The one-way flow control valve is a combination of an orifice or

throttle valve and a non-return valve. In the closed direction shown
of the non-return valve, the volumetric flow passes via the variable
throttle gap, which creates a considerable resistance.
→ Speed reduction can be achieved by using a one-way flow

control valve in conjunction with a pressure relief valve or a
variable-delivery pump. The pressure rises upstream of the
flow control valve until the PRV opens and routes part of the
flow to the tank.
[145] One-way flow control valve (2)
In the reverse direction, from B to A, flow is unrestricted, since the

ball in the one-way flow control valve allows free flow (non-return
function).
→ One-way flow control valves are available with a fixed restrictor

and with variable flow control.
[146] 2-way flow control valve (1)
Flow control valves have the task of providing constant volumetric

flow independently of pressure changes at the inlet or outlet of the
valve. This is achieved firstly by means of an adjustable restrictor
which is set to the desired volumetric flow. In order to keep the
pressure drop across the throttle point constant, a second regulat-
ing restrictor (pressure compensator) is also required. The illustra-
tion shows the valve in its normal position.
→ 2-way flow control valves always operate in conjunction with a

pressure relief valve. The part of the flow which is not required
is discharged via the PRV.
When fluid flows through the valve, the pressure drop across the
adjustable restrictor is kept constant by the pressure compensator,
which varies the resistance at the upper throttle point in accord-
ance with the load at the inlet or outlet.
→ See also the animation 150 for this topic.
In the case of this flow control valve, the pressure difference is kept
constant by a adjustable restrictor, i.e. between p_1 and p_2. If the
pressure p_3 rises as the result of an external load, the overall
resistance of the valve is reduced by opening the regulating restric-
tor.
[149] Circuit diagram: 2-way flow control valve
The model circuit diagram shows the arrangement of a 2-way flow

control valve in the piston-side supply line in order to achieve a
constant feed speed even under varying load. A non-return valve
is fitted in the by-pass to allow the flow control valve to be by-
passed on the return stroke.
[150] 2-way flow control valve
The advancing piston rod encounters a load half-way through its

stroke. The flow control valve nonetheless ensures that the ad-
vance speed remains constant. From 0 to 2 seconds (shown at
bottom right) the piston rod is unloaded and the pressure condi-
tions remain constant. When the piston rod encounters the load,
the pressure p_3 rises at the outlet of the flow control valve. (In
order to allow the rapid control operations to be shown more clear-
ly, the time scale now changes to 1/100ths of a second.) The flow
control valve briefly raises the pressure p_2 downstream of the
adjustable restrictor. Following this, the regulating restrictor moves
to the left, and p_2 falls back to its original value, i.e. the pressure
difference between p_1 and p_2 remains constant. The regulating
operation shown is repeated a number of times, as the result of
which p_3 increases to 2.5 MPa (25 bar) in several steps and the
regulating restrictor opens more and more. (At the point at which
2.5 MPa (25 bar) is reached, the time scale changes back to 0.1
seconds.) The piston rod now travels under load just as fast as
previously without load.
23.11 Hydraulic Cylinders and Motors
In the case of a single acting cylinder, only the piston side is pres-
surized with hydraulic fluid. The cylinder can thus carry out work
only in one direction. The fluid which flows into the piston chamber
causes a pressure to build up the surface of the piston. The piston
travels into its forward end position. The return stroke is effected
by a spring, the dead weight of the piston rod or an external load.
[152] Plunger cylinder
In the case of plunger cylinders, the piston and rod form a single
component. Due to the design of the cylinder, the return stroke can
only be effected by external forces. The cylinders can therefore
generally be installed only vertically.
In the case of double acting cylinders, both piston surfaces can be

pressurized. A working movement can thus be performed in both
directions.
→ With double acting cylinders with a single-sided piston rod,

different forces and speeds are obtained on the advance and
return strokes due to the difference in area between the piston
surface and annular piston surface.
[154] Double acting cylinder with end position cushioning
Cylinder with end position cushioning are used to brake high stroke
speeds smoothly and prevent hard impacts at the end of the stroke.
Shortly before the end position is reached, the cross- section for
the outflow of fluid is reduced by the built-in cushioning pistons
and then finally closed. The hydraulic fluid is then forced to escape
through a flow control valve.
[155] End position cushioning (1)
The piston is a short distance before its end position; the hydraulic
fluid on the piston-rod side must escape via the adjustable flow
control valve above the piston rod
→ This type of end position cushioning is used for stroke speed
between 6 m/min and 20 m/min. At higher speed, additional
cushioning or braking devices must be used.
[156] End position cushioning (2)
The piston rod is on its return stroke; in this flow direction, the non-
return valve below the piston rod is opened, thus by-passing the
flow control valve. The piston rod retracts at maximum speed.
[157] End position cushioning
The illustration shows first the advance of the piston rod from a
mid-position to the forward end position, with cushioning at the
end of the advance movement. The non-return valve is open during
the return stroke.
→ In addition the animation shows the opening of the pressure

limiter after a certain pressure has been built up on the outlet
side by the cushioning piston.
Actual photograph of a double acting cylinder.
[159] Automatic bleed valve
When the cylinder is retracted, the piston of the bleed valve is

closed. It is lifted as the piston rod advances. Air can then escape
via the bleed hole until the hydraulic fluid reaches the piston and
pushes it upwards. In the forward end position, the piston is
pushed fully upwards by the hydraulic fluid and thus provides an
external seal.
→ Bleed valves should be fitted at the highest point in a piping

system, since this is where any trapped air will collect.
23.12 Gauges
[160] Piston pressure gauge
Pressure gauges operate on the principle that pressure acting on a

given area will produce a given force. In the case of piston pressure
gauges, the pressure acts on a piston against the force of a spring.
The pressure value is now shown on a scale either by the piston
itself or by a pointer driven magnetically by the piston.
[161] Bourdon-tube pressure gauge
Most pressure gauges operate on the principle of a Bourdon tube.

When hydraulic fluid flows into the tube, an identical pressure is
produced throughout. Due to the difference in area between the
outer and inner curved surfaces, the tube is bent. This movement is
transferred to a pointer.
→ This type of gauge is not protected against overload. A cush-

ioning restrictor must be installed in the inlet connection pre-
vent pressure surges from damaging the tube.
[162] Flow meter
The flow of oil to be measured passes through a movable orifice.

The orifice consists of a fixed cone and a hollow piston mounted on
a spring. The piston is pressed against the spring in proportion to
the flow rate concerned. The measuring error of this type of flow
meter is approx. 4%. Measuring turbines, oval disk meters or
toothed-wheel gauges are used when higher accuracy is required.
23.13 Exercises
[163] Exercise: Horizontal grinding machine (pump delivery)
The slide on a horizontal grinding machine is hydraulically actuat-

ed. A machine operator determines that the reciprocating move-
ment of the machine is no longer reaching the desired speed. A
possible cause of this is reduced pump delivery. To investigate this,
it is necessary to plot a characteristic curve for the pump and com-
pare this with the values achieved during initial commissioning. As
an additional exercise, the circuit diagram and parts list for the
necessary test assembly should be prepared.
In order to draw the characteristic curve for the pump, the volumet-
ric flow of hydraulic fluid delivered by the pump (Q) is plotted
against the operating pressure achieved (p). The manufacturer’s
characteristic curve exhibits a slight downward gradient, since the
new pump manifests increasing internal leakage losses as neces-
sary to provide internal lubrication. The newly-plotted curve shows
a clear deviation; the leakage oil losses have become greater at
higher operating pressures, the volumetric efficiency has become
worse. The main reason for this is pump wear. Regarding the circuit
diagram for the test assembly: The adjustable flow control valve
1V3 is adjusted in such a way that the pressure gauge 1Z1 shows
the desired system pressure. The pressure relief valve 1V2 is used
to limit the system pressure, while valve 1V1 acts as a safety valve
for the pump.
→ The measured values taken as the basis for this exercise do not
allow for the characteristic curve of the electric motor. The mo-
tor characteristic thus forms part of the calculated error.
[164] Exercise: Bending machine (directly-controlled pressure
relief valve)
A bending machine is used to bend steel plates. The bending tools

are driven by hydraulic cylinders. It is now desired to use the bend-
ing machine for considerably thicker steel plates than before. This
requires a hydraulic system pressure of 45 bar against the previous
30 bar. According to the manufacturer’s data, the pump used is
suitable for the higher operating pressure. Testing reveals, howev-
er, that the bending process is now much too slow. In this case,
leakage losses in the piping or directional control valve are ruled
out as the cause of the problem. A directly-controlled pressure
relief valve (PRV) is installed as a safety valve. Measurements of
the volumetric flow (Q) as a function of pressure (p) are available
for this valve. A characteristic curve can than be used to determine
whether the loss of speed in the bending process is due to the PRV.
The volumetric flow which is discharged to the tank when the PRV
opens is entered on the horizontal axis. The characteristic curve
shows that the opening point of the PRV is 44 bar, although it is set
to 50 bar. This means that part of the pump delivery is diverted at
pressures greater than 44 bar. Pressures of more than 44 bar are
achieved during the bending process. Since, however, the flow is
divided from 44 bar onwards, the volumetric flow to the cylinder is
reduced from this point and the bending process slows down.
Measure to be taken: The PRTV can be set to 60 bar if the overall
installation has been designed for this higher pressure. Flow diver-
sion will then take place from a pressure of 54 bar onwards.
→ An alternative solution would be to use a valve with a different

response pressure.
[165] Exercise: Roller conveyor (flow resistance)
Steel blocks are transported on a roller conveyor. A hydraulic

transfer station makes it possible to transfer blocks from one track
to another. A pressure of at least 30 bar is required for the transfer
of blocks by means of hydraulic cylinders. Every component
through which the hydraulic fluid flows represents a resistance and
causes a constant pressure loss. The question is, what pressure is
to be set at the pressure relief valve.
The total resistance is the sum of all the individual resistances. The
resistance must be determined separately for the advance and
return strokes. The overall balances do not include data for the
pressure losses at the 4/2-way valve. These can be determined
from the flow characteristic for the 4/2-way valve, based on a
volumetric flow of 8 l/min. In the calculation, allowance must be
made for the resistance of the directional control valve on the inlet
and outlet sides respectively. Allowance must also be made for the
pressure intensification factor of 2:1 in the case of the differential
cylinder. This enables values to be calculated as shown in the
solution figure. In the case of the advance stroke, 6 bar hysteresis
for the PRV (see exercise 164) must be added to the calculated 42.5
bar in order to ensure that the opening pressure is higher than the
required operating pressure. The value finally chosen is 50 bar in
order to make allowance for unknown variables such as pipe el-
bows and the static friction in the cylinder.
→ In order to keep pressure losses in large installations to a

minimum, it is advisable to select valves on the basis of their
flow characteristics. It is better to select a valve which is one
size too large than to accept large pressure losses. This fur-
thermore reduces wear resulting from cavitation in the valves.
[166] Exercise: Embossing press (activation of a single acting

cylinder)
Additional hydraulic components are to be added to an embossing

press to eject the finished workpieces. A single acting cylinder (1A)
is to be fitted for this purpose. A proposed solution in the form of a
circuit diagram with a 2/2-way valve is to be examined to see if it is
suitable for this control problem. Following this, a circuit diagram
with a 3/2-way valve as final control element is to be developed
and a parts list prepared. A comparison is to be made of the behav-
ior of these two circuits during the advance and return strokes.
When a 2/2-way valve is used to activate a single acting cylinder,

the final control element must be reversed and the hydraulic power
unit switched off in order to retract the piston rod. The load acting
on the piston rod must be larger than the resistance of the direc-
tional control valve. This solution cannot be used due to the pres-
ence of the second control chain (embossing cylinder). If a 3/2-way
valve is used, a direct switch-over can be made from the advance
stroke to the return stroke without switching off the hydraulic
power unit. Halting at overlap positions, on the other hand (which
are not required here), would be possible only by switching off the
hydraulic power unit.
→ The non-return valve fitted in each case protects the pump

against oil back-pressure. This is necessary in case the hydrau-
lic power unit is switched off with the cylinder advanced and
under load.
[167] Exercise: Ladle (activation of a double acting cylinder)
Liquid aluminum is transferred from a holding furnace into a chan-

nel leading to a die-casting machine. A ladle is required for this. A
double acting cylinder is used to enable the ladle to carry out the
appropriate movements. A circuit diagram is provided for the acti-
vation of the cylinder with a 4/2-way valve as final control element.
This must be examined to see if it is suitable for the control task
concerned. The ladle must not be allowed to dip into the furnace
when the valve is not actuated. A circuit diagram with a back-
pressure valve must be developed to cater for the case in which the
ladle is very heavy.
The requirements of the exercise are met by the first circuit dia-
gram only if the ladle represents a light load. If the ladle is very
heavy, the advance speed could rise to an unacceptably high level
during the advance stroke of the piston rod (ladle moving towards
furnace), and the ladle could as a result plunge too quickly into the
molten metal. This can be prevented by installing a back- pressure
valve in the B line between the valve and cylinder (tractive load).
→ If, as is required in this exercise, the power component must

positively assume a defined end position when the installation
is at rest, valves with spring return must be used, as in this
case. Here, a 4/2-way valve with spring return has been used,
since this ensures that the cylinder remains in the desired posi-
tion if the hydraulic power unit is switched on unexpectedly.
The required cylinder diameter and the return speed of the pis-
ton rod can also be calculated as additional optional tasks in
the exercise: see the model calculations in the textbook.
[168] Exercise: Paint drying oven (4/3-way valve)
Workpieces are fed continuously through a paint drying oven on a

conveyor belt. In order to minimize the heat loss through the door,
this should be opened only as much as required by the height of
the workpieces. The hydraulic control system should be designed
so that the door can be held reliably in position for a long period of
time without slipping down. Firstly, a 4/3-way valve with suitable
mid-position functions should be selected as a final control ele-
ment. Secondly, a delockable non-return valve should be provided
in the circuit diagram to act as a hydraulic safety device to prevent
slippage of the door under load (i.e. its own weight) over a long
period of time as the result of leakage losses in the directional
control valve. The question is, which type of 4/3-way valve has a
suitable mid-position function?
A 4/3-way valve with an “all ports closed” mid-position will solve

the problem only if a poppet valve is used. If a slide valve would be
used, the oven door would slip down slowly as the result of internal
leakage losses.
→ The second solution would be to fit a delockable non- return

valve in the supply line to the piston rod side of the cylinder
downstream of the directional control valve. In order to ensure
that the non-return valve closes immediately when the door
stops, both the outlets A and B of the directional control valve
to the tank must be de-pressurized (A, B and T connected, P
closed).
[169] Exercise: Clamping device (closing speed)
Workpieces are clamped by a hydraulic cylinder. The closing speed

must be reduced in order to prevent damage to the workpieces. The
opening speed must, however, be maintained. The question here is
how to incorporate the necessary one-way flow control valve in the
circuit. Possible solutions must be examined to see what thermal
side- effects occur and to determine the pressure load placed on
the components concerned.
The advance stroke can as a general principle be made slower by

using either inlet or outlet flow control. Either solution can be used
in this control; in comparison with outlet flow control, inlet flow
control has the advantage that no pressure intensification will take
place. The oil heated at the throttle point will, however, then pass
through the power component. The resulting expansion of material
is not, however, of significance for this simple vice. If the solution
with outlet flow control is selected, it should be borne in mind that
pressure intensification will take place in accordance with the area
ratio of the differential cylinder of 2:1. The pressure relief valve will
respond, i.e. flow division will occur, only when a pressure has built
up on the piston-rod side which is approximately twice as high as
the system pressure set on the PRV. The cylinder, flow control valve
and connectors used must therefore be suitable for this intensified
pressure.
→ Precision drives for machine tools are a good example of cases

in which it is essential to make allowance for expansion of the
material of power components due to the passage through
these of heated oil.
[170] Exercise: Hydraulic crane (speed reduction)
Press tools of varying weights are inserted into a press by means of

a hydraulic crane. A double acting cylinder raises and lowers the
load. During the commissioning of the hydraulic crane, it has be-
come apparent that the advance speed of the piston rod is too
high. The solutions have been proposed to reduce this speed; a
circuit with exhaust flow control and a circuit with a back-pressure
valve. A suitable solution must be selected and reasons stated for
this choice. Since the second solution is not capable of operating in
this form, this must be rectified by correcting the circuit diagram.
If the solution with exhaust flow control is selected, it must be

borne in mind that the cylinder, flow control valve and connectors
must be suitable for this intensified pressure. The solution chosen
is the circuit with the back-pressure valve; in this case, the load is
clamped hydraulically and a pressure-intensification effect does not
occur, since the pressure can be adjustable by means of the pres-
sure relief valve as appropriate to the load. A non-return valve must
be installed to provide a by-pass on the return stroke.
→ Inlet flow control cannot be used to control a tractive load; the

load forces oil out of the piston-rod chamber faster than oil can
flow into the piston chamber. Vacuum is created and air will
escape.
[171] Exercise: Feed control for a lathe (speed control)
The feed movement of a lathe has previously been carried out

manually. In future, this is to be performed automatically by a
hydraulic control system. The feed movement must be adjustable
and remain constant even with changing tool loads. Since a simple
throttle valve is not able to provide a constant feed speed under
changing load, a 2-way flow control valve must be used. On the
basis of a circuit diagram with data for the no- load situation, val-
ues for pressures, pressure differences and feed speed under load
must be added. The circuit diagram must be modified to ensure
that the flow control valve is not operative on the return stroke.
Finally, the relationship must be investigated between Q of the PRV
and the feed speed and between $\Delta p_2$ and the volumetric
flow to the load device.
In order to prevent the flow control valve from acting as a re-

sistance on the return stroke, a non-return valve is installed parallel
to this as a by-pass. The pressure at the PRV remains constant
despite the effect of the load. The outlet flow from this is therefore
a constant 7 l/min. A constant volumetric flow Q at the PRV in turn
means a constant volumetric flow to the load device and thus
constant feed speed. Regarding the last question: No matter
whether operation is with or without a load, the pressure drop
$\Delta p_2$ at the adjustable throttle remains constant. A con-
stant pressure drop means a constant volumetric flow.
→ Regarding the necessity for the non-return valve in the by-pass:

When flow passes through 2-way flow control valves in the re-
verse direction, they act either as flow control valves if the reg-
ulating restrictor is fully open or non-return valves if the regu-
lating restrictor is closed.
[172] Exercise: Planing machine (by-pass circuit)
The sliding bed of a parallel planing machine is actuated with the

aid of a hydraulic control system. The power section of this hydrau-
lic control system consists of a double acting differential cylinder.
The area ratio of the full piston surface of this cylinder to the annu-
lar piston surface is 2:1. Since the piston-rod chamber is only half
the volume of the piston chamber, the return stroke is twice as fast
as the advance stroke. Machining has previously been carried out
only during the advance stroke. In future, working movements are
to be carried out in both directions. To make this possible, the
hydraulic control system must be modified so that forward and
return strokes are at the same speed. The speed should now also
be adjustable. The connecting lines should be added to the given
circuit diagram. The mode of operation of the circuit in the three
switching positions should be described and the various piston
speeds and forces compared.
In order to achieve the same speed on the advance and return

strokes, a differential circuit (by-pass circuit) can be used with
differential cylinders with an area ratio of 2:1. Picture 116.2 The
second picture shows the principle of a by-pass circuit with a 3/2-
way valve. In the case of the parallel planing machine, the neces-
sary differential circuit can be achieved by using the mid-position of
a 4/3-way valve (A, B and P connected, T closed). In this switching
position (advance stroke), the piston speed and force are twice as
high as in the right-hand switching position (return stroke). In the
left-hand switching position, on the other hand, the advance stroke
is half as fast and the force twice as great as in the other two
switching positions. The speed for the advance and return strokes
can be adjusted by means of a flow control valve fitted upstream.
→ It should also be noted that only half the force is available on

the advance stroke at the mid-position. In the case of a tractive
load, the by-pass position has the advantage that the piston is
hydraulically clamped. Differential circuits are used not only as
synchronization circuits but also as rapid-traverse circuits
when, for example, different speeds are required in the same
direction with constant pump delivery. If it is desired to calcu-
late forces and piston speeds using concrete values, the model
values given in the TP 501 textbook can be used for this pur-
pose.
[173] Exercise: Drilling machine (pressure regulator)
The drill feed and clamping device of a drilling machine are hydrau-
lically actuated. The hydraulic control system contains two cylin-
ders, a clamping cylinder 1A and a feed cylinder 2A. The clamping
pressure at cylinder 1A must be adjustable, since different
workpiece clamping forces are required. A pressure regulator is
used for this. The return stroke of the clamping cylinder must be at
maximum speed. The drilling feed must be adjustable for various
feed speeds, which must however remain constant under varying
load. It should also be noted that the drive spindle fitted to the
piston rod of the drilling cylinder acts as a tractive load. The return
stroke of the drilling cylinder should also be at maximum speed. A
circuit should be drafted with the above-mentioned characteristics.
Pressure regulators can as general principle be used to reduce the

general system pressure in a part of a hydraulic installation. If we
consider the two control chains for the drilling machine without
pressure regulation, we can observe the following undesirable
effects: When 1V1 is actuated, the workpiece is first clamped at full
system pressure. If 2V1 is now actuated, the system pressure will
drop to the operating pressure of the drilling cylinder. The same
applies to the pressure at the clamping cylinder. If the circuit is
expanded to include the pressure regulator 1V3, this enables the
clamping pressure to be adjusted. The system pressure upstream
of the PRV will, however, continue to fall during the advance stroke
of 2A. In order to maintain the preset clamping pressure at outlet A
of the PRV reliably, the pressure at inlet P must be higher than this.
This can be achieved by fitting the additional flow control valve 0V2
upstream of the final control element 2V1. Maximum return-stroke
speed is achieved for the clamping cylinder by means of 1V2, which
is used to by-pass 1V3. The flow control valve 2V3 means that the
advance-stroke speed of the drilling cylinder is independent of load
and adjustable. Due to the tractive load of the attached spindle,
however, an additional PRV must be fitted as a back-pressure
valve. The non-return valves 2V2 and 2V5 provide a by-pass during
the return stroke and allow maximum speed to be achieved during
this.
→ A parts list can be specified to help in the drafting of this cir-

cuit.
23.14 Educational Films
23.14.1 Educational Films
No. Title Length

1 Introduction 3:20
2 Fundamentals: Pressure fluids 2:02
3 Fundamentals: Pressure and Flow Rate 2:41
4 Fundamentals: Transmission of Force and 1:35
Displacement
5 Fundamentals: Pressure Transmission 0:53
6 Fundamentals: Types of Flow 2:10
7 Basic Design of Hydraulic Systems 1:13
8 The Hydraulic Power Unit 3:26
9 Hydraulic Drives 6:58
10 Valves 3:12
11 Valves: Directional Control Valves 10:39
12 Valves: Non-Return Valves 1:59
13 Valves: Pressure Control Valves 4:24
14 Valves: Flow Control Valves 4:23
15 Representation of Hydraulic Systems in 2:58
Circuit Diagrams
23.15 Standard Presentations
For several topics useful presentations have been provided within

FluidSIM. The following table lists the titles of the predefined
presentations.
23.15.1 Presentations
Presentation Title
All topics sorted by number
Applications
Components of a hydraulic system
Graphic and circuit symbols
Fundamental physical principles
Components of the power supply section
Valves in general
Pressure valves
Directional control valves
Non-return valves
Flow control valves
Hydraulic cylinders and motors
Measuring devices
Exercises
Index
Index
?
? Menu _____________________________________________ 227
3
3/2-way valve
ball seat _____________________________________ 451, 452
disc seat_____________________________________ 452, 453
pneumatically operated ________________________ 453, 454
roller operated____________________________________ 454
4
4/2-way valve
disc seat_________________________________________ 455
roller operated____________________________________ 455
4/3-way valve
turning disc principle_______________________________ 455
5
5/2-way valve
longitudinal slide principle __________________________ 456
suspended disc seat _______________________________ 457
5/3-way valve
pneumatically operated ____________________________ 457
A
Accessories __________________________________________ 200
Action (stored effective) _________________________________ 94
activation ____________________________________________ 15
air drying
absorption _______________________________________ 442
adsorption _______________________________________ 442
low temperature __________________________________ 441
air lubricator _____________________________________ 442, 443
air motor ____________________________________________ 450
air service unit _______________________________________ 440
Alignment ____________________________________________ 52
Alignment lines ________________________________________ 64
Analyses ____________________________________________ 142
Archiving
project __________________________________________ 151
Attribute link_________________________________________ 135
B
Backup copies _______________________________________ 201
Blanking plugs ________________________________________ 44
BMP
export___________________________________________ 197
C
Cable ___________________________________________ 169, 172
manage _________________________________________ 173
Cable list ____________________________________________ 176
Cable List ___________________________________________ 177
Cable map ___________________________________________ 174
Cable Map___________________________________________ 175
Check
drawing __________________________________________ 88
Circle ________________________________________________ 83
Circuit _______________________________________________ 26
check ____________________________________________ 88
input____________________________________________ 195
nodes ___________________________________________ 151
open ____________________________________________ 151
output __________________________________________ 195
print ____________________________________________ 195
properties ___________________________________ 151, 155
XML file __________________________________________ 26
circuit diagram
bistable valve ________________________________ 457, 458
direct control _____________________________________ 459
indirect control ___________________________________ 459
pressure sequence valve ___________________________ 471
quick exhaust valve ________________________________ 467
sequential control _________________________________ 475
shuttle valve _________________________________ 464, 465
signal overlap ________________________________ 476, 477
time delay valve___________________________________ 473
two pressure valve ____________________________ 462, 463
Circuit menu _________________________________________ 219
component
animation animation
component ______________________________________ 421
description didactics
component description ____________________________ 413
sectional view component
usage in circuit didactics
sectional view __________________________________ 416
Component attributes _________________________________ 117
compressed air filter filter ______________________________ 441
compressed air supply
axial flow compressor axial flow compressor ____________ 444
delivery _________________________________________ 443
distribution ______________________________________ 444
piston compressor piston compressor _________________ 444
Compression
files ____________________________________________ 201
Conduction lines______________________________________ 165
Configurable cylinder ___________________________________ 49
Configurable way valves ________________________________ 47
Connector
connect __________________________________________ 33
define ____________________________________________ 46
delete ____________________________________________ 47
identification ______________________________________ 44
properties ________________________________________ 44
seal _____________________________________________ 44
Connector Labels _____________________________________ 130
Contact _____________________________________________ 127
Contact images _______________________________________ 194
Create drawing frame ___________________________________ 56
Cross Reference Representation __________________________ 71
Cross-reference
create from symbol _________________________________ 70
cylinder
control cylinder
double acting ____________________________________ 447
single acting _____________________________________ 446
double acting _________________________________ 447, 448
mounting arrangements ____________________________ 448
seals____________________________________________ 448
single acting _____________________________________ 446
tandem double acting ______________________________ 449
Cylinder
configure _________________________________________ 50
Cylinder editor ________________________________________ 50
D
Define page dividers ___________________________________ 61
Delay Switches ___________________________________ 363, 377
Delete
line ______________________________________________ 44
Designation conventions _______________________________ 110
Designations
number _________________________________________ 112
diagram symbol
designation of connections __________________________ 450
directional valve __________________________________ 450
flow control valve _________________________________ 468
linear actuator ____________________________________ 445
method of actuation _______________________________ 451
non-return valve diagram symbol
check valve ______________________________________ 461
numbering system _________________________________ 439
pressure control valve ______________________________ 470
rotary actuator____________________________________ 445
supply component_________________________________ 440
Dialog window
cable _______________________________________ 169, 172
Cable List ________________________________________ 177
Cable Map _______________________________________ 175
circle ____________________________________________ 83
circuit ___________________________________________ 155
Circuit____________________________________________ 18
component_______________________________________ 118
connector _________________________________________ 45
contact __________________________________________ 127
Cross Reference Representation_______________________ 71
diagram properties ________________________________ 230
diagram size ______________________________________ 18
dimensioning _____________________________________ 108
drawing areas ____________________________________ 233
drawing frame __________________________________ 58, 60
drawing layers _____________________________________ 67
electric line _______________________________________ 43
electric terminal___________________________________ 180
ellipse ___________________________________________ 85
export parts list ___________________________________ 148
Functional diagram ________________________________ 229
image ____________________________________________ 87
line ___________________________________________ 43, 79
line options ______________________________________ 239
Manage Cross References... __________________________ 72
pneumatic line _____________________________________ 43
polygonal chain ____________________________________ 80
polyline __________________________________________ 80
print ____________________________________________ 196
project __________________________________________ 155
rectangle _________________________________________ 82
secondary component ______________________________ 127
set multiple terminals ______________________________ 182
set of connected lines _______________________________ 80
signal logic_______________________________________ 240
signaling elements ________________________________ 236
Terminal diagram - Properties _______________________ 187
text _____________________________________________ 133
text options ______________________________________ 231
wiring ___________________________________________ 169
didactics
actuators ________________________________________ 445
applications ______________________________________ 480
basic pneumatics _________________________________ 438
cylinder didactics
motor __________________________________________ 519
directional control valves ___________________________ 450
educational film educational film
overview ____________________________________ 477, 533
exercises ________________________________________ 523
flow control valves ________________________________ 468
flow valves _______________________________________ 516
gauge ___________________________________________ 522
hydraulic plant____________________________________ 481
physical fundamentals _____________________________ 487
power unit _______________________________________ 490
presentation presentation
play ____________________________________________ 429
presentations
overview ________________________________________ 533
presentations presentation
overview ________________________________________ 478
pressure control valves _____________________________ 470
pressure valves ___________________________________ 496
sequential circuit didactics
signal overlap circuit ______________________________ 475
shutoff valves ________________________________ 461, 512
supply elements __________________________________ 440
symbols _________________________________________ 483
time delay valve___________________________________ 472
tutorial tutorial ___________________________________ 422
valves ___________________________________________ 494
way valves _______________________________________ 503
Digital Basic Functions _________________________________ 397
Digital Components ___________________________________ 395
Digital Special Functions _______________________________ 399
Digitale Constants ____________________________________ 395
Dimension___________________________________________ 107
Dimensioning ________________________________________ 107
DIN standard ________________________________________ 414
distance-step diagram _________________________________ 475
Dongle ______________________________________________ 15
Draw menu __________________________________________ 218
Drawing element ______________________________________ 72
Drawing frame _____________________________________ 56, 57
import ___________________________________________ 56
insert ____________________________________________ 57
label _____________________________________________ 56
Drawing level _________________________________________ 66
Druckschalter ________________________________________ 368
DXF
export___________________________________________ 197
DXF file
import __________________________________________ 197
E
Edit
circuit ____________________________________________ 29
Edit menu ___________________________________________ 213
Electric line ___________________________________________ 76
electrical components
american standard ________________________________ 376
ladder diagram style _______________________________ 376
Electrical Components _________________________________ 355
electronic components _________________________________ 382
Ellipse _______________________________________________ 84
Equipment identifications ______________________________ 110
exercise
bending machine __________________________________ 524
clamping device___________________________________ 528
drilling machine ___________________________________ 532
drying oven ______________________________________ 528
embossing press __________________________________ 526
feed control ______________________________________ 530
grinding machine__________________________________ 523
hydraulic crane ___________________________________ 529
ladle ____________________________________________ 527
planing machine __________________________________ 531
roller conveyor____________________________________ 525
Export ______________________________________________ 197
F
Festo product catalogue ________________________________ 29
File menu ___________________________________________ 210
Find target __________________________________________ 143
function illustration
general sectional view______________________________ 424
G
GIF
export___________________________________________ 197
GRAFCET _____________________________________________ 89
Action ____________________________________________ 90
Action (stored effective) _____________________________ 94
Admissible characters Admissible characters ___________ 101
Boolean value of an assertion Boolean value of an assertion
________________________________________________ 104
Checking the entries Checking the entries ______________ 100
Compulsory command Compulsory command ___________ 105
Delay GRAFCET
Time limit Delay Time limit __________________________ 104
Electrical part______________________________________ 95
Enclosing step GRAFCET
Step Enclosing step _______________________________ 106
Functions GRAFCET
Formula entry Functions Formula entry ________________ 103
Initialization Initialization ____________________________ 98
Labels Labels _____________________________________ 102
Macro-step Macro-step _____________________________ 105
Partial GRAFCETs Partial GRAFCETs ___________________ 105
Reference_________________________________________ 98
Sequence rules Sequence rules _______________________ 99
Sequence selection Sequence selection ________________ 99
Step Step _________________________________________ 89
Synchronization Synchronization ______________________ 99
Target information GRAFCET
Operative connection Target information Operative connection
_____________________________________________ 104
Transition_________________________________________ 92
Variable names Variable names ______________________ 101
Variable value Variable value ________________________ 100
GRAFCET Elements ____________________________________ 405
Graphical element _____________________________________ 72
Grid _________________________________________________ 64
Grid dimension ________________________________________ 64
Grid options _________________________________________ 200
Group _______________________________________________ 51
create ____________________________________________ 51
delete ____________________________________________ 52
Guides_______________________________________________ 64
H
Hide
automatic_________________________________________ 27
Hide window __________________________________________ 27
I
Image _______________________________________________ 86
Image file ____________________________________________ 86
Insert
Symbol ___________________________________________ 22
Insert menu _________________________________________ 216
Insert T distributor _____________________________________ 36
Installation
license connector __________________________________ 15
Interruption __________________________________________ 74
J
JPG
export___________________________________________ 197
L
ladder diagram _______________________________________ 376
Layer ________________________________________________ 66
Libraries _____________________________________________ 21
Library ____________________________________________ 24, 27
Library menu_________________________________________ 224
Library window ________________________________________ 27
Limit Switches ___________________________________ 364, 378
Line _________________________________________________ 78
delete ____________________________________________ 44
electric ___________________________________________ 76
move ____________________________________________ 39
pneumatic ________________________________________ 76
Line segment _________________________________________ 39
Line type
set ______________________________________________ 42
Link ________________________________________________ 135
Links _______________________________________________ 190
M
Macro object
create ____________________________________________ 51
delete ____________________________________________ 52
Manage Cross References...______________________________ 72
measuring devices ____________________________________ 298
measuring instruments ________________________________ 353
menu
context sensitive context sensitive ____________________ 413
Menu _______________________________________________ 210
circuit ___________________________________________ 219
draw ____________________________________________ 218
edit _____________________________________________ 213
file _____________________________________________ 210
insert ___________________________________________ 216
library___________________________________________ 224
project __________________________________________ 220
tools ____________________________________________ 225
view ____________________________________________ 221
window _________________________________________ 226
Menu. ? _____________________________________________ 227
Mirror ____________________________________________ 52, 54
Miscellaneous _______________________________________ 408
N
non return valve ______________________________________ 462
O
Object snap __________________________________________ 65
one-way flow control valve _________________________ 468, 469
Options
Automatic Updates ________________________________ 208
Connector Links ___________________________________ 206
Cross Reference Representation______________________ 205
Designation Conventions ___________________________ 204
Dimension _______________________________________ 203
Folder Locations __________________________________ 201
General _________________________________________ 199
Grid ____________________________________________ 200
Language ________________________________________ 202
Save ____________________________________________ 200
text fields ________________________________________ 200
Text Sizes________________________________________ 209
Warnings ________________________________________ 207
P
Page dividers ________________________________________ 159
Parts list ____________________________________________ 142
display __________________________________________ 143
edit _____________________________________________ 143
export___________________________________________ 147
find components __________________________________ 143
find target _______________________________________ 143
nodes ___________________________________________ 151
open ____________________________________________ 151
print ____________________________________________ 195
properties _______________________________________ 145
sort _____________________________________________ 143
Pilot line _____________________________________________ 42
Pneumatic Components ________________________________ 301
Pneumatic line ________________________________________ 76
PNG
export___________________________________________ 197
Polygonal chain _______________________________________ 80
Polyline ______________________________________________ 80
Port
connect __________________________________________ 33
Potential _____________________________________________ 74
Potentials ___________________________________________ 165
Predefined attributes __________________________________ 158
Predefined placeholders _______________________________ 158
Predefined variables __________________________________ 158
presentation
creation _________________________________________ 432
edit _____________________________________________ 432
pressure
absolute pressure
atmospheric _____________________________________ 445
pressure control valve _________________________________ 443
pressure switches ____________________________________ 283
Pressure Switches ____________________________________ 380
Print _______________________________________________ 195
Product catalogue _____________________________________ 29
Project___________________________________________ 27, 149
add _____________________________________________ 150
node ____________________________________________ 150
print ____________________________________________ 195
properties _______________________________________ 155
remove __________________________________________ 150
Project archiving______________________________________ 151
Project menu ________________________________________ 220
Project window ________________________________________ 27
Properties ___________________________________________ 155
Properties dialog window _______________________________ 18
cable ___________________________________________ 172
Cable List ________________________________________ 177
Cable Map _______________________________________ 175
cable symbol _____________________________________ 169
circle ____________________________________________ 83
circuit ___________________________________________ 155
component_______________________________________ 118
connector _________________________________________ 45
contact __________________________________________ 127
Cross Reference Representation_______________________ 71
cylinder __________________________________________ 50
dimensioning _____________________________________ 108
drawing layers _____________________________________ 67
electric line _______________________________________ 43
electric terminal___________________________________ 180
ellipse ___________________________________________ 85
image ____________________________________________ 87
line ___________________________________________ 43, 79
Manage Cross References... __________________________ 72
pneumatic line _____________________________________ 43
polygonal chain ____________________________________ 80
polyline __________________________________________ 80
project __________________________________________ 155
rectangle _________________________________________ 82
secondary component ______________________________ 127
set multiple terminals ______________________________ 182
set of connected lines _______________________________ 80
Terminal diagram - Properties _______________________ 187
text _____________________________________________ 133
way valve _________________________________________ 48
wiring ___________________________________________ 169
Proximity Switches ____________________________________ 369
Q
quick exhaust valve ___________________________________ 466
R
Rectangle ____________________________________________ 81
Rotate _______________________________________________ 53
S
Scale ________________________________________________ 54
Search
Symbol ___________________________________________ 23
Secondary component _________________________________ 127
semi-rotary actuator___________________________________ 449
sequence valve ___________________________________ 470, 471
Service Components __________________________________ 243
Set of connected lines __________________________________ 80
Show
automatic_________________________________________ 27
Show window _________________________________________ 27
shuttle valve _________________________________________ 464
signal flow __________________________________________ 438
signal flow component
numbering scheme ________________________________ 438
Silencers _____________________________________________ 44
Snap ________________________________________________ 65
Storage locations _____________________________________ 201
supply air throttling exhaust air throttling _________________ 469
supply elements ______________________________________ 301
switch
pressure operated _________________________________ 334
Symbol
align _____________________________________________ 52
group ____________________________________________ 51
insert ____________________________________________ 29
mirror _________________________________________ 52, 54
move ____________________________________________ 29
rotate ____________________________________________ 53
scale _____________________________________________ 54
Symbol library ________________________________________ 24
Symbols _____________________________________________ 21
T
T distributor
set ______________________________________________ 46
Terminal ____________________________________________ 180
Terminal diagram - Properties ___________________________ 187
Terminals ___________________________________________ 182
Text _________________________________________________ 86
Text attribute ________________________________________ 135
Text components _____________________________________ 132
Text link ____________________________________________ 135
Throttle valve ________________________________________ 469
TIF
export___________________________________________ 197
Tiles
Printout __________________________________________ 18
time delay valve delay valve ________________________ 472, 473
Toolbar
drawing __________________________________________ 72
Tools menu __________________________________________ 225
Transient sequence Unstable step Virtual triggering _________ 100
Transition ____________________________________________ 92
two pressure valve ____________________________________ 462
V
Valve editor __________________________________________ 48
valves
configurable _________________________________ 250, 307
directional _______________________________________ 255
directional valves _________________________________ 312
flow control ______________________________________ 284
flow control valves ________________________________ 328
groups __________________________________________ 341
pressure _________________________________________ 272
shutoff __________________________________________ 268
shutoff valves ____________________________________ 328
way valves ___________________________________ 250, 307
View menu __________________________________________ 221
W
Way valve
configure _________________________________________ 48
Window menu________________________________________ 226
Wiring ______________________________________________ 169
WMF
export___________________________________________ 197
Working line __________________________________________ 42
X
XML file ______________________________________________ 26

Fluidsim5 Enus v1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fluidsim5 Enus v1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fluidsim5 Enus v1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FluidSIM® 5

2.1 Technical Requirements 15

3.1 Create a new circuit diagram 18

4. Library and project window 27

4.1 Change window position 27

5.1 Insert and arrange symbols 29

© Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 3

6.1 Editable labels 56

7. Additional tools for creating drawings 64

7.1 Drawing tools 64

4 © Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

© Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 5

9.1 Draw dimension 107

10. Equipment identifications and designation conventions 110

10.1 Renumber Designations 112

11. Component attributes 117

11.1 Component attributes in the Properties dialog window 118

12. Parts list management and analyses 142

12.1 Display parts list 143

13. Manage projects 149

13.1 Create new project 149

6 © Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

14. Circuit and project properties 155

14.1 Attributes 156

15. Special functions for electric circuits 165

15.1 Potentials and conduction lines 165

16. Circuit input and output 195

16.1 Print circuit diagram and parts list 195

© Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 7

17.1 General 199

18. Menu overview 210

18.1 File 210

19. Functional diagram 228

19.1 Edit Mode 229

8 © Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

20. The Component Library 243

20.1 Hydraulic Components 243

© Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 9

10 © Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

21.1 Information about Single Components 413

22. Didactics Material Survey (Pneumatics) 438

22.1 Basics 438

23. Didactics Material Survey (Hydraulics) 480

23.1 Applications 480

© Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 11

12 © Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

Welcome to FluidSIM! Thank you for purchasing the FluidSIM

A major feature of FluidSIM is its close connection with CAD func-

Users of this software are encouraged to contribute tips, criticism,

Moreover, the newest updates can be found at our Internet site at

© Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 13

2.1 Technical Requirements

You need a computer with that runs using Windows XP (SP3),

If you intend to simulate complex circuit diagrams, a dual-core CPU

Having purchased the full version of FluidSIM , you received two

2.2 Installation and Online Activation

— Automatic Online Activation This variant requires Internet

— Indirect Activation In this variant an activation dialog box is

— Call Festo to receive your individual activation key If you don’t